JP7368851B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can start a second gaming state in which it is easier to satisfy the acquisition condition than the first gaming state.

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that acquire judgment information used to judge whether a special game (for example, a jackpot game) is successful or not when an acquisition condition is satisfied, and determine the judgment information based on the satisfaction of the judgment condition. In the above gaming machines, there are cases where a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the acquisition condition is more easily satisfied than the first gaming state are provided (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2000-300761

The present invention aims to improve the interest of starting the second game state.

In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes an acquisition unit that acquires determination information when an acquisition condition is met, and a device that determines whether or not a special game is appropriate based on the determination information when the determination condition is met. a determination means, a symbol display means for displaying a symbol in a variable manner when a determination condition is satisfied and stopping displaying a symbol according to the result of the determination, a determining means for determining a variation pattern of the variation display at the start of the variation display, and a special game. a storage means for storing information specifying the number of times of determination, which is the number of times it was determined that the winning has not been won; a starting means capable of starting a second game state in which conditions are easily met; a first initializing means initializing information in response to winning a special game; and a receiving means accepting a predetermined initialization operation. When the initialization operation is accepted, a second initialization means initializes the information, and a game count image that can suggest the current value of the determination count specified from the information and whose display content is updated in each game. screen display means for displaying a screen composed of various images including; the determining means is configured such that the information is initialized by the second initialization means, and after that, when the number of determinations reaches a specific number of times, the determination means enters a second gaming state; is started, and when the information is initialized by the first initialization means and then the number of determinations reaches a specific number of times and the second gaming state is started , the fluctuation after the start of the second gaming state A common variation pattern is determined in the display , and the screen display means displays the game count image with predetermined initial display content when the power is turned on, regardless of the current value of the determination count specified from the information. , it is possible to display the number represented by the number of games image incremented by 1 for each game .

According to the above configuration, the second game state can be started after the number of times of determination, which is the number of times it has been determined that the special game has not been won, reaches a predetermined specific number of times. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the second gaming state is not started at this opportunity, the interest of the opportunity for starting the second gaming state is improved. Further, according to the present invention, in the variable display related to the start of the second gaming state, the information is initialized by the second initializing means and then the second gaming state is started, and the first initializing means A common variation pattern is determined for the case where the information is initialized and the second gaming state is started thereafter. Therefore, there is an advantage that the number of types of variation patterns can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the variation patterns for starting the second gaming state are different in each case.

According to the present invention, the interest of starting the second game state is improved.

It is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of a gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining details of a base display. FIG. 3 is a functional block diagram of an image control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table and a hit determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an example of a table scenario. FIG. 7 is another diagram for explaining an example of a table scenario. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for each period. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for each period. It is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-time-saving gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for a time-saving gaming state. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a deferral notification image and a remaining number of times image. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining display periods of a deferral notification image and a remaining number of times image. It is a figure for explaining the specific example of each screen at the time of the start of the 2nd time-saving game state. It is a figure for explaining the specific example of each screen in a time-saving game state. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a display period of a start image. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of the start time image. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the details of the update timing of the number of the remaining number of times image. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of each screen when a power outage occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of each screen when a power outage occurs. It is a diagram for explaining a configuration for notifying an activated period. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a display period of a left-handed image. It is a diagram for explaining a configuration for notifying that it is possible to shift to a second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a preliminary determination table. It is a flowchart of main processing by main CPU. 2 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart of input control processing by main CPU. It is a flowchart of the 1st starting port detection switch input process by main CPU. It is a flowchart of preliminary determination processing by the main CPU. It is a flow chart of special figure special electric control processing by main CPU. It is a flowchart of special symbol storage determination processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart of special symbol stop processing by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart of a transition determination process performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart of general map general electricity processing by main CPU. It is a flowchart of main processing by a sub CPU. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by a sub CPU. 3 is a flowchart of command analysis processing 1 by a sub CPU. 3 is a flowchart of command analysis processing 2 by the sub CPU. It is a flow chart of production input control processing by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of main processing by a host CPU. 3 is a flowchart of interrupt processing by a host CPU. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation production pattern decision table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an end effect in the second embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the specific example of the execution time of the end effect in 2nd embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table and a hit determination table in the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a symbol decision table in a 3rd embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-time saving gaming state in a third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern decision table for time-saving game states in a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a preliminary judgment table in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart of preliminary determination processing by a main CPU in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart of special symbol stop processing by the main CPU in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart of the migration determination process etc. by the main CPU in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a mock diagram of each screen in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a restriction period in the third embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a figure for explaining other specific examples of the fluctuation time of the pattern display device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which the time-saving game states in the third embodiment overlap. It is a figure for explaining the specific example when the time-saving game state in 3rd Embodiment ends. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of each image displayed in the time-saving game state in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a right-handed hitting start image and a left-handed hitting start image in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a result image in a third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a counting period in a third embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the 1st information and the 2nd information in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a display period of a start image in a modified example.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, the present invention will be explained in detail with reference to embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Configuration of gaming machine>
FIG. 1 is a front view showing an example of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a front view showing an example of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a block diagram of a gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 and an inner frame 3. The outer frame 2 is attached to the island structure of the game hall, and the inner frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. Further, a glass frame 4 is attached to the inner frame 3. Furthermore, a game board 10 having a board surface onto which game balls are launched is attached to the inner frame 3.

As shown in FIG. 1, a window 4a is formed in the glass frame 4, and a transparent plate 4b is attached to the window 4a. A game area 10a in which a game ball can move (flow down) is formed between the board surface of the game board 10 described above and the transparent plate 4b on the front side thereof. The transparent plate 4b is, for example, a glass plate, and is detachably fixed to the glass frame 4.

The glass frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 5 at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when facing the gaming machine), and is connected to the outer frame 2 through the hinge mechanism 5 at the other end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when facing the gaming machine). The right side when facing the gaming machine can be rotated in the direction of opening the outer frame 2. Specifically, the glass frame 4 covers the game board 10 together with the glass plate 4b, and opens the inner part of the outer frame 2 including the game board 10 by rotating like a door about the hinge mechanism part 5 as a fulcrum. can.

A locking mechanism for fixing the other end of the glass frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is provided at the other end of the glass frame 4 (for example, on the right side when facing the gaming machine). The locking mechanism can be unlocked using a special key. Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with a door open switch 136 (see FIG. 3) that detects whether the glass frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or not.

A tray unit 7 having a storage tray 6 (an upper tray 6a and a lower tray 6b) for storing game balls is provided at the lower part of the glass frame 4 (lower part of the window 4a). The tray unit 7 also includes a production button 8 that can be pressed and operated by the player, a cross key 40 that allows the player to perform various selection operations, and a button that allows the game balls stored in the lower tray 6b to be transferred to the outside of the gaming machine. An ejection button 9 for ejecting the liquid is provided.

The production button 8 is provided at the center of the dish unit 7, as shown in FIG. The production button 8 of this embodiment is configured to be able to advance and retreat between a normal operating position, a depressed position that is retracted downward from the normal operating position, and a protruding operating position that projects upward from the normal operating position. Ru. In the specific example of FIG. 1, the effect button 8 is shown in the normal operation position.

The production button 8 is configured to be pressable from any position including the normal operation position and the protruding operation position to the press position. Note that, in this specification, the detailed structure of the effect button 8 is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-116168, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As will be described in detail later, an operation validity period is provided during which the operation of the effect button 8 can be accepted (the operation of the effect button 8 becomes valid). The performance button 8 is provided with a performance button detection switch 8a (see FIG. 4), and when the performance button detection switch 8a detects an operation by the player, a predetermined performance is executed.

The cross key 40 includes an upper button, a lower button, a left button, and a right button. Further, the cross key 40 is provided with cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d). The cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d) include an upper button detection switch 40a that detects the operation of the upper button of the cross key 40, a lower button detection switch 40b that detects the operation of the lower button, and an operation of the left button. It includes a left button detection switch 40c that detects the operation of the right button, and a right button detection switch 40d (see FIG. 3) that detects the operation of the right button.

As shown in FIG. 1, an operating handle 11 is provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 4. The operating handle 11 is provided with a touch sensor 11a (see FIG. 4). When the touch sensor 11a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11, a touch signal is transmitted to the firing control board 160.

When the firing control board 160 receives a touch signal from the touch sensor 11a, it allows the firing solenoid 12a to be energized. When the rotation angle of the operating handle 11 changes, a gear directly connected to the operating handle 11 rotates, and a knob of the firing volume 11b (see FIG. 3) connected to the gear rotates.

During the period in which the touch signal is received, a voltage corresponding to the detected angle of the firing volume 11b is applied to the firing solenoid 12a (see FIG. 3) provided in the game ball firing mechanism. When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 12a, the firing solenoid 12a operates according to the applied voltage, and the game ball moves toward the gaming area 10a of the game board 10 with a force according to the rotation angle of the operating handle 11. fired.

As shown in FIG. 1, an outer rail R1 and an inner rail R2 are provided around the game board 10 (game area 10a). The above outer rail R1 and inner rail R2 guide the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the upper part of the game area 10a. The game ball guided to the upper part of the game area 10a falls within the game area 10a. A plurality of nails and windmills are provided in the game area 10a, and game balls fall unpredictably.

As shown in FIG. 1, a center member 12 is arranged approximately at the center of the game board 10. The center member 12 is provided with an image display device 31 consisting of a liquid crystal display device or the like, and an effect movable body 32. The effect movable body 32 is movable to a retreat position and an appearance position, and normally stops at the retreat position. The specific example in FIG. 1 shows a case where the effect movable body 32 stops at the retracted position. The effect movable body 32 may overlap the image displayed by the image display device 31 when viewed from the front. Moreover, the effect movable body 32 is configured to include a light emitting body. The effect movable body 32 emits light by the light-emitting body.

As shown in FIG. 1, a first starting port 13 into which a game ball can enter is provided in the game area 10a at the lower center of the center member 12. Further, a second starting port 14 is provided below the first starting port 13. When a game ball enters the first starting port 13 or the second starting port 14, the game starts.

The second starting port 14 is provided with an opening/closing door 14b. The opening/closing door 14b is movably controlled to have a first mode in which it is maintained in the closed state and a second mode in which the opening/closing door 14b is in the open state. According to the above-mentioned second starting port 14, in the first aspect, it is difficult for the game ball to win (including cases where it is practically impossible), and in the second aspect, the game ball is easy to win (the first starting port (Easier to win than 13).

In addition, the second starting port 14 (opening/closing door 14b) of this embodiment is configured such that a game ball cannot enter it during the period controlled in the first mode. However, if the game ball enters the ball more easily during the period in which the second starting port 14 is controlled in the first manner than in the period in which it is controlled in the second manner, the period in which the second starting port 14 is controlled in the first manner is A configuration may be adopted in which a game ball can enter the second starting port 14.

The game ball that has won in the first starting hole 13 is detected by the first starting hole detection switch 13a (see FIG. 3). Further, the game ball that has won in the second starting port 14 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 14a (see FIG. 3). When game balls are detected by the first starting port detection switch 13a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls (prize balls) are paid out. Similarly, when game balls are detected by the second starting port detection switch 14a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls (prize balls) are paid out.

In addition, in this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 13 and the second starting port 14, three game balls are paid out in common, but the number of paid out balls is different for each starting port. It's okay. For example, the first starting port 13 may dispense three pieces, and the second starting port 14 may dispense one piece.

When the first starting port detection switch 13a or the second starting port detection switch 14a detects a game ball, a lottery for acquiring the right to play a jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot lottery") is executed. The jackpot game of this embodiment includes a long hit game and a short hit game. The long winning game consists of 10 rounds, and in each round, the big prize opening is opened for a time (for example, 30 seconds) during which the game ball can win. However, each round ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the grand prize opening. Moreover, the short winning game consists of two rounds, and in each round, the big prize opening is opened for a time during which the game ball can win. However, each round ends when a predetermined number of game balls enter the grand prize opening. A predetermined time interval is provided between each round. In the small winning game, the big winning opening is opened for a time period (for example, 1.8 seconds) in which the game ball can win.

As shown in FIG. 1, a gate 15 through which a game ball can pass is provided in the game area 10a on the right side of the center member 12. The gate 15 is provided with a gate detection switch 15a (see FIG. 3) that detects the passage of a game ball, and when the gate detection switch 15a detects the passage of a game ball, a lottery of normal symbols, which will be described later, is executed.

In the gaming area 10a on the right side of the center member 12 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right side area"), a first grand prize opening 16 and a second grand prize opening 17 into which game balls can enter are provided. A game ball can enter into the above-mentioned right side area when the operating handle 11 is rotated by a greater angle than a predetermined angle (so-called "right-handed hitting"). On the other hand, when the operating handle 11 is rotated by a smaller angle than the angle concerned (so-called "left-handed hitting"), the game ball does not enter the right side area. That is, in the first big winning hole 16 and second big winning hole 17 provided in the right side area, you can win a game ball when you play the game with your right hand, and you can win a game ball when you play with your left hand. It is configured so that it does not win prizes.

In this embodiment, when playing with left-handed players, the game ball can win in the first starting hole 13, but it is difficult (including cases where it is virtually impossible) to win the game ball in the second starting hole 14. configuration is adopted. In addition, when playing with a right-handed player, the game ball can win in the second starting port 14, but the first starting port 13 has a configuration that makes it difficult (including cases where it is virtually impossible) to win the game ball. be done.

The first big prize opening 16 is normally maintained in a closed state by the opening/closing door 16b, and it is impossible to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the jackpot game, the opening/closing door 16b is opened, and the opening/closing door 16b functions as a tray that guides the game ball into the first grand prize opening 16, so that the game ball can enter the first grand prize opening 16. . The first big winning hole 16 is provided with a first big winning hole detection switch 16a, and when the first big winning hole detection switch 16a detects game balls, a preset number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. be done.

The second big prize opening 17 is normally maintained in a closed state by the movable piece 17b, and it is impossible to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the jackpot game, the movable piece 17b operates to open the second big prize opening 17, and the movable piece 17b functions as a guide path for guiding the game ball into the second big winning hole 17, so that the game ball The ball can be entered into the second grand prize opening 17. The second big winning hole 17 is provided with a second big winning hole detection switch 17a, and when the second big winning hole detection switch 17a detects the entry of game balls, a preset number of prizes (for example, 15) are awarded. The ball is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of general winning holes 18 are provided in the gaming area 10a. When a game ball enters each of the general winning holes 18, predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out. In addition, at the bottom of the gaming area 10a, the ball did not enter any of the general winning hole 18, the first starting hole 13, the second starting hole 14, the first big winning hole 16, and the second big winning hole 17. An outlet 19 is provided for discharging game balls.

The image display device 31 is controlled by an effect control board 120 (image control board 150), which will be described later, and displays various images. For example, a demonstration moving image is displayed on the image display device 31 during a non-gaming period when no games are played. In addition, the image display device 31 variably displays three performance symbols GA (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) for informing the jackpot lottery result during the game period during which the game is executed. The production pattern GA is displayed scrolling from the top to the bottom of the image display device 31 (fluctuating display), then displayed swinging within the image display device 31 (temporarily stopped), and then stopped by the pattern confirmation command. Is displayed.

In this embodiment, by stopping and displaying a specific combination of performance symbols GA (for example, 777, etc.), it is announced that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Further, by stopping and displaying combinations other than the specific performance symbol 38 (for example, 289, etc.), it is announced that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.

Note that a fourth symbol is displayed on the image display device 31 in addition to the performance symbol GA. The fourth symbol is an image showing the fluctuating state of the performance symbol GA used to notify the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a display lamp indicating the fluctuation state of the production symbol GA is provided separately and the fourth symbol is not displayed on the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pair of left and right performance lamps 33 are provided at the top of the glass frame 4. Each of the performance lamps 33 includes a plurality of lights, and the light emitting direction and emitted color of the lights are changed according to each performance.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an audio output device 34 (see FIG. 4) consisting of a speaker (not shown). The audio output device 34 outputs various sounds including BGM (background music) and SE (sound effects). For example, the audio output device 34 outputs BGM corresponding to the image displayed on the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 1, a main display 28 is provided at the lower left side of the gaming area 10a. The main display 28 described above is controlled by a main control board 110, which will be described later. In addition, the main display 28 includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reservation display 23, a second special symbol reservation display 24, and a normal symbol. It includes a pending indicator 25 and a round number indicator 26.

The first special symbol display device 20 is for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the first starting port 13, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs. Specifically, a plurality of special symbols corresponding to the results of the jackpot lottery are provided, and by displaying the special symbols (lighting mode) corresponding to the results of the jackpot lottery on the first special symbol display device 20, the lottery results are displayed in the game. person will be notified. The above special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (blinking) for a predetermined period of time, and then are stopped and displayed.

The second special symbol display device 21 is for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the second starting port 14, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs (the first special symbol display device 21). Specifically, a plurality of special symbols are provided corresponding to the results of the jackpot lottery, and by displaying the special symbols (lighting mode) corresponding to the results of the jackpot lottery on the second special symbol display device 21, the lottery results are displayed in the game. person will be notified. The special symbols on the second special symbol display device 21, like the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 20 described above, are displayed in a variable manner (blinking) for a predetermined period of time, and then are stopped and displayed.

The normal symbol display device 22 notifies the result of a lottery of normal symbols that is executed when a game ball passes through the gate 15. As will be described in detail later, when a player wins a normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol lottery"), the regular symbol display device 22 lights up, and then the second starting port 14 is controlled in the second mode for a predetermined period of time. Ru. The above-described normal symbol display device 22 is fluctuatedly displayed (blinking) for a predetermined period of time when a game ball passes through the gate 15, and then stopped and displayed.

If a game ball enters the first starting port 13 or second starting port 14 during a special symbol fluctuation display or in a jackpot game and the jackpot drawing cannot be performed immediately, the right to draw the jackpot is reserved under certain conditions. be done. For example, the right to a jackpot lottery that is reserved when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 is reserved as the first reservation, and the right to a jackpot lottery that is reserved when a game ball enters the second starting port 14. is reserved as the second reservation.

The first special symbol reservation display 23 displays the current value of the number of first reservations. The first hold in this embodiment is held with a maximum of four items. Further, the second special symbol reservation display 24 displays the current value of the number of second reservations. The second hold in this embodiment is held with an upper limit of four, similar to the first hold. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when both the first hold and the second hold are stored, the second hold is prioritized and cleared. That is, the second special symbol display device 21 is given priority over the first special symbol display device 20 and is displayed in a variable manner.

If the normal symbol lottery cannot be performed immediately during the fluctuating display of the normal symbol or during the period in which the second starting port 14 (opening/closing door 14b) is in the second mode (open), the right to the common symbol lottery is reserved. The upper limit number of reserved symbols for the regular symbol lottery is set to four, and the number of reserved symbols for the regular symbol lottery is displayed on the regular symbol reservation display 25. It should be noted that the general drawing lottery is also executed in a jackpot game (non-time-saving game state). The round number display 26 is for notifying the number of rounds of the round game played during the jackpot (special game).

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 170, and a game information output terminal board 27 are provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1. The power supply board 170 is provided with a power plug 171 and a power switch (not shown) for supplying power to the gaming machine.

<Configuration of game control device>
FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a game control device that controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine 1 includes a lamp control board 140, an image control board 150, and a firing control board 160 in addition to the above-described main control board 110, performance control board 120, payout control board 130, and power supply board 170. do.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operations of the game. As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 includes at least a one-chip microcomputer including a main CPU 111, a main ROM 112, and a main RAM 113, and an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control.

The main CPU 111 reads a program stored in the main ROM 112 and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from each detection switch (first starting port detection switch 13a, etc.). Depending on the results of the above arithmetic processing, various commands are sent to other boards from the output port. Further, the main CPU 111 controls each display including the main display 28 described above. The main RAM 113 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the main CPU 111.

As shown in FIG. 3, the input side of the main control board 110 includes a first starting opening detection switch 13a, a second starting opening detection switch 14a, a gate detection switch 15a, a first big winning opening detection switch 16a, and a second big winning opening detection switch 13a. The opening detection switch 17a, the general winning opening detection switch 18a and the out ball detection switch 19a are connected, and a game ball detection signal is input from the above detection switches.

For example, the game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 16 is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 16a. Further, the game ball detected by the first big winning opening detection switch 16a is then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. Similarly, the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 17 is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 17a, and then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. A game ball that enters the general winning hole 18 is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 18a, and then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. In the above configuration, the game ball launched into the game area 10a is finally detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. Hereinafter, the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 19a may be referred to as the "out number".

As shown in FIG. 3, a signal from the clear switch 30a is input to the main control board 110. Specifically, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a clear button 30 (not shown). The clear switch 30a outputs an ON signal to the main control board 110 during a period in which the clear button 30 is operated (pressed). Further, the clear switch 30a outputs an OFF signal to the main control board 110 during a period when the clear button 30 is not operated.

The clear button 30 described above cannot be operated when the inner frame 3 is in a closed state. That is, the clear button 30 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 operates the clear button 30. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the clear button 30 being operated, various information in the main RAM 113 is initialized.

The main control board 110 includes a starting opening opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the opening/closing door 14b of the second starting opening 14, a first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the opening/closing door 16b of the first big winning opening 16, and a second big winning opening solenoid that opens and closes the opening/closing door 14b of the second starting opening 14. A second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the movable piece 17b of the winning opening 17 is connected.

The main control board 110 includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reserve display 23, a second special symbol reserve display 24, and a normal symbol reserve. A display 25 and a round number display 26 are connected. The main control board 110 outputs external information signals necessary for managing gaming machines in a hall computer or the like of a gaming parlor to the gaming information output terminal board 27.

As shown in FIG. 3, a right-handed lamp 28 is connected to the main control board 110. The right-handed lamp 28 is turned on during a period in which it is more advantageous to play the game with right-handed players than with left-handed players, and is turned off during a period in which it is more advantageous to play the game with left-handed players than right-handed players. For example, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up in a time-saving game state, a jackpot game, and a small win game. In the above configuration, when the right-handed player lamp 28 lights up, the player plays the game with the right-handed player. Therefore, the right-handed lamp 28 can also be said to be a means for instructing the operating mode (left-handed or right-handed) of the operating handle 11.

The main ROM 112 stores a game control program to be described later and data necessary for various games. Further, the main RAM 113 has a plurality of storage areas. For example, the main RAM 113 includes a normal symbol retention number (G) storage area, a normal symbol retention storage area, a first special symbol retention number (U1) storage area, a second special symbol retention number (U2) storage area, and a judgment storage area. , first special symbol storage area, second special symbol storage area, high probability game count (X) storage area, round game count (R) storage area, open count (K) storage area, game status storage area, game status buffer , a stop symbol data storage area, an effect transmission data storage area, etc. are provided. The gaming state storage area includes a time-saving game flag storage area, a high probability game flag storage area, a special figure special electric line processing data storage area, and a regular figure general electric line processing data storage area. Note that the storage area described above is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 27 is a board for outputting external information signals generated by the main control board 110 to a hall computer of a game parlor or the like. The game information output terminal board 27 is connected to the main control board 110 by wiring, and is also provided with a connector for connection to a hall computer or the like of a game parlor. Further, a magnetic sensor for detecting illegal magnetism is connected to the main control board 110.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 is provided with a base display 114. The base display 114 of this embodiment displays a base value, which will be described later. The base display 114 includes four segment displays (see FIG. 4, which will be described later), and is directly mounted on the main control board 110.

The power supply board 170 converts the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply plug 171 into a predetermined voltage and supplies it to each control board. Further, the power supply board 170 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. Specifically, when the power outage detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 111 becomes operational, and when the power outage detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 111 becomes inactive.

In this embodiment, the power supply board 170 is provided with a backup power supply made of a capacitor. With the backup power supply described above, the data stored in the main RAM 113 is maintained even when the operation is stopped. Note that the backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, for example. Further, a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

The performance control board 120 controls each performance. As shown in FIG. 3, the production control board 120 includes a sub CPU 121, a sub ROM 122, a sub RAM 123, and an RTC (real time clock) 124. The above effect control board 120 is connected to the main control board 110 so as to be able to communicate in one direction.

The sub CPU 121 reads a program stored in the sub ROM 122 and performs calculations based on a command sent from the main control board 110 or an input signal from the production button detection switch 8a input via the lamp control board 140. Execute processing. Further, the sub CPU 121 transmits corresponding data to the lamp control board 140 or the image control board 150 based on the above-mentioned arithmetic processing. The sub-RAM 123 functions as a data work area when the sub-CPU 121 performs arithmetic processing.

The sub ROM 122 stores performance control programs and data necessary for various games. For example, a variable performance pattern determination table for determining a performance pattern based on a fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110, a performance pattern pattern determination table for determining a combination of performance symbols GA to be stopped and displayed (not shown) ) etc. are stored in the sub ROM 122. Note that the sub ROM 122 stores many other tables and programs (not shown).

Sub RAM 123 has multiple storage areas. Specifically, the sub-RAM 123 includes a command reception buffer, a gaming state storage area, a performance mode storage area, a performance pattern storage area, a performance symbol storage area, a determination storage area (0th storage area), a first reservation storage area, A second reserved storage area and the like are provided.

The RTC 124 outputs the current time. The RTC 124 of this embodiment operates using the power supply during a period when the gaming machine is supplied with power from the outside. On the other hand, during a period when power is not supplied to the gaming machine from the outside, the gaming machine operates using a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board 170. The RTC 124 described above can measure the current date and time even during a period when power is not supplied to the gaming machine from the outside.

The sub CPU 121 receives a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time from the RTC 124, and executes various processes according to the current date and time. In addition, a battery may be provided in the production control board 120, and the RTC 124 may be configured to be operable by the battery.

The payout control board 130 executes game ball launch control and prize ball payout control. As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control board 130 includes a payout CPU 131, a payout ROM 132, and a payout RAM 133, and is connected to the main control board 110 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. Further, signals from a dispensing ball counting switch 135, a door opening switch 136, a tray full detection switch 51, and a ball clogging detection switch 52 are input to the dispensing control board 130.

The paid-out ball counting switch 135 is a switch for detecting whether or not game balls have been paid out. The tray full detection switch 51 is a switch for detecting that the game ball storage tray (lower tray) is full. Further, the ball clogging detection switch 52 is a switch for detecting, for example, a clogging of game balls in a path through which the game balls to be paid out move.

The payout CPU 131 reads the program stored in the payout ROM 132 based on input signals from the various switches described above, performs arithmetic processing, and transmits data according to the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110. .

As shown in FIG. 3, the output side of the payout control board 130 is connected to a payout motor 134 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game ball storage section to the player. The payout CPU 131 controls the payout motor 134 of the prize ball payout device based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 to pay out predetermined prize balls to the player. The payout RAM 133 functions as a data work area during calculation processing by the payout CPU 131.

In this embodiment, it is monitored whether a game ball lending device (card unit) (not shown) is connected to the payout control board 130. If the game ball lending device is connected to the payout control board 130, the firing control board 160 is allowed to fire the game balls. On the other hand, if the game ball lending device is not connected to the payout control board 130, the firing control board 160 is prohibited from firing game balls.

When the launch control board 160 receives launch control data from the payout control board 130, it authorizes launch. Then, the touch signal from the touch sensor 11a and the input signal from the firing volume 11b are read out, and the firing solenoid 12a and the ball feeding solenoid 12b are energized and the game balls are fired.

The firing solenoid 12a is composed of a rotary solenoid. A firing member (not shown) is directly connected to the firing solenoid 12a, and the firing member rotates when the firing solenoid 12a rotates. One game ball is fired each time the firing solenoid rotates once.

The rotational speed of the firing solenoid 12a is set to approximately 99.9 times/min based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control board 160. With the above configuration, the number of game balls fired per minute is approximately 99.9 (balls/minute). That is, the game ball will be fired approximately every 0.6 seconds. The ball feeding solenoid 12b is constituted by a linear solenoid, and sends out the game balls in the upper tray 6a (see FIG. 1) one by one toward a shooting member directly connected to the shooting solenoid 12a.

The lamp control board 140 is connected to the production control board 120 so that bidirectional communication is possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the production button detection switch 8a and the cross key detection switch (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d) are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 140. Detection signals from each of the detection switches described above are input to the production control board 120 via the lamp control board 140.

Further, the effect movable body 32 and the effect lamp 33 provided on the game board 10 are connected to the lamp control board 140. The lamp control board 140 controls the lighting of the performance lamp 33 and controls the drive of a motor for changing the direction of light irradiation based on the data transmitted from the performance control board 120. Further, it controls the energization of a drive source such as a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect movable body 32. In addition, in this embodiment, since the performance button 8 is configured to protrude, the performance movable body 32 includes the performance button 8.

The image control board 150 is connected to the production control board 120 for two-way communication, and the image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 are connected to the output side thereof.

<Base display>
FIGS. 4(a) to 4(c) are diagrams for explaining control of the base display 114 in this embodiment. Although described in detail later, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment shifts to each gaming state including a low probability non-time-saving gaming state. The base display 114 displays the base value B in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. The base value B for a specific section is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls paid out in the section by the above-mentioned number of outs (total number of game balls hit out).

FIG. 4A is a diagram for explaining various counters (prize ball counter for base calculation, out counter for base calculation, total out counter) used for display control of the base display 114. Each of the above counters is provided in the main RAM 113, for example.

The prize ball counter for base calculation counts the prize balls in a specific section. Specifically, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 18, the value "10" is added to the base calculation prize ball counter. Further, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17, the numerical value "15" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. Similarly, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14, the value "3" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. Further, the base calculation out counter counts the number of outs in a specific section. Specifically, each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, a numerical value "1" is added to the out counter for base calculation.

The main CPU 111 calculates the base value B of the specific section by multiplying the calculation result obtained by dividing the value of the prize ball counter for base calculation by the value of the out counter for base calculation by the numerical value "100". However, the out counter for base calculation and the prize ball counter for base calculation are not incremented except in the low probability non-time saving game state. In the above configuration, the base value B in the low probability non-time saving gaming state is calculated in the specific section. In addition, in this embodiment, the period in which the out counter for base calculation and the prize ball counter for base calculation are added may be described as a "counting period", and the period other than the counting period may be described as a "non-counting period". .

Each time a predetermined section ends, the main CPU 111 stores (saves) the base value B of the section. In this embodiment, the base value B is saved every time 60,000 outs are counted. Specifically, the total out counter counts the number of outs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "total number of outs") during the period from when the power is first turned on to the present. The main CPU 111 calculates and stores a base value B from the current values of the base calculation award ball counter and the base calculation out counter every time the numerical value "60000" is added to the total out counter. Furthermore, each time the numerical value "60000" is added to the total out counter, the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter are initialized.

FIG. 4(b) is a diagram for explaining the base value B displayed on the base display 114. In the specific example of FIG. 4(b), 60,000 outs are counted in section 3, then 60,000 outs are counted in section 2, 60,000 outs are counted in section 1, and 60,000 outs are counted in section L. Assume that the The number of outs in section L is less than 60,000 (0 to 59,999). Furthermore, the base value B in section 3 is "B3", the base value B in section 2 is "B2", the base value B in section 1 is "B1", and the base value B in section L is "BL ”.

In the above specific example, in the section L, the base value BL of the section L (real time), the base value B1 of the section 1 (the previous section), the base value B2 of the section 2 (the section 2 times before), and the section The base value B3 of 3 (3rd previous section) is displayed on the base display 114. Specifically, the base display 114 switches and displays four base values B in the order of base value BL, base value B1, base value B2, and base value B3. The base value B of each section is switched and displayed, for example, every 5 seconds. In this embodiment, the base value B is continuously displayed on the base display 114, including the period during which games can be played.

When one section ends (when 60,000 outs are counted), the base value B of that section is saved as the base value B of the previous section, and the base value B of the oldest section is discarded. . For example, in the specific example of FIG. 4(b), when the number of outs in section L reaches 60,000, the base value BL of section L is stored as the base value B1 of section 1, and the base value B1 of section 1 is stored as the base value B1 of section 2. The base value B2 of section 2 is stored as the base value B3 of section 3, and the base value 3 of the oldest section 3 is discarded.

FIG. 4C is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the base display 114. As shown in FIG. 4C, the base display 114 includes a first display section 114x and a second display section 114y. The second display section 114y is composed of two seven segment displays and displays the base value B. The second display section 114y described above can display numbers "00" to "99". If the base value is larger than the numerical value "100", "99." is displayed on the second display section 114y (the dot display section lights up).

As described above, the base display 114 switches and displays the base value B of the sections in the order of section L, section 1, section 2, and section 3 on the second display section 114y about every 5 seconds. The first display section 114x displays identification information (bL, b1, b2, b3) that allows identification of which interval's base value B is displayed on the second display section 114y.

For example, in the specific example of FIG. 4B described above, the identification information "bL" is displayed on the first display section 114x during the period in which the base value BL of the section L is displayed. Further, during the period in which the base value B1 of section 1 is displayed, the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display section 114x, and in the period in which the base value B2 of section 2 is displayed, the identification information "b2" is displayed on the first display section 114x. Identification information "b3" is displayed on the first display section 114x during a period in which the base value B3 of section 3 is displayed on the first display section 114x.

However, if the total number of outs is less than 60,000, the base value displayed on the second display section 114y cannot be calculated during the period in which the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display section 114x. Similarly, if the total number of outs is less than 60,000, the base value for displaying the identification information "b2" and the base value for displaying the identification information "b3" cannot be calculated. Considering the above circumstances, if the total number of outs is less than 60,000, during the period in which the identification information "b1" to "b3" is displayed on the first display section 114x, each identification information is displayed blinking and , a special symbol "--" is displayed on the second display section 114y.

If the total number of outs is 60,000 or more but less than 120,000, the base value B1 is calculated, which is displayed as identification information "b1", but the base value B2 is displayed as identification information "b2", and the identification information is displayed as "b3". The base value B3 cannot be calculated. Considering the above circumstances, if the total number of outs is 60,000 or more but less than 120,000, during the period when the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display section 114x, the identification information is displayed by lighting and the base value During a period in which B1 is lit and the identification information "b2" or "b3" is displayed, each piece of identification information is displayed blinking and a special symbol "--" is lit and displayed on the second display section 114y.

Similarly, if the total number of outs is 120,000 or more but less than 180,000, the base value B1 that displays the identification information "b1" and the base value B2 that displays the identification information "b2" are calculated, but the base value B2 that displays the identification information "b3" is calculated. ” cannot be calculated. Considering the above circumstances, if the total number of outs is 120,000 or more but less than 180,000, the identification information "b1" or "b2" is displayed on the first display section 114x. At the same time, the base values (B1, B2) are displayed by lighting, and during the period when the identification information "b3" is displayed, the identification information is displayed blinking, and a special symbol "--" is displayed on the second display section 114y. Lights up to display.

As described above, in this embodiment, the real-time base value BL is displayed during the period in which the identification information "bL" is displayed. However, in the specific example shown in FIG. 4B, for example, if the number of normal outs in section L is not large enough, it is difficult to calculate an accurate (original) base value B. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration in which it is reported whether or not the number of normal outs in section L is sufficiently large. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can evaluate the base value BL after considering whether or not the number of normal outs is sufficient.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the number of normal outs in section L is less than 6000, the identification information "bL" is displayed blinking, and when the number of normal outs in section L is 6000 or more, the identification information "bL" is displayed blinking. '' is displayed on the screen. With the above configuration, whether or not the number of normal outs in section L is sufficiently large is substantially notified, and the above-mentioned advantages can be obtained.

By the way, before a player actually plays a game, the operation of the gaming machine 1 is normally checked. The above operation check includes checking whether the detection switches (13a, 14a, 16a, 17a, 18a, 19a) normally detect game balls. Therefore, if the prize ball counter for base calculation and the out counter for base calculation are incremented immediately after the gaming machine 1 is first powered on, then the calculation will be made immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time. There may be an inconvenience that the base value calculated is different from the base value B calculated when actually playing the game.

In consideration of the above circumstances, this embodiment has a configuration in which the prize ball counter for base calculation and the out counter for base calculation are not added until the total out counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, the value "300"). Adopted. According to the above configuration, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

<Setting change switch>
As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 is provided with a setting change switch 115a. The setting change switch 115a described above turns on when the setting key device 115 (not shown) is rotated to a specific position, and turns off when the setting key device 115 is rotated to a position other than the specific position. The gaming machine 1 can be set with any one of a plurality of types (for example, six types) of setting values with different ball payout rates. Specifically, when the setting key device 115 is rotated to a specific position and the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the clear button 30 pressed, the setting change process described below is executed and the settings are changed. Shifts to a mode where values can be changed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "setting change mode"). When the setting change mode is entered, the current setting values stored (set) in the main RAM 113 are displayed on the base display 114. In addition, the setting values displayed on the base display 114 are switched in the order of "...1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1..." every time the clear button 30 is pressed in the setting change mode. . When the setting change switch 115a changes to the OFF state in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the base display 114 is stored (set) in the main RAM 113, and the setting change mode ends.

In the setting change process, various information stored in the main RAM 113 is initialized. For example, the remaining number of games N indicating the remaining number of games until a second time-saving game state, which will be described later, is initialized to an initial value (in the case of this embodiment, a numerical value "800"). Note that the remaining number of times N is also initialized in the processing at the time of clear operation, which will be described later. The clear operation process is executed when the power is turned on with the clear button 30 pressed.

<Configuration of image control board>
FIG. 5 is a functional block diagram of the image control board 150. As shown in FIG. 5, the image control board 150 includes a host CPU 151, a host RAM 152, a host ROM 153, a CGROM 154, a crystal oscillator 155, a VRAM 156, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 200 to control the image display of the image display device 31. configured.

The host CPU 151 instructs the VDP 200 to display various images on the image display device 31 based on a production pattern designation command, which will be described later, received from the production control board 120. The above instructions are executed by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands.

The VDP 200 transmits a V blank interrupt signal and a drawing end signal to the host CPU 151. When receiving each of the above signals, the host CPU 151 executes interrupt processing as appropriate. Image data of images displayed on the image display device 31 is stored in the CGROM 154.

Based on the performance pattern designation command received from the performance control board 120, the host CPU 151 instructs the VDP 200 to cause the audio output device 34 to output a predetermined sound. The host RAM 152 is built into the host CPU 151 and functions as a work area for data generated through arithmetic processing by the host CPU 151. Further, the host RAM 152 temporarily stores data read from the host ROM 153.

The host ROM 153 is composed of a mask ROM, and stores a program for control processing of the host CPU 151. The host ROM 153 also includes symbol arrangement information that associates the symbol number of a production symbol with the type of production symbol GA, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern, Memorize anime scene information.

The animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and the combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, the display order of each animation scene information, etc. are specified. In addition, the animation scene information includes information such as weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, etc. It will be done.

The CGROM 154 is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc. consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 x 32 pixels). . A combination of color number information specifying the color number of each pixel and an α value indicating transparency is specified from the pixel information.

Furthermore, the CGROM 154 stores uncompressed palette data in which display color information and color number information used when actually displaying colors are associated with each other. Note that the CGROM 154 may be configured to compress and store only part of the image data. Further, as a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. Furthermore, various types of audio data are stored in the CGROM 154.

Crystal oscillator 155 outputs a pulse signal to VDP 200. The clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200 divides the frequency of the pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155 and generates a system clock for controlling the VDP 200 and a synchronization signal for synchronizing with the image display device 31.

The VRAM 156 is a storage device in which image data can be written and read, and is composed of, for example, an SRAM. For example, palette data is stored in the VRAM 156 described above.

The VRAM 156 also includes a display list storage area 156a that temporarily stores the display list output from the host CPU 151, an expansion storage area 156b that stores image data expanded by the expansion circuit 206, and a display list storage area 156b that stores image data expanded by the expansion circuit 206. A first frame buffer 156c and a second frame buffer 156d are provided for this purpose. The two frame buffers 156c and 156d are alternately switched between a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor, and reads image data from a frame buffer (display frame buffer) in response to instructions from the host CPU 151. Further, the VDP 200 generates a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the read image data, and outputs it to the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 5, the VDP 200 of this embodiment includes a control register 201, a CG bus I/F 202, a CPU I/F 203, a clock generation circuit 205, an expansion circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, and a display circuit 208. , a memory controller 209, and an audio control circuit 300.

The control register 201 is a register for the VDP 200 to control drawing and display, and by writing and reading data to and from the control register 201, drawing control and display control are executed. The host CPU 151 writes and reads data to and from the control register 201 via the CPU I/F 203.

Specifically, the control register 201 includes a system control register for making basic settings necessary for the VDP 200 to operate, a data transfer register for making settings necessary for data transfer, and a data transfer register for controlling drawing. There are drawing registers for making settings, bus interface registers for making settings necessary for bus access, decompression registers for making settings necessary for decompressing compressed images, and display registers for making settings for display control. including.

The CG bus I/F 202 is an interface circuit for communicating with the CGROM 154. Image data from the CGROM 154 is input to the VDP 200 via the CG bus I/F 202 described above.

The CPU I/F 203 is an interface circuit for communication with the host CPU 151. For example, a display list output by the host CPU 151 is input to the VDP 200 via the CPU I/F 203. Further, various interrupt signals output from the VDP 200 are input to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203. The host CPU 151 can access the control register via the CPU I/F 203.

The data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices. Specifically, the data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between the host CPU 151 and the VRAM 156, between the CGROM 154 and the VRAM 156, and between various storage areas (including a frame buffer) of the VRAM 156.

The clock generation circuit 205 receives a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155 and generates a system clock for the VDP 200 . It also generates a synchronization signal generation clock and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 31 via the display circuit 208 .

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 154, and stores the decompressed image data in the decompression storage area 153b. The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit that performs sequence control using a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands.

The display circuit 208 generates an RGB signal (analog signal) indicating color data of an image as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in a "display frame buffer" in the VRAM 156. The video signal (RGB signal) generated by the display circuit 208 is output to the image display device 31.

Further, the display circuit 208 outputs a synchronization signal (a vertical synchronization signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) for synchronizing with the image display device 31 to the image display device 31. Note that in this embodiment, an RGB signal obtained by converting a digital signal into an analog signal is output as a video signal to the image display device 31, but the video signal may be output as a digital signal.

When receiving a frame buffer switching instruction from the host CPU 151, the memory controller 209 switches between a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer."

The VDP 200 of this embodiment has an audio data reproducing function in addition to an image data reproducing function. Specifically, the audio control circuit 300 of the VDP 200 controls the audio output of the gaming machine. The audio control circuit 300 reads a predetermined program based on a command transmitted from the production control board 120, and controls the audio output in the audio output device 34.

The audio control circuit 300 outputs audio using the audio data stored in the CGROM 154. Note that instead of storing the audio data in the CGROM 154, a configuration may be adopted in which a sound source ROM in which the audio data is stored is provided separately from the CGROM 154. Further, the audio control circuit 300 may not be included in the VDP 200 and may be provided independently within the image control board 150. In the above case, the sound source ROM may be included in the audio control circuit 300.

<Explanation of gaming status>
Next, the gaming state to which the gaming machine 1 transitions will be explained. In this embodiment, the game progresses in any one of the following gaming states: "low probability gaming state", "high probability gaming state", "time saving gaming state", and "non time saving gaming state". Specifically, a gaming state that is a "low-probability gaming state" and a "time-saving gaming state", a gaming state that is a "low-probability gaming state" and a "non-time-saving gaming state", and a "high-probability gaming state". ``state'' and a gaming state that is a ``time-saving gaming state''.

In the above-mentioned low probability game state, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/299.5 in the jackpot lottery executed when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14. Note that winning the jackpot means acquiring the right to play the jackpot game. The jackpot game includes a "long hit game" and a "short hit game" which will be described later.

In the above-mentioned high probability gaming state, the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is higher than in the low probability gaming state. Specifically, in the high probability game state of this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/29.95. However, the probability of winning the jackpot in each gaming state may be changed as appropriate.

In the non-time-saving gaming state, the winning probability is 1/20 in the regular lottery which is executed when a game ball passes through the gate 15. In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the length of time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols (normal symbol display device 22) to the stop display is set to about 10 seconds. Furthermore, if you win in the general drawing lottery, the total opening time of the second starting port 14 when the long opening symbol described later is determined is approximately 4.2 seconds, and the second opening time when the short opening symbol is determined. The total opening time of 14 is set to approximately 0.2 seconds.

In the time-saving game state, the probability of winning a winning lottery in the common symbol lottery executed when a game ball passes through the gate 15 is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, compared to the non-time-saving gaming state, the time length from when the fluctuating display of normal symbols starts to when they are stopped is short, and the total opening time of the second starting port 14 tends to be longer. .

Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning in the general lottery is 19/20. In addition, in the time saving game state, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed in about 1 second. Furthermore, in the time saving game state, the total opening time of the second starting port 14 when a long opening symbol is determined is set to 5 seconds, and the total opening time of the second starting port 14 when a short opening symbol is determined. is set to 3 seconds. Note that when the normal symbols are stopped, the normal symbols are maintained in a stopped state for at least about 0.5 seconds.

In the above configuration, in the time-saving game state, the second starting port 14 is more easily controlled in the second mode as long as the game ball passes through the gate 15 than in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, it becomes possible for the player to proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of game balls. In this embodiment, by playing the game by hitting right, the game ball can enter the second starting port 14 and the gate 15. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, it is more advantageous to play the game with the right hand rather than the left hand.

In this embodiment, multiple types of time-saving game states are provided. Specifically, the time-saving gaming state of this embodiment includes a first time-saving gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state. The first time-saving game state is transitioned to when the jackpot game (ending period) ends. A transition to the second time-saving gaming state is possible when a jackpot is not won a predetermined number of times in the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination process) in the low probability gaming state.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is common in each time-saving game state. Specifically, the normal symbol fluctuation time in each time-saving game state is about 1 second. Furthermore, the probability of winning the common symbol lottery is the same in each time-saving game state, and the probability that a long-open symbol is determined and the probability that a short-open symbol is determined are common in each time-saving game state.

In each time saving game state, the operation mode (total opening time, number of openings) of the opening/closing door 14b when the long opening symbol is stopped and displayed is common. Further, in each time saving game state, the operation mode of the opening/closing door 14b when the short opening symbol is stopped and displayed is the same. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, "the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening (enlargement) time and the number of openings of the second starting port 14" in the time-saving gaming state will be expressed as the second starting port 14 (opening/closing door 14b) in the time-saving gaming state. Sometimes referred to as "open mode". As mentioned above, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is common in each time-saving game state. However, in each time-saving game state, the opening manner of the second starting port 14 may be different.

Each of the above-mentioned time-saving game states ends when a predetermined number of games are executed or when a transition to a jackpot game occurs. Hereinafter, the number of games at which the time-saving gaming state ends may be referred to as the "time-saving number" of the time-saving gaming state. In this embodiment, each time saving game state has a different number of time saving times. Specifically, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is 100 times or 799 times. The number of time saving times in the second time saving game state is 1000 times. However, the number of time saving times in the time saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of time savings in the second time saving gaming state may be set to 100 times (common with the first time saving gaming state).

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 112 will be explained.

<Jackpot determination table>
Figures 6(a-1) and 6(a-2) show an example of a jackpot determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the stop result of special symbol fluctuations is a jackpot (during jackpot lottery). It is a conceptual diagram.

FIG. 6(a-1) is a jackpot determination table that is referred to when determining whether the stop result of the special symbol fluctuation in the first special symbol display device 20 is a jackpot, small hit, or loss (jackpot lottery). It is A. The details will be described later using FIGS. 7(a-1) to 7(a-3), but when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, a jackpot symbol (such as special symbol A), which will be described later, is displayed. Further, when winning a small hit, a small winning symbol (special symbol K) is displayed.

FIG. 6(b-2) is a jackpot determination table B that is referred to when determining the stop result of the special symbol fluctuation in the second special symbol display device 21. Note that the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 have different probabilities of winning a small hit, but have the same probability of winning a jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, the 1st special symbol display device 20 may be simply described as a "1st special symbol", and the 2nd special symbol display device 21 may be simply described as a "2nd special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 may simply be collectively referred to as a “special symbol”.

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14 (hereinafter may be collectively referred to as "starting hole"), a random number value for special symbol determination is acquired. The random number range of the random number value for special symbol determination in this embodiment is a numerical value "0 to 598".

In the jackpot determination table, a random number value for determining a special symbol that is a "big hit" and a random number value for determining a special symbol that is a "small hit" are defined. In the jackpot lottery, the random number for special symbol determination obtained when a game ball enters the starting hole is compared with the random number for special symbol determination prescribed in the jackpot determination table, and if the two match, the jackpot or Win a small prize.

The jackpot determination tables (A, B) shown in FIGS. 6(a-1) and 6(a-2) are composed of a low probability random number determination table and a high probability random number determination table. The main CPU 111 refers to the gaming state and selects a low probability time random number determination table in a low probability gaming state, and selects a high probability time random number determination table in a high probability gaming state. Further, the main CPU 111 determines one of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss" based on the selected table and the extracted random number value for special symbol determination.

For example, according to the low probability time random number determination table shown in FIG. 6(a-1), two random numbers for special symbol determination are determined to be a "jackpot". On the other hand, according to the high probability time random number determination table, 20 special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be a "jackpot". In addition, in the jackpot determination table of FIG. 6(a-1), whether the low probability time random number determination table or the high probability time random number determination table is used, the four special symbol determination random numbers are "small hit". It is determined that If a random number is determined as neither a "big hit" nor a "small hit," it will be determined as a "loss."

As mentioned above, the random number range of the random number value for special symbol determination is the number "0 to 598". Therefore, in the jackpot determination table A (at the time of winning the first starting opening), the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is 1/299.5 in the low probability gaming state. Similarly, the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the high probability gaming state is 1/29.95, which is 10 times higher. On the other hand, the probability of determining a small hit is 1/149.75 in both the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state.

In the jackpot determination table B shown in FIG. 6(a-2), the random numbers for special symbol determination that are determined to be a jackpot in the low probability game state and the high probability game state are the same as in the jackpot determination table A. On the other hand, the jackpot determination table A and the jackpot determination table B have different random numbers for determining special symbols that are determined to be small hits. For example, in the jackpot determination table B, a "small hit" is determined only when the special symbol determination random number value is "50".

In the above configuration, the probability of determining a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/299 in the case where the game ball wins in the first starting port 13 and in the case where the game ball wins in the second starting port 14. 5, and the probability of determining a jackpot in the high probability gaming state is 1/29.95. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first starting port 13, the probability of being judged as a small hit is 1/149.75 in both the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state. When a game ball wins, the probability that it is determined to be a small hit is 1/599 in both the low probability game state and the high probability game state.

<Hit judgment table>
FIG. 6(b) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the result of stopping the normal symbol variation is a hit in the normal symbol lottery. The hit determination table shown in FIG. 6(b) is composed of a non-time-saving game state random number determination table and a time-saving game state random number determination table. The above time-saving gaming state time random number determination table is commonly referred to in the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state.

The main CPU 111 acquires a random number for normal symbol determination when the game ball passes through the gate 15. The random number range of the random number value for determining a hit is a number from 0 to 19. The main CPU 111 refers to the gaming state, selects the non-time-saving gaming state random number determination table in the non-time-saving gaming state, and selects the time-saving gaming state random number determination table in the time-saving gaming state. Further, the main CPU 111 determines whether the game is a "win" or a "loss" based on the selected table and the acquired random number value for determining a win.

Specifically, the main CPU 111 determines whether the acquired random number value for hit determination matches the random number value for hit determination defined in the hit determination table. In the hit determination table shown in FIG. 6(b), the probability of being determined to be a win in the non-time-saving gaming state is about 1/20, and the probability of being determined to be a win in the time-saving gaming state is about 19/20.

<Design determination table>
FIG. 7(a-1) to FIG. 7(a-3) are conceptual diagrams of a special symbol determination table for determining a special symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each game.

The special symbol determination table includes a jackpot symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, and a loss symbol determination table. The jackpot symbol determination table is referred to when determining a stop symbol (jackpot symbol) when a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery. The small winning symbol determination table is referred to when determining a stop symbol (small winning symbol) when a small winning is won in a jackpot lottery. The losing symbol determination table is referred to when determining a stop symbol (losing symbol) in the event of a loss in the jackpot lottery.

As shown in FIGS. 7(a-1) to 7(a-3), each special symbol determination table is provided for each special symbol display device, and the special symbol determination table for the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol determination table are provided for each special symbol display device. It is composed of a special symbol determination table for the special symbol display device 21.

FIG. 7(a-1) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a jackpot symbol determination table. When the main CPU 111 wins a jackpot, it refers to the random number value for the jackpot symbol. The random number range of the random number value for the jackpot symbol is a number “0 to 99”. For example, if you win a jackpot by entering the first starting slot 13, if the acquired random number value for the jackpot symbol is "0" to "59", the main CPU 111 will set "01" ( Determine special symbol A1). In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-1), the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20.

In addition, the main CPU 111 generates an effect symbol designation command that can specify stop symbol data (special symbol type) at the start of special symbol variation. For example, when stop symbol data "01" is determined, production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "01H" are generated as shown in FIG. 7(a-1).

As shown in FIG. 7(a-1), if a jackpot is won by entering the first starting hole 13, and the acquired random number value for the jackpot symbol is "60" to "69", the game stops. "02" (special symbol A2) is determined as symbol data, and production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "02H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol A2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20.

Similarly, if you win a jackpot by entering the first starting hole 13, and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "70" to "99", the stop symbol data will be "03" (special symbol A3). is determined, and production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "03H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20.

If you win the jackpot by entering the second starting hole 14, and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is between "0" and "69", "04" (special symbol B1) is determined as the stop symbol data. , effect design designation commands “E1H” and “01H” are generated. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-1), the special symbol B1 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21.

Also, if you win a jackpot by entering the second starting hole 14, and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "70" to "89", "05" (special symbol B2) will be used as the stop symbol data. The designation commands "E1H" and "02H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B2 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. If you win the jackpot by entering the second starting hole 14, and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "90" to "94", "06" (special symbol B3) is determined as the stop symbol data. , effect design designation commands “E1H” and “03H” are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21.

Similarly, if you win a jackpot by entering the second starting hole 14, and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "95" to "99", the stop symbol data will be "07" (special symbol B4). is determined, and production symbol designation commands "E1H" and "04H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. As will be described in detail later, the number of times M in the first time saving game state after the jackpot game changes depending on the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot game is started.

When the above-mentioned special symbols A1, A2, A3, B1 to B4 (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as "jackpot symbols") are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game starts. . As mentioned above, the jackpot game includes a long hit game and a short hit game. In the jackpot game, the first big winning hole 16 and the second big winning hole 17 (hereinafter sometimes referred to collectively as "big winning hole") are opened. In the long winning game, the opening time of the big prize opening is set longer than in the short winning game.

The type of jackpot game depends on the jackpot special symbol that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot game is started. Specifically, when any one of the special symbols A1, A3, B1 to B4 among the special jackpot symbols is displayed in a stopped state, the jackpot game is started. On the other hand, when the special symbol A2 is stopped and displayed, a short winning game is started.

Furthermore, the game state after the jackpot game ends is determined according to the special symbol that is stopped and displayed when transitioning to the jackpot game. For example, when the special symbol A1, special symbol A2, or special symbol B1 is stopped and displayed, a transition is made to a high probability game state time saving game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "high probability time saving game state"). In principle, the time saving gaming state of the high probability gaming state continues until the jackpot is won. On the other hand, when any one of the special symbols A3, B2 to B4 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a time saving game state of a low probability game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "low probability time saving game state"). Specifically, the special symbols A3, B2 to B4 are stopped and displayed, and when the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the first time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the first time saving game state differs depending on the type of jackpot symbol (A3, B2 to B4). Specifically, when the special symbol A3 or special symbol B2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the number of time savings in the first time saving game state becomes 100 times. On the other hand, when the special symbol B3 or B4 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the number of games in the first time-saving game state becomes 799.

As will be described in detail later, a new table scenario S is set when the jackpot game ends. By setting the table scenario S, a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern (described later) of special symbols is switched according to the number of games played. The above table scenario S is variably set according to the type of jackpot symbol.

In this embodiment, a jackpot game in which the gaming state after the end is a high-probability gaming state may be referred to as a "probability-variable jackpot," and a jackpot game in which the gaming state after the end is in a low-probability gaming state may be described as a "normal jackpot." . In addition, in this embodiment, the non-time-saving gaming state of the low-probability gaming state may be described as a "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state."

FIG. 7(a-2) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a small winning symbol determination table. When the main CPU 111 wins a small hit, the main CPU 111 refers to the random number value for the small winning symbol. The random number range of the random number value for the small winning symbol is a numerical value "0 to 99". However, if you win a small hit by entering the first starting hole 13, the main CPU 111 determines "11" (special symbol K) as the stop symbol data, regardless of the acquired random number value for the small winning symbol. do. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-2), the special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. In addition, production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "0AH" are generated.

Similarly, when a small hit is won by entering the second starting hole 14, the main CPU 111 selects "12" (special symbol K) as the stop symbol data, regardless of the acquired random number value for the small winning symbol. decide. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-2), the special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. Further, production symbol designation commands “E1H” and “0AH” are generated.

FIG. 7(a-3) is a conceptual diagram of a losing symbol determination table. In the jackpot lottery at the time of winning into the first starting hole 13, if it is determined that the winning lottery is a loss, "00" (special symbol H) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, effect design designation commands "E0H" and "00H" are generated. Similarly, if it is determined that the jackpot lottery at the time of winning the second starting hole 14 is a loss, "00" (special symbol H) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, the production symbol designation commands "E1H" and "00H" are generated.

FIG. 7(b-1) and FIG. 7(b-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of the normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is used when determining the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The above normal symbol determination table is commonly used in each gaming state (non-time saving gaming state, first time saving gaming state, second time saving gaming state).

The normal symbol determination table of this embodiment includes a normal symbol determination table X and a regular symbol determination table Y. The normal symbol determination table X is used when a player wins in the ordinary symbol lottery (when the second starting port 14 is opened). On the other hand, the regular symbol determination table Y is used in the case of a loss in the regular symbol lottery (when the second starting port 14 is not opened).

FIG. 7(b-1) is a conceptual diagram of the normal symbol determination table X. The main CPU 111 obtains a random number value for the normal symbol when determining the normal symbol. The random number range of the random number value for the normal symbol is a number “0 to 10”. For example, if you win in the regular symbol lottery and the random number value for the regular symbol is ``0'' or ``1'', the long open symbol is determined as the regular symbol. On the other hand, if the random number value for the normal symbol is one of the numbers "2 to 10", the short open symbol is determined as the normal symbol.

When the main CPU 111 determines the long open symbol as the normal symbol, it determines the stop symbol data "01" and generates the normal symbol designation commands "E8H" and "01H" at the start of the variation of the normal symbol. Further, when a short open symbol is determined, the stop symbol data "02" is determined, and the normal symbol designation commands "E8H" and "02H" are generated at the start of the variation of the normal symbol.

FIG. 7(b-2) is a conceptual diagram of the normal symbol determination table Y. As mentioned above, the normal symbol determination table Y is used in the case of a loss in the regular symbol lottery. In the case of a loss in the ordinary symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 7(b-2), the losing symbol is determined regardless of the random number value for the ordinary symbol being any value from "0" to "10". When the main CPU 111 determines a losing symbol as a normal symbol, it determines "00" as the stop symbol data, and generates normal symbol designation commands "E8H" and "00H" when the variation of the normal symbol starts.

FIG. 8(a), FIG. 8(b-1) and FIG. 8(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in each game. The fluctuation pattern determination table is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern in each game. The main CPU 111 determines a variation pattern in each game, and displays the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) in a variable manner according to the variation pattern.

The variation pattern determination table referred to in each game after the jackpot game is finished is variable according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed at the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, in this embodiment, multiple types of table scenarios S corresponding to multiple types of jackpot symbols are provided. The main CPU 111 sets a table scenario S corresponding to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed at the start of the jackpot game. Further, the main CPU 111 uses the set table scenario S to determine a fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to in each game after the jackpot game. In the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game becomes variable according to the set table scenario S. As will be described in detail later, when the number of games after the end of the jackpot game reaches the number of games specified in the table scenario S, the fluctuation pattern determination table is switched (see FIG. 8(b-1) described below).

FIG. 8(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the table scenario S. The table scenario S includes a table scenario Sa1, a table scenario Sa2, a table scenario Sa3, a table scenario Sb1, a table scenario Sb2, a table scenario Sb3, and a table scenario Sb4. The table scenario Sa1 is set when the special symbol A1 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. Similarly, the table scenario Sa2 is set when the special symbol A2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the table scenario Sa3 is set when the special symbol A3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, and the table scenario SB1 is It is set when the special symbol B1 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed.

The table scenario Sb2 is set when the special symbol B2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B2 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state for 100 times after the jackpot game. That is, the table scenario Sb2 is set when transitioning to the first time-saving gaming state 100 times after the jackpot game. The table scenario Sb3 is set when the special symbol B3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state of 799 times after the jackpot game. Further, the table scenario Sb4 is set when the special symbol B4 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state of 799 times after the jackpot game.

As understood from the above explanation, the number of times saved in the first time saving game state after the jackpot game is the same (799 times) when the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed and when the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed. However, the set table scenarios (Sb3, Sb4) are different. That is, in each of the above cases, the fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the first time-saving gaming state is different. As will be described in detail later, the production mode in the first time-saving game state is different between the case where the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed and the case where the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed. In games with different performance modes, the performances that can be executed on the image display device 31 are different.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fact that a specific variation pattern determination table T is referred to in the variation pattern determination process may be simply written as "the variation pattern determination table T is referred to." Furthermore, the fact that a particular fluctuation pattern determination table T among the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern determination tables T can be referred to may be simply described as "the fluctuation pattern determination table T is set." For example, as an example of "becoming able to refer to a specific variation pattern determination table T", it is assumed that the variation pattern determination table T is read from the main ROM 112 and stored (developed) in the main RAM 113.

FIG. 8(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table set by the table scenario S. The table scenario S defines a plurality of opportunities for setting (switching) a variation pattern determination table and a variation pattern determination table to be set at the opportunities. The main CPU 111 sets (switches) a variation pattern determination table when an opportunity specified in the table scenario S is established.

FIG. 8(b-1) shows the order in which the triggers for setting the fluctuation pattern determination table are established. In addition, a variation pattern determination table that is set based on the opportunity is shown corresponding to the opportunity. In the specific example of FIG. 8(b-1), it is assumed that table scenario Sb2 among table scenarios S is set. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 8(b-1), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won during the period from when the table scenario Sb2 is set until the end of the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is set with the end of the jackpot game as an opportunity. Further, in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the 91st game after the end of the jackpot game starts, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is set. Thereafter, when the 100th game after the end of the jackpot game starts, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1 is set. In the above configuration, in the first time saving game state (100 times), the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to in the 90th game (90th game after the end of the jackpot game), and in the 91st to 99th games. In the previous games, the variable pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to, and in the 100th (last) game, the variable pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), when the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is set with the end of the first time-saving gaming state as an opportunity. Further, when the 791st game starts after the end of the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. In the above configuration, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to for each game in the non-time saving gaming state up to the 11th game before the transition to the second time saving gaming state, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to for the game 10 times before shifting to the second time saving gaming state. The variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to from the game.

When the second time-saving game state starts, a fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is set. As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), when table scenario Sb2 is set, when the 802nd game (second game in the second time-saving game state) starts after the jackpot game ends, the fluctuation pattern is determined. A table Tax is set. Further, when the second time saving game state ends, a fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is set. In the above configuration, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, the variable pattern determination table Ts is referred to, and in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to. Thereafter, when the second time saving game state ends, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to. As can be understood from the above explanation, during the period in which the table scenario S is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table is changed depending on the timing of the change in the gaming state as well as the number of games from the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the table scenario S is changed upon winning a jackpot game, and is not changed on other occasions. However, when the clear operation process or setting change process described above is executed, the table scenario S becomes unset. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, an operation in which a setting change process or a clear operation process is executed may be referred to as a "clear operation." Further, a period in which the table scenario S is not set may be referred to as a "scenario unset period". The scenario non-setting period is a period from when the clear operation is executed until the end of the first jackpot game. Furthermore, the period during which any of the table scenarios S is set after the jackpot game is finished may be referred to as a "scenario setting period."

Let us assume a comparative example in which the variation pattern determination table is changed according to the number of games played during the scenario-unset period. In addition, in the comparison example, a variation pattern determination table advantageous to the player is referred to from the start of the scenario unset period until the predetermined number of games. In the above comparison example, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can shift to a state advantageous to the player at any timing by performing a clear operation. Therefore, an inconvenience may arise in which the fairness of the game is impaired. In consideration of the above circumstances, this embodiment adopts a configuration in which the variable pattern determination table is not changed in accordance with the number of games played during the scenario unset period.

FIG. 8(b-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to during the scenario unset period. In the specific example of FIG. 8(b-2), it is assumed that no jackpot game is won during the period from the start of the scenario unset period to the end of the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-2), immediately after the clear operation is executed and the scenario unset period is started, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to. When the clear operation is executed, the game enters a low-probability, non-time-saving gaming state. Further, when the game is played 800 times after the clear operation is executed, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state. As described above, during the scenario setting period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table T referred to in the low probability non-time saving gaming state changes from the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 to the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 according to the number of games. Change. On the other hand, in the low probability non-time saving gaming state in the scenario unset period, the referenced variation pattern determination table T does not change from the variation pattern determination table Tn1.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-2), when the second time-saving gaming state is started in the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is set. After that, when the second time-saving game state ends and the state shifts to a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is set. In the above configuration, during the scenario non-setting period, the variation pattern determination table is not changed (according only to the number of games) other than when the gaming state changes.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T referred to in each gaming state. In this embodiment, when each game is started, a variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern of the game is transmitted from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) to the production control board 120 (sub CPU 121). The sub CPU 121 is controlled to the production mode corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. FIG. 9 shows each production mode corresponding to each variation pattern determination table.

As described above, the variation pattern determination table T is referred to and the variation pattern is determined by lottery. In addition, the time during which the special figure is displayed in a variable manner may differ depending on the variation pattern. In the above configuration, the time during which the special symbols are variably displayed in each game is variable. In this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the average time during which the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each game when the game is played according to the normal procedure during the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is referred to is calculated as "special symbols" in the period. "Average fluctuation time" may be written. In FIG. 9, the average fluctuation time (short, long, fixed) of special symbols during the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is referred to is shown corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination table T. In addition, the above-mentioned "playing the game according to the normal procedure" means to play the game with the left during the period when the right-hand game lamp 28 is off, and to play with the right during the period when the right-hand game lamp 28 is lit, so-called ``stop game'' (single game). (including).

As shown in FIG. 9, in the first time-saving game state, the variable pattern determination table Ta1, the variable pattern determination table Ta2, the variable pattern determination table Tj1, the variable pattern determination table Tj2, and the variable pattern determination table Tax can be referred to. However, the variable pattern determination table T referred to in the first time-saving gaming state changes according to the table scenario S (that is, changes according to the jackpot symbol).

Specifically, when the jackpot symbol is the special symbol B2, the table scenario Sb2 is set and the 100th first time-saving game state is started. In the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which table scenario Sb2 is set, as explained using FIG. 8 (b-1) above, the 90th game (90th game after the jackpot game ends) ), the variable pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, the 91st to 99th games refer to the variable pattern determination table Ta2, and the 100th (last) game, the variable pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to.

In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, the production mode becomes the time saving mode A. Furthermore, in a game where the variable pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to, the production mode is the time saving mode A, similar to the game where the variable pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to. That is, in the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the production mode in the 1st to 99th games does not change, but when the remaining number of games reaches 10, the variation pattern determination table T changes (Ta1→ Ta2). However, the production mode may be different between the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to and the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to. In the above configuration, when the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 is set reaches 10, the production mode is switched.

In the variation pattern determination table Ta2, a variation pattern for a long time is more likely to be determined than in the variation pattern determination table Ta1. In the above configuration, in the game after the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state reaches 10, for example, a performance (for example, a countdown performance) that notifies (suggests) that the first time-saving game state ends is executed. It becomes easier to find time for In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to, an end effect is executed after a judge effect is executed.

In the judge performance, for example, the shielded image GF (see FIG. 16(c) described above) is displayed first. That is, when the judge performance is started, a closed sliding door is displayed. Further, in the judge performance, it is displayed that the sliding door can be opened by repeatedly hitting the performance button 8, and that the first time-saving game state will continue if the sliding door is opened. In the judge performance when the first time-saving game state continues, a moving image of the sliding door opening is finally displayed (the shielding image GF is hidden). On the other hand, in the judge performance when the first time saving game state does not continue, the sliding door remains closed. In the end performance, it is announced that the first time saving game state ends. Note that a specific example of the end effect will be explained in the second embodiment described later (see FIG. 45).

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the non-time-saving gaming state immediately after the first time-saving gaming state ends (see FIG. 8(b-1) described above). In a game in which the variable pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to, the performance mode becomes the normal mode. Further, when the 791st game starts after the end of the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. In a game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to, the performance mode is the immediately preceding mode. In the last-minute mode, effects that are not executed in the normal mode may be executed. For example, in the last-minute mode, an effect indicating that the second time-saving game state will start soon is executed.

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the second time-saving gaming state starts, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is set. The fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state. In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a rush effect is executed. The entry performance is a performance for notifying that the second time-saving game state has started. The average fluctuation time of the special symbols in the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to is longer than the average fluctuation time of the special symbols in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state (games in which Tax is referred to). Specifically, in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a predetermined variation pattern is determined for each result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, a variation pattern of the time required to stop and display the performance symbol GA corresponding to the loss after executing the judge performance and the end performance is determined. On the other hand, if the player wins the jackpot, the player is notified that the player has won the jackpot after executing the judge performance and the end performance.

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the second to 1000th (last) games in the second time-saving game state. In the variation pattern determination table Tax, a shorter variation pattern is more likely to be determined than in the non-time-saving gaming state (a game in which Tn1 or Tn2 is referenced). Moreover, in the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax, a shorter fluctuation pattern is easily determined than the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 and the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 that are referred to in the first time-saving gaming state, and the average fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened. Similarly, in the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx, a shorter fluctuation pattern is easily determined than the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 and the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 that are referred to in the first time-saving gaming state, and the average fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened. In a game in which the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the performance mode becomes the time saving mode B.

As shown in FIG. 9, when table scenario Sb3 is set, fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1, fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2, fluctuation pattern determination table Tj2, fluctuation pattern determination table Tax, fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc, fluctuation pattern determination table Tax The variation pattern determination table T that is referred to in the order of is changed. A specific example of the dynamic pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set will be described in detail using FIG. 11(a), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table T that is referred to in the order of fluctuation pattern determination table Tax, fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc, and fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is changed. A specific example of the dynamic pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set will be described in detail using FIG. 11(b) described later. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, during the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table T that is referred to in the order of fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 and fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is changed. A specific example of the dynamic pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the scenario-unset period will be described in detail using FIG. 10(b) described later.

FIG. 10(a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set among the table scenarios S. In addition to the fluctuation pattern determination table T at each time point, FIG. 10(a-1) shows the production mode at each time point, the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times M"), and the second time-saving game state. The remaining number of times until the start (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times N") is shown. The remaining number M and the remaining number N are stored in the main RAM 113, for example.

In each game in the time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M is subtracted by a numerical value of "1", and when the remaining number of times M is subtracted to a numerical value of "0", the time-saving game state ends. Further, in each game in the low probability game state, the remaining number of times N is subtracted by a numerical value of "1", and when the remaining number of times N is subtracted to a numerical value of "0", a second time-saving game state is started. The remaining number of times N is initialized to the initial value "800" upon winning the jackpot game and upon the above-mentioned clearing operation. That is, when 800 games (low probability gaming state) are executed from the jackpot game, and when 800 games (low probability gaming state) are executed from the clear operation, the second time saving gaming state starts. be done.

FIG. 10(a-1) shows a game start time ts and a game end time te. As understood from FIG. 10(a-1), the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is subtracted at the end of the game. Specifically, the remaining number of times M is subtracted at the end of a fixed period, which will be described later. Similarly, the remaining number N is subtracted at the end of the fixed period.

As described above, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variable pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to until the 90th game in the first time-saving game state. That is, until the game in which the remaining number of times M in the first time-saving game state is the numerical value "11" and the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "711", the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to. Further, from the 91st to the 99th game in the first time-saving game state, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to. Both the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 and the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 correspond to the time saving mode A (see FIG. 9 described above). In the above configuration, the time saving mode A is used from the first time to the 99th game in the first time saving game state. As shown in FIG. 10(a-1), during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to in the last game of the first time-saving game state, and the game ends after the above-described judge performance is executed. The performance is executed.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-1), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time ta, and the first time-saving game state ends. In the above specific example, the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "700" at time ta. As described above, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variable pattern determination table Tn1 is set upon completion of the first time-saving gaming state, and the production mode becomes the normal mode.

FIG. 10(a-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in each game in another period in which table scenario Sb2 is set. In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), it is assumed that the first time-saving game state ends at time ta, similar to the specific example of FIG. 10(a-1) described above. As described above, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is set at the end of the first time-saving gaming state, and after that, when 690 games are played, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. is set. That is, after the jackpot game, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to from the 791st game. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 corresponds to the immediately preceding mode (see FIG. 9 described above). In the above configuration, after the jackpot game, the immediately preceding mode starts from the 791st game.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time tb and the second time-saving game state is started. In the above case, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state is set to the numerical value "1000" at time tb. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), it is assumed that the number of pending games is one or more at time tb, and the first game starts immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state. As described above, in the first game of the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to and the entry effect is executed. In addition, in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, and the production mode becomes time-saving mode B.

FIG. 10(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table that is referred to in each game during the scenario-unset period. As described above, the scenario unset period starts with the clearing operation. When the clear operation is executed, the remaining number of times M is initialized to the initial value "0", and a low probability non-time saving gaming state is entered. Furthermore, when the clear operation is executed, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is initialized to a numerical value "800". As shown in FIG. 10(b), in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state during the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to, and the other fluctuation pattern determination tables T are not referred to.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time tb and the second time-saving game state is started. In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 10(b), similar to FIG. 10(a-1) described above, the number of pending items is one or more at the start time tb of the second time-saving gaming state, and the number of pending items is 1 or more immediately after the time tb. 2. Let us assume that the time saving gaming state has started. In the scenario unset period, when the second time-saving gaming state is started, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is set. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to until the second time-saving gaming state ends. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx corresponds to the time saving mode B (see FIG. 9 described above). In the above configuration, the production mode of the second time-saving game state is the time-saving mode B in either the scenario setting period or the scenario non-setting period.

As can be understood from the above explanation, the first game in the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the first game in the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the scenario is not set are the fluctuations that are referred to. The pattern determination table T is different. Specifically, in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the dedicated fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, whereas in the second time-saving gaming state in the period where the scenario is not set. In the first game, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx, which is also referred to in subsequent games, is referred to.

In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a longer fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined than in a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to and a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to. Specifically, in the game in which the variable pattern determination table Ts is referred to, various performances (entering performance, mode selection performance, etc.) when the second time-saving game state is started are executed. In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a variation pattern of a length that allows the above performance to be executed is determined.

On the other hand, in the first game of the second time saving game state in the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to. In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to, a shorter fluctuation pattern is more likely to be selected than in a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the first game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period is, in principle, shorter than the time in which the rush effect etc. are executed in the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to.

Based on the above circumstances, in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state in the period where the scenario is not set, all the rush effects etc. that are executed in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set are as a general rule Cannot be executed. However, as will be explained in detail later using FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state in the scenario unset period, the first game in the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set is A performance that omits some of the various performances (mode selection performance) executed in the first game in the 2-hour saving game state is performed.

FIG. 11(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table T that is referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set. In the first time-saving gaming state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, as in the first time-saving gaming state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is In the 91st to 99th games, the variable pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to.

However, in the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj2 is referred to in the 100th game. In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj2 is referred to, a continuation performance is executed after a judge performance is executed. In the continuation performance, it is announced that the first time saving game state will continue. As mentioned above, in the first time-saving game state (100 times) where the table scenario Sb2 is set and the first time-saving game state (799 times) where the table scenario Sb3 is set, the production mode in the game up to the 100th time is Common. Therefore, in the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which table scenario Sb3 is set, it is difficult to determine whether the first time-saving game state will continue in the 101st and subsequent games until the continuation effect is executed ( (including cases where it is virtually impossible).

In the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the 101st to 799th (last) games. As described above, in a game where the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the production mode becomes the time saving mode B.

When 800 games are executed in the low probability gaming state (non-time saving, time saving), the game shifts to the second time saving gaming state. Therefore, when the first time-saving game state ends 799 times, the second time-saving game state is started through one game of the non-time-saving low probability game state. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, one game executed between the first time-saving game state (799 times) and the second time-saving game state may be referred to as a "gap game". As shown in FIG. 11(a), the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game. In a game in which the variable pattern determination table Tnc is referred to, the performance mode becomes the time saving mode B, similar to the game in which the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to.

In the specific example of FIG. 11(a), it is assumed that the second time-saving game state is started at time tb. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 11(a), it is assumed that the number of reservations is equal to or greater than the numerical value "1" at time tb. As shown in FIG. 11(a), in the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, including the first game and the second and subsequent games, and the production mode is set to the time-saving game state. This is mode B. In addition, in the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, various effects (such as rush effects) when the second time-saving game state is started in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set are omitted. .

As understood from the above explanation, when the table scenario Sb3 is set, the first time-saving game state (799 times) shifts to the time-saving mode B, and then the second time-saving game state starts via the gap game. Throughout the series of games after this, the performance mode becomes time saving mode B. With the above configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state are a series of time-saving gaming states. However, during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, it may be configured to notify that the first time-saving game state has ended (the gap game has started) and that the second time-saving game state has started.

FIG. 11(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table that is referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set. The table scenario Sb4 is set when the 799th first time-saving gaming state is started, similarly to when the table scenario Sb3 is set (see FIG. 11(a) above).

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to from the first game to the last game in the first time-saving game state (799 times), and the production mode is It becomes mode B. That is, in the period in which the above-mentioned table scenario Sb3 is set, after the continuous performance is executed in the middle game (100th game) of the first time-saving game state (799 times), the table scenario Sb3 shifts to the time-saving mode B. In the period in which scenario Sb4 is set, the first game in the first time-saving game state shifts to time-saving mode B. In the above configuration, in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, immediately after the first time-saving gaming state starts, the player is substantially notified that the first time-saving gaming state will continue 799 times.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, as in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game, and the subsequent second time-saving game state Then, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to. In addition, in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, similarly to the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the performance mode is the time saving mode over a series of games of the first time saving game state, the gap game, and the second time saving game state. Become B.

In the period in which the above table scenario Sb4 is set, similarly to the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the player is made to recognize that the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state are a series of time-saving gaming states. be able to. In the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, similar to the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the entry performance is not executed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state.

As understood from the above explanation, in this embodiment, a specific game (for example, the first game) in the second time-saving game state (Tax or Ts is referenced in the first game) started in the scenario setting period The referenced variation pattern determination table T is variable with the specific variation display in the second time-saving gaming state (Tbx is referenced in the first game) started in the scenario unset period.

FIG. 12 and FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c) are conceptual diagrams of specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table. In this embodiment, for each special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21), a random number value for special symbol determination (winning or losing the jackpot), a random number value for the jackpot symbol (winning or losing the jackpot), A fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number of reserved special symbols, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special symbol variation. In addition, the number in the column of "number of reservations" in FIG. 12 and FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c) means the number of reservations of the special drawing corresponding to the column.

The main CPU 111 determines a variation pattern when the special symbol starts to vary. Further, the main CPU 111 generates a variation pattern designation command that can specify the determined variation pattern. The above fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 120 in the output control process.

12 and FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c) show effects (reach, etc.) executed by the effect execution means (for example, the image display device 31) when each variation pattern is determined. "Reach" in this embodiment means that after some of the combinations of performance symbols GA that notify the transition to a special game (jackpot game) are displayed in a stopped state, some of the remaining performance symbols GA are displayed in a variable manner. means a continuous state. For example, assume that a combination of three performance symbols GA "777" is set as the combination of performance symbols GA that informs the transition to a jackpot game. In the above case, the state where two performance symbols GA are stopped and displayed at "7" and the remaining performance symbols GA are displayed in a variable manner is "reach".

Although detailed description will be omitted, the variation pattern designation command of this embodiment is configured to include a first message indicating MODE and a second message indicating DATA. The first telegram (MODE) of the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20 becomes "E6H". On the other hand, the first telegram (MODE) of the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display device 21 becomes "E7H". The second message (DATA) of the variation pattern designation command indicates a specific variation pattern number.

<Fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving gaming state>
FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table used in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. As described above, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, one of the variable pattern determination table Tn1, the variable pattern determination table Tn2, and the variable pattern determination table Tnc is referred to. FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 among the above fluctuation pattern determination tables. In addition, the "fluctuating time" shown in FIG. 12 and FIGS. 13(a) to (c) described later means the time from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol until the end of the fixed period.

In the variation pattern determination table Tn1, the variation patterns of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 include variation pattern a (1x to 3x), variation pattern b (1x to 6x), and variation pattern. c (1x to 6x), variation pattern dx, variation pattern ex, variation pattern fx, or variation pattern g is determined.

The main CPU 111 operates according to the type of special symbol display device, the type of special symbol (a combination of the random number value for special symbol determination and the random number value for symbols), the number of reserved special symbols, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation. Then, determine one of the fluctuation patterns. The random number value for reach determination has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is obtained before determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, the random number value for special symbol variation has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is obtained before determining the variation pattern.

However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is always performed in a variable pattern in which a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol among the special symbols is stopped and displayed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the reach effect may not be executed in a variable pattern in which a small winning symbol among the special symbols is stopped and displayed. Therefore, when a special symbol corresponding to a jackpot or small win is stopped and displayed, the random number value for reach determination is not used when determining the fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 12 shows the effect executed by the effect execution means such as the image display device 31 when the special symbol display device is variably displayed in each variation pattern. For example, in the variation pattern a (1x to 3x), a "normal reach effect" is executed. The above-mentioned "normal reach performance" is a reach performance in which the left and right symbols of the performance symbols GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol fluctuates, and the expectation level of winning the jackpot is relatively low.

In the variation pattern b (x1 to x6), "SP reach effect" is executed. The above "SP ready-to-reach performance" is a ready-to-reach performance in which the left and right symbols of the performance symbols GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped, similar to the normal ready-to-reach performance described above. However, in the SP reach effect, a specific moving image (reach movie) that is not displayed in the normal reach effect is displayed on the image display device 31. When the above SP reach effect is executed, there is a higher possibility that the winning of the jackpot will be announced (the same three effect symbols GA will be displayed) than the normal reach effect.

In the variation pattern c (x1 to x6), "SPSP reach effect" is executed. The above "SPSP ready-to-reach performance" is a ready-to-reach performance in which the left and right symbols of the performance symbols GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped, like other ready-to-reach performances. However, in the SPSP reach effect, a specific moving image that is not displayed in other reach effects is displayed on the image display device 31. When the above SPSP reach effect is executed, there is a higher possibility that a jackpot win will be announced after that than the SP reach effect.

In this embodiment, in a game in which an SP ready-to-win effect is executed, a normal ready-to-reach effect is executed before the SP ready-to-reach effect. That is, the normal reach performance develops into the SP reach performance. In addition, in a game in which an SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed, the normal ready-to-reach performance develops into the SP ready-to-reach performance, and the SP ready-to-reach performance develops into the SPSP ready-to-reach performance. However, there may be cases where the normal reach performance directly develops into the SPSP reach performance.

For example, assume that a special symbol A1 (jackpot) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 12, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 3", the variation pattern a1x is determined. In the above variation pattern a1x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 40000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern a1x, a normal reach performance is executed on the image display device 31, and a performance that notifies a probability variable jackpot is executed.

When the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern b1x is determined if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "4 to 15". Further, if the random number value for special symbol variation is one of the numerical values "16 to 34", variation pattern b2x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from "35 to 65", the variation pattern c1x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from "66 to 98", the variation pattern c1x is determined. If the pattern c2x is determined and the random number value for special symbol variation is the numerical value "99", the variation pattern g is determined.

In the variation pattern b1x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 60000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern b1x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a probability variable jackpot is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 60,000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a variable probability jackpot is notified.

In the variation pattern c1x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation for about 70000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern c1x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a probability variable jackpot is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern c2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 70,000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a variable probability jackpot is notified. In the variation pattern g, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 80,000 ms, a full rotation reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a probability variable jackpot is announced.

When the special symbol A2 (short hit probability variable) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern dx is determined regardless of the random number value for special symbol variation. In the above variation pattern dx, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 20000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern dx, a short winning effect is executed on the image display device 31. The above-mentioned short hit performance is a performance to notify that a small hit or a short hit (probable and variable jackpot) has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the special symbol A3 (usually jackpot) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random value for special symbol variation is any of the numbers "0 to 3", the variation pattern a2x is determined. In the above variation pattern a2x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 40000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern a2x, a normal reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and an effect that notifies a normal jackpot is executed.

When the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern b3x is determined if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "4 to 15". Also, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from 16 to 34, the variation pattern b4x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from 35 to 65, the variation pattern b4x is determined. Pattern c3x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "66 to 99", variation pattern c4x is determined.

In the variation pattern b3x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation for about 60000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern b3x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b4x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 60,000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified.

In the variation pattern c3x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation for about 70000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern c3x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern c4x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 70,000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified.

When the special symbol K (small win) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, in the same way as when the special symbol A2 (probable variable short win) is stopped and displayed, regardless of the random number value for special symbol variation, A fluctuation pattern dx is determined.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the special symbol H is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern is determined according to the combination of the number of reserved first special symbols, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol variation. is determined.

For example, assume that the number of reserved first special symbols is "0 to 2". In the above case, if the random number value for reach determination is "0 to 69", the reach effect is not executed and the variation pattern ex is determined. In the above variation pattern ex, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 3000 ms. Furthermore, in the variation pattern ex, after the normal performance (normal variation) is performed, the performance that notifies you of a loss is performed.

On the other hand, when the number of first special symbols reserved is "0 to 2", if the random number value for reach determination is "70 to 99", a reach effect according to the random number value for special symbol variation is executed. Specifically, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 27", the variation pattern a3x is determined. Also, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numbers "28 to 48", the variation pattern b5x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number "49 to 77", the variation pattern b5x is determined. Pattern b6x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from 78 to 88, the variation pattern c5x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from 89 to 99, the variation pattern c5x is determined. Pattern c6x is determined.

In the variation pattern a3x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 35000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern a3x, a normal reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified.

In the variation pattern b5x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation for about 55000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern b5x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b6x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 55,000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified.

In the variation pattern c5x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation for about 65000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern c5x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern c6x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 65000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified.

Further, it is assumed that the number of first special symbols held is "3" when the special symbols H are stopped and displayed. In the above case, if the random number value for reach determination is "0 to 89", the reach effect is not executed and the variation pattern fx is determined regardless of the random number value for special symbol variation. In the above variation pattern fx, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 2000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern fx, after the normal performance is performed, a performance that notifies you of a loss is performed.

On the other hand, when the number of first special symbols reserved is "3", if the random number value for reach determination is "90 to 99", the ready-to-reach effect according to the random number value for special symbol variation is executed. Specifically, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 27", the variation pattern a3x is determined. Also, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numbers "28 to 48", the variation pattern b5x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number "49 to 77", the variation pattern b5x is determined. Pattern b6x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from 78 to 88, the variation pattern c5x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from 89 to 99, the variation pattern c5x is determined. Pattern c6x is determined. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol display device 21 in the non-time saving gaming state is determined in the same manner as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol display device 20 described above.

<Fluctuation pattern determination table for time-saving gaming state>
FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in the low probability time saving gaming state. As described above, in the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state), the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj2, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Either Tax, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts, or the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to.

FIG. 13A is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, for example, in the second time-saving game state that is started (via the jackpot game) in the scenario setting period in which the table scenario S is set.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in a game in which the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to, one of the variable patterns J1a to J1n is determined by lottery. In the above game, the variation patterns of the second special symbol are "immediate hit effect (probable variable jackpot, normal jackpot)", "direct alignment effect (probable variable jackpot, normal jackpot)", "7 symbol reach (probable variable jackpot)", " Variation patterns (J1a to J1k) in which "short variation (loss)", "straight line false performance (loss)", and "reach promotion (loss)" are executed can be determined. In addition, in the above game, the variation patterns (J1l to J1n) in which "Special 1 hit (probable variable jackpot, normal jackpot)" and "Special 1 loss (loss)" are executed as the variation pattern of the first special symbol are determined. obtain. However, in the time-saving gaming state, since the game is played by right-handed hitting and the second special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation pattern J1k is usually determined from the fluctuation pattern J1a.

The instant hit performance is a performance in which the time from when the special symbols start changing to when the winning of the jackpot is announced is relatively short. For example, in the instant hit performance, about 0.5 seconds after the start of variation of the special symbols, the performance pattern GA (for example, "777") corresponding to the jackpot pattern is displayed (temporarily stopped). In addition, in the immediate hit performance after the performance pattern GA stops (after about 0.5 seconds), for example, the performance pattern GA corresponding to the special pattern B2 (normal pattern) corresponds to the special pattern B1 (probability variable pattern). A performance to be promoted to a performance pattern GA is executed. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the jackpot pattern may be referred to as "the effect pattern GA for jackpot". In the above instant hit performance, the ready-to-win performance is not executed and the variable display of the three symbol images stops almost simultaneously. Note that the length of the instant win performance can be changed as appropriate. For example, in an instant win performance, the jackpot performance symbol GA is stopped and displayed approximately 0.5 seconds after the special symbol begins to fluctuate, and then, after a confirmation period of approximately 0.5 seconds, the jackpot game starts. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

Like the instant hit performance, the direct alignment performance is a performance in which the jackpot performance symbols GA are stopped and displayed without executing the reach performance. However, the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbols until the winning of the jackpot game is announced is longer in the straight-line performance than in the immediate-win performance. For example, in the straight alignment effect, the jackpot effect pattern GA is displayed (temporarily stopped) about 15 seconds after the variable display of the special pattern starts. The straight alignment trick performance is a performance in which the same performance as the straight alignment performance is executed until the middle, and finally the performance pattern GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed.

7-symbol reach is a performance in which a jackpot performance pattern GA (777 symbol combinations) corresponding to a probability-variable jackpot is displayed. Specifically, in the 7 symbol reach, two production symbols GA representing the number "7" temporarily stop, the reach production is executed, and then the jackpot production symbol GA representing the symbol combination of "777" is displayed. Ru. For example, in the case of 7-symbol reach, the reach effect is executed about 20 seconds after the special symbol starts changing (the probability-variable jackpot is actually announced), and then, about 20 seconds later, the jackpot effect symbol GA is displayed. Ru. As understood from FIG. 13(a), the 7-symbol reach is the longest (approximately 50 seconds) among the variable patterns that can be determined in the game in which the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to. The reach promotion is a performance in which the same effect as the 7-symbol reach is executed until the middle, and finally the reach effect is not executed and the effect pattern GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. According to the above-mentioned reach promotion, it is possible to improve the expectation that the 7-symbol reach may be executed.

Short fluctuation (loss) is a performance in which the reach performance is not executed and the performance symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the short variation, the production symbol GA is stopped and displayed approximately 0.5 seconds after the special symbol variation starts, and then the production symbol GA is stopped and displayed for a fixed period of 0.5 seconds. The current state is maintained. The long variation (loss) is an effect in which the reach effect is not executed and the effect pattern GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the long variation, the production symbol GA is stopped and displayed approximately 3.5 seconds after the special symbol variation starts, and then the production symbol GA is stopped and displayed for a fixed period of 0.5 seconds. The current state is maintained.

As understood from FIG. 13(a), the instant win effect is executed with a probability of about 8/10 in a game in which a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot is won. That is, in the second time-saving game state (a game in which Tax is referred to), an immediate win performance is executed in most (approximately 80%) of the games in which the jackpot is won. However, the probability that the instant winning effect will be executed can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be configured such that when winning a probability variable jackpot, the winning is executed with a probability of about 1/10, and when winning a regular jackpot, the winning is executed with a probability of about 1/2. With the above configuration, when the direct alignment effect and the 7-symbol reach effect are executed, the expectation for a variable probability jackpot can be improved more than when the instant hit effect is executed. In other words, the longer the time until the jackpot effect pattern GA is displayed, the more the expectation for the probability variable jackpot can be improved.

The above-mentioned immediate win performance and direct alignment performance can be executed both when winning a normal jackpot and when winning a probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, the 7-symbol reach can be executed only when winning a probability-variable jackpot. In the above configuration, in the time saving mode B in which the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to (see FIG. 9 described above), a variable probability jackpot is substantially notified when the ready-to-win effect is executed with 7 symbols. Therefore, in the time-saving mode B, it is possible to improve the fun of the performances (7-symbol ready-to-win, ready-to-reach excitement) in which the presence or absence of the relevant ready-to-win performance is notified. However, in the game in the time-saving mode B where the player loses in the jackpot lottery, a configuration may be adopted in which a reach effect can be executed with seven symbols.

FIG. 13(b) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the variation pattern determination table Tbx. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the second time-saving game state that is started in the scenario unset period (without going through the jackpot game). In addition, in this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T that is referred to in the second time-saving gaming state is different depending on whether it is via the jackpot game or not, but in each of the above cases, the variation pattern determination table T may be common.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), in a game where the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to, the variation pattern J2g can be determined from the variation pattern J2a. In the game in which the variation pattern J2a is determined, the above-mentioned immediate win effect (probable variable jackpot) is executed. In addition, in the game in which the fluctuation pattern J2b is determined, the above-mentioned instant hit effect (normal jackpot) is executed, and in the game in which the fluctuation pattern J2c is determined, the above-mentioned short fluctuation (loss) is executed, and the fluctuation pattern J2d is executed. In the determined game, the above-mentioned long fluctuation (loss) is executed, in the game in which the fluctuation pattern J2e is determined, the above-mentioned instant hit performance (probable variable jackpot) is executed, and in the game in which the fluctuation pattern J2f is determined, In a game in which the above-mentioned immediate win effect (normal jackpot) is executed and the variation pattern J2g is determined, the above-mentioned special 1 loss (loss) is executed.

As understood from the above explanation, the 7-symbol reach is executed in the game where the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to, but is not executed in the game where the variable pattern determination table Tbx is referred to. Further, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the second time-saving gaming state, and the fluctuation pattern determining table Tax is also referred to in the first time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 9 above). The above configuration can also be said to be that the fluctuation pattern that can be determined is variable between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state.

FIG. 13(c) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the variation pattern determination table Ta1. The fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to from the 1st to the 90th game in the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 or the table scenario Sb3 is set.

As described above, the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 (Ta2) is referred to is the time saving mode A, and the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax (Tbx) is referred to is the time saving mode B. Therefore, as understood from FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c), there is a game (time saving mode A) in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, and a game (time saving mode A) in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax (Tbx) is referred to. The effects that can be performed are different depending on the time saving mode B). Specifically, the performance executed in one of the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B is not performed in the other production mode. However, an effect that is executed in common in both time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B may be provided. That is, although the effects executed in each effect mode are different in principle, a configuration may be adopted in which specific effects are executed in common in each effect mode. Furthermore, the effects executed in the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B may all be the same. Furthermore, although the effects executed in each effect mode are basically the same, a specific effect may be executed in only one effect mode.

In this embodiment, in each game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the average time of the period in which the performance symbols GA are displayed in a variable manner (the period in which the symbol images are scrolled and displayed) (hereinafter simply referred to as "average fluctuation of the performance symbols GA"). time'') is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA in each game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to and the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA in each game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to. That is, the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA is shorter in the second time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. Further, the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA during the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA in each game in which other fluctuation pattern determination tables T are referred to. However, depending on the table scenario S, the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA may be configured to be shorter in the first time-saving game state than in the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the average fluctuation time of the production symbol GA is longer than that of the game that won the jackpot in the second time-saving game state than the game that won the jackpot in the first time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. It will be shorter. However, depending on the table scenario S, the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA may be configured to be shorter in a game that wins a jackpot in the first time-saving game state than in a game that wins a jackpot in the second time-saving game state. .

As described above, the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted by the numerical value "1" in each game, and when the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the second time-saving game state is started. The above remaining number of times N is maintained by the backup power supply even if the power is cut off. Therefore, when the gaming hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed starts business, it is possible to leave the remaining number N of the previous day unchanged. However, if a clear operation is performed when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the remaining number of times N is initialized.

In this embodiment, a configuration is employed in which whether or not the remaining number of times N before the power is turned off remains unchanged is concealed immediately after the start of the game, and can be notified thereafter. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting whether or not the remaining number N will remain unchanged during the period immediately after the start of the game. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 14(a) is a mock diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31. Specifically, FIG. 14(a) is a simulated diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. In each game, the image display device 31 displays performance symbols GA (x, y, w), pending images GB (x, y), fourth symbols GC (1, 2), pending number images GD (1, 2), and Display various images including the small pattern Ga.

The performance symbols GA are variably displayed during the period in which the special symbol display devices (20, 21) are variably displayed, and are stopped and displayed during the period in which the special symbol display devices are stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect pattern GA stops displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. The specific example of FIG. 14(a) assumes a case where a losing symbol (special symbol H) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. In the above case, for example, the effect pattern GA stops displaying the pattern combination "782".

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the performance symbol GA stops and displays a symbol combination (for example, "777") corresponding to the jackpot symbol. Similarly, the effect pattern GA stops displaying a symbol combination (for example, "757") corresponding to the small winning symbol when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. The performance pattern GA includes a performance pattern GAx (see FIG. 14(a)), a performance pattern GAy (see FIG. 17(b)), and a performance pattern GAw. The effect pattern GAx is displayed in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. Further, the performance symbol GAy is displayed in the time saving mode A, and the performance symbol GAw is displayed in the time saving mode B.

The fourth symbol GC indicates the fluctuation state of the special symbol display device (20, 21). Specifically, during the period in which the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol GC is stopped and displayed. For example, during the period in which the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol GC is stopped and displayed in the first color (for example, white). On the other hand, during the period in which the special symbol display device is variably displayed, the fourth symbol GC is variably displayed. For example, during the period in which the special symbol display device is variably displayed, the fourth symbol GC is alternately displayed in the first color and the second color (for example, red).

The fourth symbol GC includes a fourth symbol GC1 and a fourth symbol GC2. The fourth symbol GC1 shows the variation mode of the first special symbol display device 20, and the fourth symbol GC2 shows the variation mode of the second special symbol display device 21. Specifically, the fourth symbol GC1 is variably displayed during a period in which the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed in a period in which the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped and displayed. Similarly, the fourth symbol GC2 is variably displayed during the period in which the second special symbol display device 21 is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed in the period in which the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. That is, the common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. Specifically, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a different fourth symbol GC is displayed depending on the gaming state. Further, in the jackpot game, the fourth symbol GC may be displayed.

The pending number image GD (1, 2) displays the pending number (first pending number, second pending number). Specifically, the pending number image GD includes a pending number image GD1 and a pending number image GD2. The pending number image GD1 displays the first pending number. Further, the pending number image GD2 displays the second pending number. In the specific example of FIG. 14A, it is assumed that the first number of reservations is four and the second number of reservations is zero.

The reservation number image GD of this embodiment is common to the low probability non-time saving game state, the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state, similar to the above-mentioned fourth symbol GC. That is, a common pending number image GD is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. Specifically, a common pending number image GD is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which different pending number images GD are displayed depending on the gaming state. Further, in the jackpot game, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending number image GD is displayed.

The small symbol Ga is composed of three symbols (an upper symbol, a middle symbol, and a lower symbol) similarly to the performance symbol GA. Further, the small symbol Ga is displayed in a variable manner during a period in which the special symbol display device (20, 21) is displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed in a static manner during a period in which the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the effect pattern GA may be temporarily hidden depending on the effect to be performed. Even in the above case, the small pattern Ga continues to be displayed in principle.

When a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops and displays a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot symbol. Further, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning symbol. Similarly, when a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the losing symbol. Furthermore, in principle, when the performance pattern GA is stopped and displayed, the small pattern Ga is stopped and displayed in the same manner as the performance pattern GA. For example, when you win a jackpot and the production pattern GA stops displaying at "7, 7, 7", the small symbol Ga also stops and displays at "7, 7, 7", you win a small hit, and the production pattern When the GA is stopped and displayed at "7.5.7", the small pattern Ga is also stopped and displayed at "7.5.7".

In this embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. That is, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state and the high probability time saving game state. Specifically, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga may be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, but the first special symbol display Apart from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the device 20, a small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be provided. In that case, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may have a display mode common to the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20, or 1. The display mode may be different from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol display device 20.

In this embodiment, a different background image GH is displayed for each production mode. For example, in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode, the background image GHx (an example of the first background image) is displayed (see FIG. 14(a)). However, the background image GH may be common to all or part of each production mode. The pending image GB includes a pending image GBx (see FIG. 14(a)), a pending image GBy (see FIG. 17(b)), and a pending image GBw (see FIG. 17(a)). In the pending image GBx, the above-mentioned random value (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "judgment information") is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area (first to fourth storage) in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. displayed when Specifically, a plurality of pending images GBx corresponding to each determination information stored in the first special symbol pending storage area are displayed. The pending image GBy is displayed when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol pending storage area in the time saving mode A. The pending image GBw is displayed when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol pending storage area in the time saving mode B.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the number of games image GE is displayed in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. The game count image GE displays the game count in the low probability game state. Therefore, when the number displayed by the game count image GE ("550" in the specific example of FIG. 14(a)) is added up to "800", the low probability non-time-saving gaming state then shifts to the second time-saving gaming state. It becomes possible. The above configuration has the advantage that the player can easily grasp the number of games until the transition to the second time-saving gaming state.

However, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then the power is supplied (when the power is turned OFF/ON), the number of games image GE will be changed to a number regardless of the number of remaining times N stored in the main RAM 113. Display “0”. That is, when the power is turned off and on with the remaining number N subtracted from the initial value "800", the number of games image GE displays the number "0" although the remaining number N is not the initial value. In the above case, before the number of games image GE displays the number "800", the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the number "0", and the second time-saving game state is started. On the other hand, if a clear operation is performed when the power is turned on, the remaining number of times N is initialized. In the above case, in a game where the number of games image GE is added to the number "800", the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the number "0", and the second time-saving game state is started.

As can be understood from the above explanation, in the period immediately after the power is turned off/on, it is not possible to determine whether the remaining number of times N remains unchanged (whether or not a clear operation has been performed). Specifically, in the period immediately after the power is turned OFF/ON, the number of games up to the second time-saving gaming state cannot be specified from the number of games image GE. With the above configuration, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting whether or not the remaining number N will remain unchanged during the period immediately after the start of the game.

FIG. 14(b) is a diagram showing a specific example of the stationary notification image GI. The deferred notification image GI is displayed on the condition that the remaining number of times N is deferred before and after the power is turned off/on. Further, the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the area RI of the screen shown in FIG. 14(a) described above during a specific number of games after the power is turned on. Specifically, the stationary notification image GI indicates the 51st game since the power was turned on (a game in which the number in the number of games image GE is added to "50") or the 101st game since the power was turned on (the number of games image GE is displayed as a game in which the number is added to "100").

According to the above configuration, the deferral notification image GI notifies that the remaining number of times N is deferral. Note that the number in the game count image GE is added at the end of the game (when the confirmation command is received). Therefore, it can also be said that the upper station notification image GI starts displaying a game where the number of games image GE is "50" at the start, or a game where the number of games image GE is "100" at the start. Ru. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, "a game in which the number in the number of games image GE is 'X' at the start" (a game in which the number in the number of games image GE is added to "X+1" at the end) is simply referred to as "the number of games in the number of games image GE". It may be written as "a game where the number is 'X'".

Furthermore, the stationary notification image GI is displayed on the condition that the remaining number of times N is equal to or less than the numerical value "200" in the specific number of games. For example, in the 51st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number N is less than or equal to the numerical value "200", the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the game. On the other hand, in the 51st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number of times N is greater than the numerical value "200", the stationary notification image GI is not displayed in the game. However, even if the stationary notification image GI is not displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the value "200" or less in the 101st game after the power is turned on, then the 101st game after the power is turned on is In the second game, the stationary notification image GI is displayed. Note that the stationary notification image GI is displayed in a common manner regardless of whether it is displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on or the 101st game after the power is turned on.

Even in the 101st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number N is larger than the numerical value "200", the stationary notification image GI will not be displayed even if the remaining number N is left unchanged. Furthermore, the stationary notification image GI is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then becomes hidden (see FIG. 14(d) described below). Furthermore, if the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on, it will not be displayed in the 101st game after the power is turned on. Note that a configuration in which a predetermined sound is output when the stationary notification image GI is displayed is suitable.

FIG. 14(c) is a diagram showing a specific example of the remaining number of times image GN. The remaining number of times image GN displays the actual remaining number of games until the second time-saving game state is started. That is, the remaining number of times image GN displays the current value of the remaining number of times N. The remaining number of times image GN is displayed, for example, in the area RN of the screen shown in FIG. 14(a) described above. In this embodiment, both the game count image GE and the remaining game count image GN are displayed simultaneously (in parallel). However, the remaining number of times image GN is not displayed in the period immediately after the power is turned on. With the above configuration, the current value of the remaining number of times N can be hidden during the period immediately after the power is turned on.

The remaining number of times image GN is displayed starting from the game in which the above-mentioned stationary notification image GI is displayed, and is displayed in subsequent games in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. However, as described above, the stationary notification image GI may not be displayed even once. In the above case, the remaining number of times image GN starts to be displayed in the 101st game after the power is turned on. Note that the remaining number of times image GN may be temporarily hidden during a period in which a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach or SPSP reach) is executed.

FIG. 14(d) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a period in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed and a period in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in a game in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed. . In FIG. 14(d), it is assumed that a game in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed starts at time ts and ends at time te.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), the stationary notification image GI starts to be displayed immediately after the game starts, and disappears at a predetermined time. Furthermore, at approximately the same time that the stationary notification image GI becomes non-display, the remaining number of times image GN starts to be displayed. The remaining number of times image GN continues to be displayed in subsequent games, and becomes hidden after the second time-saving game state is started. In the above configuration, the stationary notification image GI is displayed before the remaining number of times image GN. Therefore, after the deferral notification image GI notifies that the remaining number of times N is deferred, the remaining number of times image GN notifies the actual remaining number of times N.

Assume a comparison example in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed before the stationary notification image GI. Whether or not the game count image N is left unchanged can be determined from the actual number of games played since the power is turned on (the number displayed by the game count image GE) and the number displayed by the remaining game count image GN. For example, in the 101st game after the power is turned on, when the remaining number of times image GN displays a value other than the number "700", it is understood that the remaining number of times N is unchanged. Therefore, in the comparison example described above, it is practically announced whether or not the remaining number of times N is deferred before the deferred notification image GI is displayed, which is disadvantageous in that the deferred notification image GI is not noticed by the player. occurs. According to this embodiment, the above disadvantages are suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14(d), the stationary notification image GI starts to be displayed during the early period Pf of the game, and becomes hidden before the end of the early period Pf. The above early period Pf is a predetermined period of time after the game starts. Specifically, when a ready-to-win effect is executed in a game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed, the early period Pf is shorter than the period from the start of the game until the ready-to-win effect is executed. According to the above configuration, the display period of the stationary notification image GI ends before the reach effect starts. Therefore, the inconvenience that the image displayed in the reach effect becomes difficult to attract attention due to the stationary notification image GI is suppressed. Further, the opening period Pf is a time shorter than the shortest variation pattern determined in a game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed.

Note that the display performance of the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN is executed even if a jackpot is won in the current game. Suppose that in a game in which the remaining number of games image GN is scheduled to be displayed, if a jackpot is won, the remaining number of games image GN is not displayed. With the above configuration, there is an inconvenience that it is detected that the player has won the jackpot at the time when the remaining number of times image GN does not start to be displayed during the early period Pf. Furthermore, a similar problem may occur in a configuration in which the stationary notification image GI is not displayed when a jackpot is won in a game in which the stationary notification image GI is scheduled to be displayed. The configuration of this embodiment has the advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages can be suppressed.

FIGS. 15(a) to 15(d) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of when the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. 15(a) to FIG. 15(d), in addition to the period during which each of the above images is displayed, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state at each time point is shown.

FIG. 15(a) shows the timing at which the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in the period from immediately after the jackpot game ends until the second time-saving game state starts. As shown in FIG. 15(a), the remaining number of times image GN is displayed immediately after the jackpot game ends. Further, the remaining number of times image GN is hidden when the second time saving game state is started. However, when the second time-saving game state is started, if the number of reservations is a numerical value "0", the display of the remaining number of times image GN continues (see FIG. 19 described later).

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the stationary notification image GI shows a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50" and a number "100" in the number of games image GE during the period after the end of the jackpot game. It is not displayed in any game including games that display . In the above configuration, even if the remaining number of times N is left unchanged, this fact may not be reported even once through the above images. For example, if a jackpot game is won in the 50th game after the power is turned on, the stationary notification image GI is not displayed, and the remaining number of times N when the power is turned on is not notified by the remaining number of times image GN. Therefore, it is not reported whether or not the remaining number of times N has been deferred.

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after the power is turned on until the second time-saving game state starts. In the specific example of FIG. 15(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is left unchanged. Specifically, assume that the remaining number of times N when the power is turned on is a numerical value "X". In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 15(b), the remaining number N (number "X-50") in a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50" (the 51st game after the power is turned on) is the number "200". ”Assume the following case.

In the above specific example of FIG. 15(b), in a game where the number of games image GE displays the numerical value "50", the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. Specifically, in the above-mentioned early period Pf, the deferred notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. Note that if the deferred notification image GI is displayed in a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50," the deferred notification image GI is not displayed in a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "100." As shown in FIG. 15(b), the stationary notification image GI is hidden before the early period Pf ends. On the other hand, the remaining number of times image GN is continuously displayed until the second time saving game state is started.

FIG. 15(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after the power is turned on until the second time-saving game state starts. In the specific example of FIG. 15(c), it is assumed that the remaining number N is left unchanged as in FIG. 15(b) described above. Specifically, the remaining number of times N when the power is turned on is the number "X", and the remaining number of times N (the number "X") in a game where the number of games image GE displays the number "100" (the 101st game after the power is turned on) is -100") is less than or equal to the numerical value "200". Furthermore, in the above specific example, it is assumed that the remaining number N (number "X-50") of a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50" is greater than the number "200". In the above specific example of FIG. 15(c), in a game where the number of games image GE displays the number "50", the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are not displayed, and the number of games image GE displays the number "100". In a game that displays , a stationary notification image GI and a remaining number of times image GN are displayed.

FIG. 15(d) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after the power is turned on until the second time-saving game state starts. In the specific example of FIG. 15(d), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is left unchanged as in FIGS. 15(b) and 15(c) described above. Specifically, the remaining number of times N when the power is turned on is the number "X", and the remaining number of times N (the number "X") in a game where the number of games image GE displays the number "100" (the 101st game after the power is turned on) is -100'') is larger than the numerical value ``200''. In the above specific example of FIG. 15(d), in any game including a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50" and a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "100", the Notification image GI is not displayed. On the other hand, the remaining number of times image GN starts to be displayed in a game where the number of games image GE displays the number "100".

FIGS. 16(a) to 16(f) are diagrams for explaining each screen M (1 to 7) displayed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. Although details will be described later, each screen M displayed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state changes depending on whether or not the table scenario S is set. Further, each screen M displayed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state also changes depending on the type of table scenario S that is set. FIGS. 16(a) to 16(f) are simulated diagrams of each screen M displayed during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set among the table scenarios S.

FIG. 16(a) is a mock diagram of the screen M1 displayed immediately after the first game in the second time-saving game state is started. Screen M1 is displayed for a predetermined time after the first game in the second time-saving game state is started. In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the performance mode immediately before the second time-saving game state is started becomes the immediately preceding mode. As described above, in the immediately preceding mode, the background image GHx, the effect symbol GAx, the pending image GBx, and the number of games image GE are displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(a), in this embodiment, the above-mentioned images displayed in the immediately preceding mode are continuously displayed even immediately after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in the last-minute mode, the remaining number of times image GN is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the remaining number of times image GN continues to be displayed even immediately after the start of the first game in the second time saving game state. Specifically, the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0" as the number of remaining games until the second time-saving game state is started. The color of the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN changes when the number of remaining games until the second time-saving game state is started is subtracted to a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) or less. For example, in a game where the remaining number of games until the second time-saving game state starts is more than a predetermined number of times, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in white, and the number of remaining games until the second time-saving game state starts. In a game where the number of times remaining is less than a predetermined number of times, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 16a), when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed game image GS1 is displayed. In addition, as will be described in detail later, when the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the next game (the first game in the second time-saving game state) will start immediately or not. 2. Transition to time saving gaming state. Specifically, it is assumed that the number of pending games is "0" at the time when the remaining number N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" and the game ends. In the above case, immediately after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, the state shifts to the customer waiting state. In the above customer waiting state, the right-handed image GS1 is displayed.

FIG. 16(b) is a mock diagram of the screen M2 displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. Screen M2 is displayed after switching from screen M1 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As shown in FIG. 16(b), the screen M2 displays a game count image GE, a background image GHx, a small symbol Ga, and a pending image GBx, similarly to the screen M1. However, when switching from screen M1 to screen M2, the remaining number of times image GN is hidden and the start notification image Gn is displayed. The start notification image Gn is an image for notifying that the second time saving game state has started. For example, a message indicating that the second time-saving game state has started is displayed on the start notification image Gn. Furthermore, when the screen M1 is switched to the screen M2, the effect image GAx is hidden, and the start notification image Gn is displayed in the area where the effect image GAx was displayed (substantially in the center of the screen).

FIG. 16(c) is a mock diagram of the screen M3 displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. Screen M3 is displayed after switching from screen M2 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As shown in FIG. 16(c), each image including the small pattern Ga is displayed on the screen M3, similarly to the screen M2. Furthermore, the effect image GAx is not displayed on the screen M3 (same as the screen M2). However, the effect image GA may be displayed on the screen M2 and the screen M3.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), the start notification image Gn, right-handed game image GS1, pending image GBx, game count image GE, and background image GHx displayed on screen M2 are not displayed on screen M3. Specifically, the shielded images GF (GF1, GF2) are displayed on the screen M3. The shielding image GF is an image that shields the background image GHx to make it difficult to view (including cases where it is virtually impossible). The shielding image GF of this embodiment shields substantially the entire area of the background image GHx. However, it is sufficient that the background image GHx becomes difficult to see when the shielding image GF is displayed, and a configuration may be adopted in which the shielding image GF partially shields the background image GHx.

The shielding image GF is an image representing a sliding door, and is configured to include a left shielding image GF1 and a right shielding image GF2. The shielding image GF is displayed with priority over the start notification image Gn, the right-handed game image GS1, the pending image GBx, the number of games image GE, and the background image GHx (in front of each image). The left shielded image GF1 is displayed moving from the left side to the center of the image display device 31 while the screen M2 is displayed. Further, the right shielded image GF2 is displayed moving from the right side to the center of the image display device 31 while the screen M2 is displayed. That is, when screen M3 is displayed, the image display device 31 displays the action of closing the sliding door. In the screen M3, the position of the right side of the left shielded image GF1 and the position of the left side of the right shielded image GF2 substantially match. However, an image representing something other than a sliding door may be adopted as the shielding image GF.

As described above, in this embodiment, the right-handed hitting image GS1 is not displayed on the screen M2. On the other hand, right-handed hitting image GS2 is displayed on screen M3. The right-handed game image GS2 is an image for instructing that the game should be played right-handed, similar to the right-handed game image GS1. In the above configuration, right-handed hitting is instructed by the image display device 31 on both the screen M2 and the screen M3. Note that the right-hand hitting image GS1 may be configured to be displayed on both the screen M2 and the screen M3. Specifically, the right-handed image GS1 may be displayed in front of the shielded image GF, and the right-handed image GS1 may be displayed so as to be visible even in the period after the shielded image GF is displayed.

FIG. 16(d) is a mock diagram of the screen M4 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Screen M4 is displayed after switching from screen M3 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the screen M4 is displayed by hiding the shielding image GF of the screen M3. For example, the left shielded image GF1 is moved and displayed to the right side of the image display device 31, the right shielded image GF2 is moved and displayed to the left side of the image display device 31, and the shielded image GF is hidden. That is, when the screen M4 is displayed, the image display device 31 displays the action of opening the sliding door.

As shown in FIG. 16(d), the number of games image GE displayed before the shielding image GF is displayed (before the sliding door is closed) (see FIG. 16(b) described above) is the same as that of the shielding image GF. Even if the screen is opened (even if the sliding door is opened), it will not be displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the number-of-games image GE is hidden by the shielding image GF, so that it is not displayed. If the number-of-games image GE suddenly disappears from display, this may cause an inconvenience that may feel unnatural to some players. According to the configuration of this embodiment, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages can be suppressed. Further, as shown in FIG. 16(d), the effect pattern GA and the pending image GB are not displayed on the screen M4.

As shown in FIG. 16(d), various images including the right-handed image GS2 and the small symbol Ga are displayed on the screen M4 (similar to the screen M3, etc.). Further, on the screen M4, a rush effect is executed to notify that the mode will shift to the time saving mode B. Specifically, the entry image GT is displayed on the screen M4. The entry image GT is an image for informing that the production mode is transitioning to the time-saving mode B, and the name of the time-saving mode B ("Chance Time" in the example of FIG. 16(b)) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(d), the background image GHz is displayed in the rush effect.

FIG. 16(e) is a mock diagram of the screen M5 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Screen M5 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the screen M5 is displayed after the entry effect is executed (instead of the screen M4), and the mode selection effect is executed on the screen M5. The time-saving mode B of this embodiment is configured to include multiple types of performance modes from the time-saving mode B1 to the time-saving mode B3. In the mode selection performance, the player can select a performance mode (B1 to B3) by appropriately operating the performance button 8 and cross key 40. However, no matter which of the time saving modes B1 to B3 is selected, the variation pattern determination table T in the time saving mode B is the same. Specifically, the performance determined by the sub CPU 121 changes depending on the performance mode selected in the mode selection performance, but the variation pattern determination table T referred to by the main CPU 111 does not change.

As shown in FIG. 16(e), a small pattern Ga is displayed in the mode selection effect. Further, in the mode selection effect, a right-handed hit image GS2 is displayed. That is, the right-handed hit image GS2 is displayed throughout the entry performance and mode selection performance. Further, in the mode selection effect, a background image GHz (an example of a second background image) is displayed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a background image GH dedicated to mode selection effect is provided. As mentioned above, the second time-saving gaming state can be started via the jackpot game (after the table scenario has been set) or not via the jackpot game (in the scenario-unset period). be. As will be described in detail later, when the second time-saving game state is started via the jackpot game, the mode selection effect is executed (see FIG. 18(a) described later), while the second When the time-saving game state is started, the mode selection performance is not executed (see FIG. 18(b) described later). As shown in FIG. 16(e), in the mode selection performance, the performance symbol GA and the pending image GB are not displayed.

FIG. 16(f) is a mock diagram of the screen M6 displayed in the first game of the second time saving game state. Screen M6 is displayed after switching from screen M5 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. On the screen M6, similarly to the above screen M5 (mode selection performance), an image including the small symbol Ga and the background image GHz is displayed, and an image including the performance symbol GA and the pending image GB is hidden. Note that the background image GH on the screen M6 can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 16(f), a right-handed image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6 in place of the above-mentioned right-handed image GS2. The right-handed game image GS3, like the right-handed game image GS1 and the right-handed game image GS2, is an image for informing that the game should be played right-handed. In this embodiment, when displaying the right-handed game image GS3 among the right-handed game images GS (GS1 to GS3 and GS4 described later), a sound saying "right-handed game" is played, and other right-handed game images GS are displayed. In this case, the audio will not be played. However, when displaying a right-handed player image GS other than the right-handed player image GS3, a configuration may be adopted in which a sound saying "right-handed player" is played.

FIG. 17(a) is a mock diagram of the time saving medium screen M7 displayed in the second time saving game state. Although the details will be described later, the time-saving medium screen M7 is displayed after switching from the above-mentioned screen M6 (see FIG. 16(f)), for example (see FIG. 18(a) described later), and is displayed at the beginning of the second time-saving game state. is displayed at the end of the game.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), on the time-saving medium screen M7 (time-saving mode B), the small symbol Ga, the production symbol GAw, the right-handed image GS4, the background image GHw, the pending image GBw, the remaining time-saving image GJ, and the active image GM Display each image containing. The effect pattern GAw is the effect pattern GA displayed in each game of the time saving mode B. As described above, immediately after the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the performance symbol GAx (the performance symbol GA of the immediately preceding mode) is displayed. Thereafter, the performance symbol GAw is displayed at the final stage of the game. That is, the performance symbol GAw starts to be displayed in the middle of the game. Therefore, the performance symbol GAw is displayed in a variable manner immediately after the display is started. The background image GHw (an example of the second background image) is the background image GH displayed in each game of time saving mode B. The pending symbols GBw are displayed in the time saving mode B, and the number of pending symbols GBw corresponding to the number of second pending symbols is displayed. Further, in each game in the time saving mode B, a right-handed hitting image GS4 is displayed.

The time-saving remaining image GJ displays the remaining number of times M of the time-saving gaming state. However, the remaining number of times M stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted by a numerical value "1" when each game in the time-saving game state ends. On the other hand, the number of the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted by 1 every time each game in the time-saving game state starts. For example, assume that a game is started with the remaining number of times M being a numerical value of "X". In the above case, the number in the time saving remaining image GJ is subtracted from the numerical value "X" to the numerical value "X-1" immediately after the start of the game. Thereafter, at the end of the game, the remaining number M stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted from the numerical value "X-1". However, a configuration may be adopted in which the update timing of the remaining number of times M stored in the main RAM 113 and the update timing of the time-saving remaining image GJ substantially match.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in the area RJ of the time saving screen M7. The specific example in FIG. 17(a) assumes a period immediately after the time saving remaining image GJ starts to be displayed in the first game in the second time saving game state. In addition, in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the timing at which the number of the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted is immediately after the start of the game. However, the display start time of the remaining time saving image GJ in the first game of the second time saving game state is at the final stage of the game after the rush effect etc. are finished. That is, in the first game of the second time-saving game state, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed for the first time after the original time (immediately after the start of the game) when the number of the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted has elapsed. Due to the above circumstances, the remaining time saving image GJ first displays the number "999", which is obtained by subtracting the number "1" from the number of time saving times (1000 times) in the second time saving game state, in the first game in the second time saving game state. do.

The active image GM is an image for notifying that the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state. As mentioned above, the performance mode of the second time-saving game state is time-saving mode B. However, even in the first time-saving game state, the game may shift to time-saving mode B (see FIG. 11(a)). Therefore, in a configuration where it is not announced in time saving mode B whether or not it is in the second time saving gaming state, it becomes difficult to grasp whether the current gaming state is in the second time saving gaming state or in the first time saving gaming state. This may cause inconvenience.

In this embodiment, the active image GM is displayed in the time saving mode B of the second time saving game state, and the active image GM is not displayed in the time saving mode B of the first time saving game state and the above-mentioned gap game. Specifically, the active image GM is displayed in the second time-saving game state regardless of whether or not it is a scenario unset period. In addition, regardless of the type of table scenario S (Sb2 to Sb4), the active image GM is displayed in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

FIG. 17(b) is a mock diagram of the time saving screen M8 displayed in each game in the first time saving game state. Specifically, the time saving medium screen M8 is displayed in each game in the time saving mode A. As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the time-saving mode A, each image including the small symbol Ga, the performance symbol GAy, the reserved image GBy, the background image GHy, the right-handed hit image GS4, and the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed.

In the present embodiment described above, the time saving remaining image GJ is commonly displayed in the time saving mode A (first time saving game state) and the time saving mode B (second time saving game state). Specifically, in the time-saving mode A, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ of the image display device 31, as shown in FIG. 17(b). As described above, in the time saving mode B, the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ of the image display device 31, as shown in FIG. 17(a). Therefore, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in a common area (region RJ) in time-saving mode A (first time-saving gaming state) and time-saving mode B (second time-saving gaming state).

In this embodiment, the time saving mode A may be directly transferred to the time saving mode B. Assume a configuration in which the area in which the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed changes between time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B. With the above configuration, it is assumed that some players may lose sight of the time-saving remaining image GJ immediately after the time-saving mode B is started. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the above-mentioned disadvantages can be suppressed.

However, in a configuration in which the time-saving mode A directly shifts to the time-saving mode B, there may be an inconvenience that some players do not notice that the time-saving mode B has started. In consideration of the above circumstances, the area in which the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed may be intentionally made different between the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B. FIG. 17(c) shows an example of the time saving screen M7 in the second time saving game state of the modified example employing the above configuration. In the above modification, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ in the first time-saving game state, and the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ' in the second time-saving game state. According to the above modification, since the area in which the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed changes, it becomes easier to recognize that the time saving mode A has ended and the time saving mode B has started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned disadvantages.

By the way, in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is subtracted, similarly to the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, the remaining number of times image GN (see FIG. 14(c)) displaying the current value of the remaining number of times N may be displayed in the first time-saving game state. Similarly, the number of games image GE (see FIG. 14(a)), which allows the number of games up to the second time-saving game state to be grasped, may be displayed in the first time-saving game state. That is, a specific performance (such as displaying a subtraction of the remaining number of times image GN) according to the remaining number of times N may be executed in the second time-saving game state.

However, the second time saving game state is started after the first time saving game state ends. If the specific performance described above is executed in the first time-saving game state, some players may be aware that they will not win the jackpot until the second time-saving game state starts in the first time-saving game state. There are cases. In the above case, an inconvenience may occur in which the player's desire to play the game decreases. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, a specific performance corresponding to the remaining number of times N is executed in the non-time saving game state, while a specific performance is not executed in the first time saving game state. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

18(a) to 18(c) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of periods during which each image (GF, GT, GH, GS) is displayed at the start of time saving mode B. In addition, in the specific examples of FIGS. 18(a) to 18(c), it is assumed that the player does not win the jackpot at the start of time saving mode B.

For the sake of explanation, the shielding image GF (see FIG. 16(c)), the entry image GT (see FIG. 16(d)), and the right-handed image GS3 (see FIG. 16(f)) displayed at the start of time-saving mode B are shown below. ) are collectively referred to as "starting images." The above start image is displayed during the period from the start of the second time saving game state until switching to the time saving screen M7 (see FIG. 17(a) described above). In this embodiment, the period from the start of the second time-saving game state until switching to the time-saving medium screen M7 (the period during which the start image is displayed) is described as "start notification period Pz (1 to 3)". There are cases. As will be described in detail later, the performance mode during the start notification period Pz changes depending on whether the table scenario S is set and the type of the table scenario S.

FIG. 18A is a specific example where the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the above case, the mode shifts from the last-minute mode (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) to the time-saving mode B (second time-saving gaming state). In the immediately preceding mode, the background image GHx is displayed. FIG. 18(a) shows the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state and the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), when transitioning from the last-minute mode to time-saving mode B, the above-mentioned screen M1 (see FIG. 16(a)) and screen M2 (see FIG. 16(b)) are each displayed for a predetermined time. After that, the screen M3 is displayed and the shielded image GF is displayed. During the period in which the shielding image GF is displayed, the background image GH is shielded (hidden). Further, after the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, a rush effect is executed in which the screen M4 (see FIG. 16(d)) is displayed. As described above, in the rush effect, the rush image GT is displayed, and the background image GH becomes the background image Gz.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, after the entry effect is executed, the mode selection effect is displayed on the screen M5 (see FIG. 16(e) above). is executed. Further, the mode selection effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M6 is displayed (see FIG. 16(f)). A right-handed hit image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6. As shown in FIG. 18A, the start notification period Pz1 when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set is a period until switching to the time saving screen M7. In the above start notification period Pz1, screens M1 to M6 are displayed, and the time for displaying each of the above screens is predetermined. Therefore, the start notification period Pz1 ends at a predetermined time.

As described above, the variation pattern of the game is determined with reference to the variation pattern determination table Ts. In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, only one type of fluctuation pattern is determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. That is, the length of the period (hereinafter referred to as "variation period Px") in which the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the variation pattern (loss) determined by the variation pattern determination table Ts remains unchanged (fixed).

As shown in FIG. 18(a), the fluctuation period Px is longer than the start notification period Pz1. That is, the variable period Px is designed to have a length that allows various performances including the entry performance and the mode selection performance to be executed. Similarly, in a game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, the length of the fluctuation pattern is determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit, and the length of the fluctuation pattern is determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The length of is longer than the start notification period Pz1.

According to the above configuration, the start image displayed in the start notification period Pz1 is displayed in the first game of time saving mode B (second time saving game state), and is not displayed in the second and subsequent games. Assume a configuration in which the start image displayed in the start notification period Pz1 is also displayed in the second and subsequent games in time saving mode B. With the above configuration, a problem may arise in which the image displayed in the second and subsequent games in time saving mode B becomes difficult to see (or cannot be displayed) as the starting image. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the above disadvantages are suppressed.

However, as mentioned above, during the period when the table scenario Sb is not set, the fluctuation pattern determination table (Tbx) is the same for the first game in the second time-saving game state and each game from the second time onwards (Fig. 10(b) )reference). Therefore, in the first game of the second time-saving game state, a random fluctuation pattern is determined as in the subsequent games. That is, in the scenario unset period, the length of the period (hereinafter referred to as "variable period Py") in which the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed is variable.

In the above configuration, if the length of the start notification period Pz is the same between the table scenario Sb2 set period and the scenario unset period, the first game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period There is a possibility that the start notification period Pz will not end before the end of the start notification period Pz. In the above case, in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, there arises an inconvenience that the start image is displayed. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment has a configuration in which the start notification period Pz3 in the scenario unset period is shorter than the start notification period Pz2 in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

FIG. 18(b) is a specific example in which the time saving mode B starts during the scenario unset period. In the above case, the normal mode (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) shifts to the time-saving mode B (second time-saving gaming state). As described above, the background image GHx is displayed in the normal mode. FIG. 18(b) shows the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state and the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), when transitioning to time-saving mode B in a period where no scenario is set, screen M1 and screen M2 are Each is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M3 is displayed and the shielding image GF is displayed. Further, after the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, a rush effect is executed in which the screen M4 is displayed.

However, when transitioning to time-saving mode B during the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set, after the mode selection effect is executed (after displaying screen M5), right-handed image GS4 (screen M6) is displayed, but the scenario When shifting to the time-saving mode B during the unset period, the mode selection effect is omitted and the right-handed hit image GS4 (screen M6) is displayed. That is, the start notification period Pz2 in the scenario unset period omits the period in which the mode selection effect is executed, compared to the start notification period Pz1 in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

In the above configuration, the start notification period Pz2 is shorter than the start notification period Pz1. Specifically, the start notification period Pz2 is designed to be shorter than the shortest variation pattern determined in the first game of the second time-saving game state. In this embodiment, when the game is played according to the normal procedure, the number of second reservations is 0 when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started. Therefore, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the first game of the second time-saving game state, the "long variation (loss)" (approximately 4 seconds) is the shortest variation pattern among the various variation patterns. In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the first game of the second time-saving game state, the "special 1 loss (loss)" (approximately 7 seconds) is the shortest variation pattern among the various variation patterns. Therefore, the start notification period Pz is designed to have a length shorter than the "long fluctuation (loss)" of about 4 seconds, for example.

As understood from the above description, according to the configuration of this embodiment, the start notification period Pz2 ends by the time the first game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period ends. In addition, the start notification period Pz2 may be a time shorter (for example, about 6 seconds) than the shortest variation pattern (special figure 1 loss: about 7 seconds) among each variation pattern of the first special figure in the second time-saving gaming state. good.

Further, as understood from the above description, according to the present embodiment, when displaying the background image GHz instead of the background image GHx at the start of the time saving mode B (second time saving game state), the shielding image GF can be displayed. According to the above configuration, by blocking the background image GHx all at once, the player is made aware of the end of the time-saving mode A in a short period of time, and then by displaying the background image GHx all at once, the time-saving mode B The player can be made aware of the start of the game in a short period of time. That is, there is an advantage that it becomes easier to understand that the time saving mode A has shifted to the time saving mode B in a short period of time.

FIG. 18(c) is a specific example where the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set. In the above case, the time saving mode B is entered immediately after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the first time-saving game state (799 times) is started, and the performance mode shifts to time-saving mode B. FIG. 18(c) shows the start time ta and end time tb of the ending period.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), when the ending period starts, a rush effect in which the above-mentioned screen M4 (see FIG. 16(d)) is displayed is executed. As described above, in the rush effect, the rush image GT is displayed, and the background image GH becomes the background image GHz. After the entry effect is executed, the mode selection effect is executed and the screen M5 (see FIG. 16(e) described above) is displayed. Further, the mode selection effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M6 is displayed (see FIG. 16(f)). A right-handed hit image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6. In the specific example of FIG. 18(c), when the ending period (start notification period Pz3) ends, time saving mode B (first time saving game state) is started and a time saving screen M7 is displayed.

The length of the ending period when table scenario Sb4 is set is determined in advance. Specifically, the start notification period Pz3 when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set substantially coincides with the ending period. That is, the start image displayed when time saving mode B starts can be displayed during the ending period.

As can be understood from the above description, in this embodiment, there are cases where the transition to time saving mode B is made at the start of the first time saving gaming state (see FIG. 18(c)), and when transitioning to the time saving mode B at the start of the second time saving gaming state. (FIG. 18(b)), the mode of presentation (start presentation) is different. For example, the shielding image GF is displayed when shifting to the time-saving mode B at the start of the second time-saving game state, but the shielding image GF is not displayed when shifting to the time-saving mode B at the start of the first time-saving gaming state. Further, the start notification period Pz2 and the start notification period Pz3 have different lengths. With the above configuration, it becomes easier to optimally set the performance when transitioning to time-saving mode B, compared to a configuration in which the performance when transitioning to time-saving mode B is uniform.

However, the start notification period Pz2 and the start notification period Pz3 may have the same length, or the shielding image GF may be displayed during the start notification period Pz3. In addition, during the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set, the mode of performance when transitioning to time-saving mode A (first time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game is different from the mode of performance when transitioning to time-saving mode B. do. Specifically, an effect notifying that the time saving mode A has started is performed during the ending period. The ending period is different depending on when time saving mode A starts and when time saving mode B starts. Further, when the time saving mode A starts, the mode selection effect is not executed. Furthermore, in the entry effect when shifting to time saving mode A, the name of time saving mode A is displayed.

By the way, in a configuration in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted at the end of the game, if the number of pending games is 0 at the end of the game, the customer waiting state starts immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state. Since the above customer waiting state is the second time-saving gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the game with the right hand than with the left hand. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which right-handed play is instructed in the customer waiting state before the first game of the second time-saving game state is started. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 19(a) is a mock diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx displayed when the customer waiting state is started at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state. The specific example in FIG. 19(a) assumes that table scenario Sb2 is set among the table scenarios S, similar to FIG. 16(a) described above. In the above case, the non-time-saving gaming state (immediate mode) in which the background image GHx is displayed shifts to the second time-saving gaming state (time-saving mode B). In addition, in the scenario non-setting period, if the player is in a customer waiting state at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed in the customer waiting state, similarly to the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

The customer waiting screen Mx shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed when the number of pending games at the start of the second time-saving gaming state is 0. Therefore, on the customer waiting screen Mx, the performance symbols GAx and the small symbols Ga are stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 19(a), the customer waiting screen Mx displays a game count image GE and a remaining game count image GN similarly to the screen M1. Furthermore, the right-hand hitting image GS1 is displayed on the customer waiting screen Mx, similar to the screen M1. According to the above configuration, in the customer waiting state before the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state, a right-handed game is instructed.

FIG. 19(b) is a diagram for explaining the period during which each image (GF, GT, GH, GS) is displayed when the customer waiting state is started at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state. be. FIG. 19(b) shows the end time te of the game at which the remaining number N until the second time-saving game state is subtracted to the numerical value "0", and the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state. It will be done. In the above specific example, the period Pw shown in FIG. 19(b) is in the customer waiting state, and the customer waiting screen Mx (see FIG. 19(a)) is displayed during the period Pw.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), during the period Pw in which the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed, the right-handed image GS1 is displayed and the background image GHx is displayed. After that, when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the same process as in the case where the number of pending games in the second time-saving game state is one or more (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b) described above) , screen M1, screen M2, and so on are displayed in this order. Specifically, during the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set, each screen is displayed in order from screen M1 to screen M7 (see FIG. 18(a)). Furthermore, during the scenario unset period, each screen (M1, M2, M3, M4, M6, M7) except screen M5 is displayed in sequence (see FIG. 18(b)).

FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b) are diagrams for explaining details of when the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN are updated. As described above, the remaining number of times image GN displays the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113. However, in this embodiment, the time when the number in the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted and the time when the remaining number of times N is subtracted are different. The above configuration will be explained in detail below. In addition, below, the time to update the number of the remaining number of times image GN may be simply described as "the update time of the remaining number of times image GN."

As described above, in this embodiment, the remaining number N of the main RAM 113 is subtracted at the end of the game (when the special symbol is stopped). Specifically, one game is provided with a variable period in which the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a fixed period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed after the variable period ends. The length of the fluctuation period in a game is variable depending on the fluctuation pattern of the game. On the other hand, the fixed period in the game is a predetermined time (about 0.5 seconds). The main control board 110 (main CPU 111) transmits a symbol confirmation command to the sub CPU 121 at the start of the confirmation period. When receiving the symbol confirmation command, the production control board 120 (sub CPU 121) causes the image control board 150 to stop display the production symbols GA and small symbols Ga until the confirmation period ends. That is, the fixed period substantially coincides with the period during which the special symbol and the production symbol GA are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 20A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the update timing of the remaining number of times image GN. FIG. 20(a) shows the numbers of the remaining number of times image GN at each time point displayed by the production control board 120 (image control board 150), and the remaining number image GN stored at each time point by the main control board 110 (main RAM 113). The number of times N is indicated. Further, FIG. 20(a) shows a game start time ts and a game end time te. Further, FIG. 20(a) shows the time ta at which the variable period in the game ends. The above time ta can also be referred to as the time when the fixed period starts.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), at the start time ts of the game, the remaining number of times command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 120. The remaining number of times command is a command that specifies the current value of the remaining number of times N. When the power is cut off, the effect control board 120 of this embodiment restores the number of the remaining number of times image GN according to the remaining number of times command transmitted after the power is restored. In the specific example of FIG. 20(a), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N at the start of the game is a numerical value "X" (X≧2). The remaining number of times command transmitted at the start of the current game indicates the remaining number of times N that was updated (subtracted) at the end of the previous game.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), at time ta when the confirmation period starts, a symbol confirmation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 120. When receiving the symbol confirmation command, the production control board 120 stops displaying the production symbol GA and subtracts the number of the remaining number of times image GN. In other words, the number in the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted at approximately the same time as the time ta when the fixed period starts. In the specific example of FIG. 20(a), the number in the remaining number of times image GN is displayed after being subtracted from "X" to "X-1". However, the main control board 110 subtracts the remaining number N of the main RAM 113 at the time te when the determination period ends. Therefore, immediately after the number in the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted to "X-1", the remaining number of times N in the main RAM 113 is the numerical value "X", as shown in FIG. 20(a).

Assume a comparison example in which the number in the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted at the end of the fixed period. In the above comparison example, it can be said that the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted after the game ends. However, for example, when the game transitions to the customer waiting state after the game ends, some players stop paying attention to the screen of the image display device 31 (including the remaining number of times image GN) at the game end point ta, and end the game. You may end up doing this. In the above case, there may be an inconvenience that the subtraction display of the numbers in the remaining number of times image GB is not visible to the player. According to this embodiment, since the subtraction display of the number in the remaining number of times image GB is executed before the end of the game, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 20(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the update timing of the remaining number of times image GN. Similar to FIG. 20(a) above, FIG. 20(b) shows the number of the remaining number of times image GN at each time point, the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113 at each time point, the start time ts of the game, and the number of times the game A time ta at which the fluctuation period ends and a time te at which the game ends are shown. Further, FIG. 20(b) shows the gaming state at each point in time. In the specific example of FIG. 20(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at the end time te of the game. Therefore, the second time-saving game state is started from the game end time te.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), even in a game where the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", as in other games, the number of remaining times image GN is is subtracted. That is, at the time ta when the confirmation period starts, the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0". Further, when the confirmation period ends after the number "0" is displayed on the remaining number of times image GN, the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the number "0" and the second time-saving game state is started.

In the above configuration, the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0" before the second time saving game state is started. However, some players may have the inconvenience of mistakenly thinking that the second time-saving gaming state has started at the time ta when the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0". Considering the above circumstances, in a game in which the second time-saving game state starts, the number in the remaining image GN is not subtracted at the start of the fixed period, but at the time when the remaining number of times N is subtracted (when the second time-saving game state is A configuration may also be adopted in which the number in the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted at the starting point). Specifically, after the remaining number of times N has been subtracted to the numerical value "0", the timing of receiving a customer waiting command, or a command specifying that the first game in the second time-saving game state has started (for example, , fluctuation pattern designation command) may be configured to display the number "0" on the remaining number of times image GN. In addition, in each game, the number of the remaining number of times image GN may be subtracted at the end of the fixed period.

FIGS. 21(a), 21(b-1), and 21(b-2) are for explaining the display of the effect execution means (for example, the image display device 31) in the period before and after the power outage occurs. This is a diagram. As described above, the presentation mode (display mode of the image display device 31) in a specific period corresponds to the variation pattern determination table referenced in the period. In this embodiment, the image display device 31 may be controlled to a production mode that does not correspond to the fluctuation pattern determination table during a period immediately after recovery from a power outage. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 21(a) is a mock diagram of a recovery screen displayed when power is restored. As shown in FIG. 21(a), the recovery screen displays a message indicating that recovery is in progress from power outage. Furthermore, a background image GHf is displayed on the recovery screen. The background image GHf is a dedicated background image GH that is displayed when the power is restored, and is, for example, a white (single color) image. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a), it is assumed that the power supply is restored during the period in which the right-handed lamp 28 is lit. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the right-handed hit image GS is displayed on the recovery screen. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which images other than the background image GHf and the right-handed image GS are displayed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending number image GD (see FIG. 14(a) described above) is displayed on the recovery screen.

FIG. 21(b-1) is a diagram for explaining the performance mode at each point in time in the period before and after the power cutoff, and a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table T to be referred to. FIG. 21(b-1) assumes a case where a power outage occurs in a jackpot game. FIG. 21(b-1) shows a time point ta when the power is cut off and a time tb when the power supply is restarted. In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), the jackpot game ends at time tc, transitions to the customer waiting state (the number of pending games at the end of the jackpot game = 0), and the first game starts at time td. Assume a case.

In this embodiment, when the power is restored from a power outage, a power outage recovery command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 120. For example, the main CPU 111 transmits a power failure recovery command after completing initialization processing when the power is turned on. From the power outage recovery command, whether or not the special symbol is changing, the number of reservations, and the gaming state are specified. Specifically, from the power outage recovery command, it is specified whether the game is a jackpot game, a small win game, a low probability non-time saving game state, a high probability time saving gaming state, a first time saving gaming state or a second time saving gaming state. be done. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), at the time of power outage recovery tb, a power outage recovery command is transmitted that specifies that the current gaming state is a jackpot game.

As mentioned above, in the jackpot game, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up. Therefore, when the gaming state specified from the power failure recovery command is a jackpot game, the right-handed image GS is displayed on the above-mentioned recovery screen. Note that the type of right-handed image GS displayed on the recovery screen can be changed as appropriate. For example, a common right-handed game image GS may be displayed on the recovery screen regardless of whether the gaming status specified from the power failure recovery command is a jackpot game or a time-saving gaming status. Further, the right-handed game image GS, which is originally displayed in the gaming state specified from the power failure recovery command, may be configured to be displayed on the recovery screen.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the jackpot game, various images including the current number of rounds and stop-displayed jackpot performance symbols are displayed. However, the current number of rounds and the jackpot effect pattern cannot be specified from the power failure recovery command. Therefore, if a power outage occurs in a jackpot game and then the power is restored from the power outage, the image that should originally be displayed in the jackpot game cannot be completely restored. Considering the above circumstances, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21 (b-1), when the power is cut off and restored in a jackpot game, a recovery screen is displayed thereafter until the jackpot game ends. . However, if a power outage occurs in a jackpot game and the power is subsequently restored from the power outage, the screen displayed in the jackpot game may be restored. In the above case, the screen of the jackpot game after the power is restored is displayed with images that cannot be restored (for example, images showing the number of rounds) omitted.

Further, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to after the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol and the table scenario Sb4 is set. As described above, the performance mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is the time saving mode B. Therefore, the period during which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to is normally in the time saving mode B.

However, the power failure recovery command does not specify the type of fluctuation pattern determination table T (table scenario S) that is referred to after the end of the jackpot game. Further, the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game can shift to both time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B (see, for example, FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)). Therefore, in the period immediately after recovery from power cut-off, the performance control board 120 side cannot specify whether the performance mode in the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game should be set to time-saving mode A or time-saving mode B.

When a variation pattern specification command is received, the variation pattern determination table referenced on the main control board 110 side is specified from the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. That is, the original production mode is specified from the variation pattern designation command. In this embodiment, the original performance mode may not be specified on the performance control board 120 side until the fluctuation pattern designation command is first received after recovery from power failure.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 21(b-1), the state shifts to the customer waiting state after the jackpot state ends. Further, the first time the fluctuation pattern designation command is received after the jackpot state ends is at the time td when the first game starts after the jackpot game ends. In the above specific example, in the customer waiting state from the time tc when the jackpot game ends to the time td when the game starts, the performance control board 120 side cannot specify whether the time saving mode A or the time saving mode B should be used.

Let us assume a comparative example in which each performance execution means is controlled in time-saving mode B when it is not possible on the production control board 120 side to specify whether to use time-saving mode A or time-saving mode B. As mentioned above, in the time saving mode A, there is a possibility that the first time saving game state ends after 100 times. On the other hand, in time saving mode B, the first time saving game state continues up to 799 times. Therefore, in the above-mentioned comparative example, the first time-saving game state may end after 100 times even though the game has shifted to the time-saving mode B. In the above case, some players may experience an inconvenience in which they lose their desire to play.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, if it is not possible on the production control board 120 side to specify whether to enter the time-saving mode A or the time-saving mode B in the first time-saving gaming state, each production execution means is set in the time-saving mode A. (image display device 31, etc.). According to the above-described configuration of this embodiment, the first time-saving game state does not end after 100 times, even though the game has shifted to the time-saving mode B. Therefore, compared to the above-mentioned comparative example, there is an advantage that the inconvenience that causes players to lose their desire to play is suppressed.

As described above, the original performance mode is specified from the variation pattern designation command. In this embodiment, the performance mode is changed to the original performance mode when the original performance mode can be specified on the performance control board 120 side. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), a variation pattern designation command is received at time td. From the above variation pattern designation command, it is specified that the original production mode is time saving mode B. Therefore, the performance mode is switched from time-saving mode A to time-saving mode B at time td. In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), if it is assumed that the original production mode is time saving mode A (when the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to), before and after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command, The production mode is time saving mode A and does not change.

FIG. 21(b-2) is a diagram for explaining the production mode at each point in time in the period before and after the power cutoff, and another specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to. FIG. 21(b-2) assumes a case where a power outage occurs during a game in time saving mode B (a game in which the variable pattern determination table Tax or the variable pattern determination table Tbx is referred to). Specifically, FIG. 21 (b-2) shows that in time-saving mode B, a game is started at time ts, a power cut occurs at time ta during the game, and power supply is resumed at subsequent time tb. Assume a case. Further, the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2) assumes that the game ends at time tc, then shifts to a customer waiting state, and a new game starts at time td.

In the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2) above, the original performance mode cannot be specified on the performance control board 120 side during the period from the time tb when the power is restored from the power outage until the new time td is displayed. Specifically, from the time tb when the power outage is restored until the time tc when the game interrupted due to the power outage ends, in addition to the original performance mode, the fluctuation pattern in the game and the performance symbol GA to be stopped and displayed cannot be specified. . In consideration of the above circumstances, the above-mentioned recovery screen is displayed during the period from when the power is restored to when the power is cut off until the game that was interrupted due to the power cut ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2), in the customer waiting state from time tc to time td when a new game starts, the original performance mode cannot be specified on the performance control board 120 side, so time saving mode A is used. Each production execution means is controlled. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2), when the variation pattern designation command is received at time td, the production mode is switched from time saving mode A to time saving mode B.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the power is cut off in the time-saving gaming state, when the fluctuation pattern designation command is received thereafter, the mode is switched to the original production mode. By the way, as described above, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state stored on the main control board 110 side is displayed by the remaining time saving image GJ. However, the command that specifies the remaining number of times M of the time-saving gaming state stored on the main control board 110 side is not transmitted during the time-saving gaming state after the power outage is restored. Therefore, when a power outage occurs in the time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of times M cannot be displayed on the time-saving remaining image GJ during the time-saving gaming state after the power outage is restored. In this embodiment, during the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) after the power outage is restored, the time-saving remaining image GJ in which the number part is omitted is displayed.

FIGS. 22(a) to 22(d) are diagrams for explaining other specific examples of the production mode at each point in time in the period before and after the power cutoff occurs. FIGS. 22(a) to 22(d) show the performance mode at each point in time as well as the gaming state at that point in time.

FIG. 22(a) is a specific example of a case where the power is cut off at the start of the second time-saving game state. FIG. 22(a) assumes that the second time-saving gaming state is started during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the above case, the production mode immediately before the second time saving game state is started becomes the immediately preceding mode. In addition, FIG. 22(a) assumes that at time ta when the last game in the non-time saving game state (800th game from the jackpot game) ends, the number of pending items is 0 and the state shifts to the customer waiting state. do. The above customer waiting state is the second time-saving game state, and as explained using the above-mentioned FIG. 19(a), the right-handed game image GS1 is displayed.

FIG. 22(a) assumes that the power is cut off at time tb during the customer waiting state immediately after the second time-saving gaming state is started. Furthermore, it is assumed that the power is restored from the power outage at a subsequent time point tc. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time starting from time tc. Further, when the recovery screen is displayed, each effect execution means including the image display device 31 is then controlled to the time saving mode B. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the time saving mode B is controlled upon receiving the power interruption recovery command.

Specifically, in the customer waiting state immediately after recovery from power outage, the above-mentioned time saving screen M7 (see FIG. 17(a)) is displayed. The above time-saving medium screen M7 originally displays the start notification image Gn (see FIG. 16(b)), displays the shielding image GF (see FIG. 16(c)), and executes the rush effect (see FIG. 16(b)). d)), the mode selection effect is executed (see Fig. 16(e)), and the right-hitting image GS3 is displayed (see Fig. 16(f)) (hereinafter simply referred to as the period in which the entry effect etc. is executed). ” is displayed after completion of the process.

In the specific example of FIG. 22(a), it is assumed that the first game in the second time-saving game state is started at time d. In the above case, the period during which the rush effect etc. are executed starts from time td, and then the time saving screen M7 is displayed. Note that if the power supply does not turn off, the background image GHx (background image GH in the previous mode) is displayed when the start notification image Gn is displayed (see FIG. 16(b) described above). On the other hand, in the specific example of FIG. 22(a) in which a power outage occurs, a background image GHz (background image GH in the previous mode) is displayed when the start notification image Gn is displayed.

FIG. 22(b) is another specific example when the power is cut off at the start of the second time-saving game state. In FIG. 22(b), as in FIG. 22(a) above, the number of pending items is 0 at the time ta when the last game in the non-time-saving gaming state (the 800th game from the jackpot game) ends, Assume that the state shifts to a customer waiting state. Further, FIG. 22(b) assumes a case where a power outage occurs at time tb during the customer waiting state immediately after the second time-saving gaming state is started, and the power is restored from the power outage at a subsequent time tc.

While FIG. 22(a) above shows a specific example in which the second time-saving gaming state is started in the period in which the table scenario S is set, FIG. A specific example of how a gaming state is started will be shown. In the above specific example of FIG. 22(b), the production mode immediately before the second time saving game state is started is the normal mode. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 22(b), the time saving screen M7 of the time saving mode B is displayed in the period after the time tc when the power is restored from the power outage (same as the specific example of FIG. 22(a)).

In the specific example of FIG. 22(b), it is assumed that the first game in the second time-saving game state is started at time td. As described above, if a power failure does not occur, when the second time-saving game state is started in the scenario-unset period, a rush performance, etc. in which the mode selection performance is omitted is executed (see FIG. 18(b)). . However, if a power outage occurs during the customer waiting state from the start of the second time-saving gaming state to the start of the first game during the period when the scenario has not been set, the power will be interrupted when the second time-saving gaming state starts. All performances are omitted (cancelled).

FIG. 22(c) is another specific example when the power is cut off at the start of the second time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 22(c), it is assumed that a power outage occurs during the first game in the second time-saving game state. In the following, both the case where the table scenario Sb2 is set and the case where the scenario is not set are explained using FIG. 22(c).

The specific example in FIG. 22(c) assumes that the first game in the second time-saving game state is started at time ta, and then a power outage occurs at time tb before the game ends. As described above, in the first game of the second time-saving game state, when the table scenario Sb2 is set, a rush effect etc. are executed. In addition, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, if the scenario is not set, a part of the rush effect etc. is executed.

As shown in FIG. 22(c), a recovery screen is displayed in a period after the time tc when the power is recovered from the power outage. That is, the rush performance etc. that were being executed at the time tb when the power was cut off are canceled. FIG. 22(c) assumes a case where the first game in the second time-saving game state ends at time td after the power outage is restored. In the above case, the recovery screen is not displayed at time td, and each effect execution means (image display device 31, etc.) is controlled to time saving mode B. Specifically, the recovery screen is switched to the time saving screen M7.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs in the second time-saving game state (including the first game), the subsequent second time-saving game state is controlled from time-saving mode B1 to time-saving mode B1 of time-saving mode B3. . That is, regardless of the time-saving mode B selected on the screen M5, the time-saving mode B1 is set after the power is restored. Furthermore, even if the power is cut off after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state and before the time-saving mode B is selected in the mode selection performance, the time-saving mode B1 is set after the power is restored. However, if a power outage occurs in the customer waiting state before the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state (for example, in the case of FIG. 22(a) described above), the time-saving mode selected in the subsequent mode selection performance Move to B. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which a canceled entry performance or the like can be performed during a period after time td.

FIG. 22(d) is another specific example in the case where the power is cut off at the start of the second time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that a power outage occurs in the game immediately before the gap game. That is, assume that a power outage occurs in the final game of the 799th first time-saving game state. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), the 799th game in the first time-saving game state is started at time ta, and then the power is cut off at time tb before the game ends. Assume that Further, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the power is restored at time tc after the power is cut off, and then the game that was being executed at the time of the power cut ends at time td. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed during the period from time tc to time td.

As shown in FIG. 22(d), at the end time td of the final game in the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends and shifts to the non-time-saving game state. As described above, if the power supply does not cut off, the production mode of the gap game becomes the time saving mode B. That is, the production mode in a series of periods of the last game in the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the first game in the second time-saving game state is time-saving mode B. On the other hand, if a power outage occurs in the final game of the first time-saving game state, after the end of the game, the production mode becomes the normal mode until the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the number of pending games is 0 at the end time td of the final game in the first time-saving game state where the power is cut off. In the above case, the machine enters a customer waiting state from time td. In the above customer waiting state, the presentation mode becomes the normal mode. Further, the customer waiting state is a non-time-saving gaming state, and the second special symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner in principle. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the variable display of the first special symbol starts at time te. That is, it is assumed that a gap game in which the first special figure is displayed in a variable manner is started from time te. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the gap game ends at time tf. In the above case, the second time saving game state is started from time tf.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs in the final game of the first time-saving game state, the production mode becomes the normal mode until the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner after the end of the game. Therefore, at the time tf when the second time-saving game state is started, the performance mode is, in principle, the normal mode. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the variable display of the second special symbol starts at time tg. In the above case, a transition is made to time point mode B from time point tg. In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed variably in the game following the gap game, the performance mode of the game is the normal mode. Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during a gap game, the right-handed game image GS will not be displayed on the recovery screen. Thereafter, when the gap game ends, even if the state shifts to a customer waiting state or if the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the time saving mode B is controlled.

FIG. 23(a) is a diagram for explaining the state of the image (game count image GE) and the lamp (presentation lamp 33) when the power is cut off. FIG. 23(a) shows the numbers displayed by the number-of-games image GE at each time point before and after the power is turned off. Further, FIG. 23(a) shows the state of the performance lamp 33 at each point in time. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, among the modes (light emitting modes) of the performance lamp 33, the mode in normal games may be referred to as the "normal mode." The normal mode is variable depending on the gaming state and the performance executed in each game.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that a power outage occurs at a time ta when the number of games image GE displays the number "X", and the power outage is restored at a subsequent time tb. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed from time tb, and is hidden from time tc. As shown in FIG. 23(a), in this embodiment, the production lamp 33 is displayed in a recovery mode during the period in which the recovery screen is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the number "X" is less than 799 and the gaming state at time ta is a low probability non-time saving gaming state. Note that the time tc in FIG. 23(a) is assumed to be the time when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time tb when the time ta is in the customer waiting state, and when the time ta is in the variable period of the special ticket. , is assumed to be at the end of the relevant variable period.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that at time tc when the display period of the recovery screen ends, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is greater than the numerical value "0". Specifically, assume that the gaming state after time tc is a non-time-saving gaming state. If the remaining number of times N is larger than the numerical value "0" at time tc, it is assumed that the clearing operation is executed after the power is cut off and before the power is restored, and the remaining number of times N is initialized to the initial value "800". be done. Another case where the remaining number of times N is larger than the numerical value "0" at time tc is assumed to be a case where the remaining number of times N, which is larger than the numerical value "1", is left unchanged before and after the power is turned off. As described above, the game count image GE displays the number "0" when the power is restored, regardless of whether the remaining number of times N is left unchanged before or after the power is cut off.

In this embodiment, the second time-saving game state is started when the remaining number of times N is subtracted from the numerical value "1" to the numerical value "0". Further, in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the remaining number of times N does not change from the numerical value "0" until a clear operation is executed or a jackpot game is won. In the above configuration, in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the second time saving game state is not restarted until a clear operation is executed or a jackpot game is won. Specifically, it is assumed that 1000 games are executed in the second time-saving gaming state and the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state. In the non-time-saving game state after the second time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state is not restarted even if 800 games are executed.

Suppose that during the period in which the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "0", during the period of the low probability non-time-saving gaming state after the second time-saving gaming state has ended (hereinafter referred to as the "activated period"), the number of the number of games image GE is Let us assume a comparative example in which the value is added for each game starting from "0". In addition, in the comparison example above, if the power is turned OFF/ON during the activation period, the number of games image GE will display the number "0" after the power is restored, and after that, the number of the number of games image GE will be added for each game. shall be displayed. In the above comparison example, the game count image GE may be added up to the number "800" in the activated period even though the second time-saving game state is not started. Therefore, depending on the player, there may be an inconvenience in which the player's desire to play the game decreases. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment employs a configuration that can notify whether or not it is the activated period. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 23(b) is a simulated diagram of the screen Mh displayed when the power is turned OFF/ON during the activation period. On the screen Mh, each image (effect pattern GA, etc.) similar to the screen in the normal mode (see FIG. 14(a) described above) before the second time-saving game state is started (not activated) is displayed. However, during the period when the second time-saving gaming state is not activated, the number of games image GE displays a number indicating the number of games played since the power was turned on or the number of games played since the jackpot game, but the number of games image GE on the screen Mh displays the number. is not displayed. Specifically, when the power is turned OFF/ON during the activation period, the game count image GE displays a symbol "???" instead of a number, as shown in FIG. 23(b).

FIG. 23(c) is a simulated diagram of the number of games image GE in the activated period after the second time-saving gaming state ends. The number of games image GE shown in FIG. 23(c) is obtained by omitting the numbers from the number of games image GE displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state other than the activated period. According to the above configuration, the player is substantially notified whether or not it is the activated period.

FIG. 23(d) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the mode of the number-of-games image GE and the presentation lamp 33 when a power outage occurs. Similar to FIG. 23(a) described above, FIG. 23(d) shows the number displayed by the number-of-games image GE at each point in time and the mode of the performance lamp 33. In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state is started at time ta, and the last (1000th) game of the second time-saving gaming state is finished at the subsequent time tb. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving gaming state after time tb becomes the activated period. In the above case, the number-of-games image GE (see FIG. 23(c) described above) without displaying numbers is displayed in the activated period after time tb.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), it is assumed that the power is turned off at time tc after time tb in the activated period, and the power is turned on at a subsequent time td, as shown in FIG. 23(d). When the power is turned on, a recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, during the period in which the recovery screen is displayed, the performance lamp 33 is displayed in a recovery mode. In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), the recovery screen is displayed until time te, and then the above-mentioned screen Mh is displayed. As shown in FIG. 23(d), in the activated period after the time te when the screen Mh is displayed, the number of games image GE displays a symbol "???" instead of a number. Furthermore, during the period in which the symbol "???" is displayed on the number of games image GE, the performance lamp 33 is displayed in a warning mode. In the activated period in which the symbol "???" is displayed on the number of games image GE, normal games can be played. However, even during the period when various performances are performed in the game, the performance lamp 33 continues to be displayed in a warning mode instead of in a mode corresponding to the performance (normal mode).

In this embodiment, when the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving gaming state is initialized to the numerical value "800", the display of the symbol "???" in the number of games image GE ends, and the display of the symbol "???" in the number of games image GE ends. Addition display of numbers is executed. Further, the effect lamp 33 is switched from the warning mode to the normal mode at the time when the remaining number of times N until the second time saving game state is initialized to the numerical value "800". For example, when the performance lamp 33 is in the warning mode, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can switch the performance lamp 33 to the normal mode by executing a clear operation.

As described above, this embodiment is an example of a configuration in which "when the power is turned on, if the number of determinations specified from the information reaches a specific number, the notification means can be controlled in a special manner" , the remaining number of times N reaches the numerical value "0" (the number of jackpot drawings reaches 800), and when the power is restored, the gaming state notified from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 120 by the power outage recovery command is In the case of a low-probability non-time-saving game state, a configuration is adopted in which the notification means (effect lamp 33, image display device 31) can be controlled in a special mode (warning mode, display of the symbol "???").

FIG. 24(a) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state immediately after the time-saving gaming state ends. As mentioned above, the performance mode immediately after the non-time saving gaming state is started becomes the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 24(a), in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends, each image (effect pattern GAx, etc.) displayed in the normal mode is displayed. Further, in the non-time saving game state immediately after the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state) ends, in addition to the above images, a left-handed game image GL is displayed.

The left-handed player image GL is an image for informing that the game should be played left-handed. As described above, in the time-saving gaming state, playing the game with the right hand is more advantageous than playing the game with the left hand, and the right hand game GS (the right hand lamp 28) indicates that the game should be played with the right hand. On the other hand, in a non-time-saving gaming state, it is more advantageous to play with the left hand than with the right hand. Therefore, when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, it is preferable to have a configuration in which it is notified that the game should be played left-handed (that the player should switch from right-handed to left-handed). In consideration of the above circumstances, the left-handed game image GL is displayed immediately after the time-saving game state ends.

FIG. 24(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period in which the left-handed image GL is displayed. The left-handed game image GL is usually displayed for a predetermined period of time after transitioning to the non-time-saving gaming state. Hereinafter, the period from the transition to the non-time-saving gaming state until the time elapses will be referred to as "period Th." FIG. 24(b) shows the above period Th.

FIG. 24(b) shows the screen displayed at each time point (production mode) and whether or not the left-handed image GL is displayed. The specific example in FIG. 24(b) assumes that the second time-saving game state ends during the scenario setting period. FIG. 24(b) shows the period of the final game in the second time-saving game state. In the final game of the second time-saving game state, the same performance as in other games (performance to notify whether the jackpot has been won) is performed, and then the above-mentioned end performance (see FIG. 45(b)) is performed. There are cases. In the specific example of FIG. 24(b), the left-handed hitting image GL is displayed over the period Th.

FIG. 24(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period in which the left-handed image GL is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 24(c), it is assumed that a power outage occurs during the final game in the second time-saving game state. Specifically, assume that the final game of the second time-saving game state starts at time ts, then a power outage occurs at time ta (a time point before the end performance), and the power outage is restored at time tb. . Further, assume that the final game in the second time-saving game state is restarted from time tb and ended at time te.

In the above specific example of FIG. 24(c), the above-mentioned recovery screen (see FIG. 21(a)) is displayed from time tb to time te. Furthermore, the left-handed game image GL is displayed over a period Th starting from the time tb when the final game ends. However, as can be understood from FIG. 24(c), if a power outage occurs in the final game of the second time-saving game state, the end performance that is supposed to be executed thereafter is omitted. Furthermore, in the case where a power outage occurs in the final game of the first time-saving game state, similarly, the end performance that is supposed to be executed in the final game is omitted.

FIG. 24(d) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period in which the left-handed image GL is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 24(d), it is assumed that the power supply is cut off during the period Th. Specifically, a case is assumed in which a power outage occurs at a time ta in a period Th, and the power outage is restored at a subsequent time tb. In the above case, the display of the left-handed hit image GL is stopped. Specifically, even if the power outage is restored before the period Th has elapsed, the left-handed hit image GL will not be displayed on the recovery screen and the normal mode screen that will be displayed thereafter.

FIGS. 25(a-1) and 25(a-2) are diagrams for explaining other specific examples of the customer waiting screen Mx. In the above-mentioned FIG. 19(a), the customer waiting screen Mx displayed in the customer waiting state at the start of the second time-saving game state was explained. FIG. 25(a-1) and FIG. 25(a-2) are specific examples of the customer waiting screen Mx(1, 2) displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state.

FIG. 25(a-1) is a mock diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx1. On the customer waiting screen Mx1, similar to the customer waiting screen Mx described above in FIG. Further, in the customer waiting image Mx1, in addition to the above images, a loading notification image GK is displayed. The installed notification image GK is an image for notifying that the second time-saving game state is provided. For example, the loading notification image GK displays a message "Second Time Saving Loading".

FIG. 25(a-1) is a mock diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx2. On the customer waiting screen Mx2, various images displayed in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode are displayed, similar to the customer waiting screen Mx and the customer waiting screen Mx1 described above with reference to FIG. 19(a). However, on the customer waiting screen Mx2, the effect image GA is hidden and a demo movie is displayed instead of the background image GHx. The demo movie includes, for example, a movie displayed with a reach effect. Further, on the customer waiting screen Mx2, in addition to the above-mentioned images, a loading notification image GK is displayed (same as the customer waiting screen Mx1).

In this embodiment, in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2 are displayed alternately. Specifically, when the customer waiting screen Mx1 is displayed for a predetermined time, the customer waiting screen Mx1 switches to the customer waiting screen Mx2. Thereafter, when the customer waiting screen Mx2 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the customer waiting screen Mx2 switches to the customer waiting screen Mx1. In the above configuration, in the customer waiting state (non-gaming period), it is notified that the gaming machine 1 can shift to the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, there is an advantage that the player can confirm whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state before playing the game. Note that the installation notification image GK may be displayed on one of the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2, and hidden on the other.

However, for example, in order to determine whether a clear operation is necessary or not, the administrator of gaming machine 1 may check whether or not it is possible to transition to the second time-saving gaming state when the power of gaming machine 1 is shut off. You may want to check the status. However, the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2 are not displayed when the gaming machine 1 is powered off. Therefore, in a state where the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, it cannot be confirmed whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state depending on the installed notification image GK.

In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration that includes a display member that displays (describes) a message that indicates that the second time-saving gaming state is provided. According to the configuration including the above-mentioned display member, it is possible to grasp whether or not the gaming machine 1 can shift to the second time-saving gaming state even if the power is cut off. Hereinafter, a modification example in which a display member is employed will be described using FIG. 25(b-1) and FIG. 25(b-2).

FIG. 25(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a modification in which a display member is employed. FIG. 25(b-1) shows an excerpt of the area corresponding to the area Rx in the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes members including an outer frame 2, an inner frame 3, a glass frame 4, etc. (hereinafter referred to as the "frame member"), a game board 10, a main control board 110, a performance control board 120, etc. that can be attached to and detached from the frame member. It consists of members including (hereinafter referred to as "board members"). In the modification shown in FIG. 25(b-1), it is assumed that a frame member is used as a display member. Specifically, a message ``Second Time Saving Equipped'' is displayed (written) near the right side effect lamp 33 of the two effect lamps 33 provided.

FIG. 25(b-2) is a diagram for explaining another modification example in which a display member is employed. FIG. 25(b-2) shows an excerpt of the area corresponding to the area Ry shown in FIG. 1 of the gaming machine 1 in the modified example. In the modification shown in FIG. 25(b-2), it is assumed that a board member is used as a display member. Specifically, a message "Second time saving installation" is displayed below the big prize opening 16 in the gaming area. According to each of the above modifications, it is possible to grasp from the display member whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state during a period in which the gaming machine 1 is not powered on. However, the area in which the message indicating that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is possible can be changed as appropriate.

By the way, there is a situation in which the message indicating that the second time-saving gaming state is installed is more easily visible even from a distant location as it is located closer to the upper end of the gaming machine 1. In the modification of FIG. 25(b-1) described above, the message is displayed on the upper end side from the center of the frame member (gaming machine 1). Therefore, there is an advantage that the message is easily visible even from a distance.

Further, there is a situation in which a player who is playing a game tends to pay attention to the starting opening (13, 14) among the board members. The starting ports (13, 14) are located below the center of the board member. That is, there is a situation in which the player tends to pay attention to the lower side of the board member than the center. In the modification of FIG. 25(b-2) described above, a message indicating that the second time-saving game state is installed is displayed below the center of the board member. Therefore, compared to, for example, a configuration in which the message is displayed above the center of the board member, the modified example of FIG. 25(b-2) has the advantage that it is easier to draw the player's attention to the message.

<Pre-determination table for special symbols>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a preliminary determination table for determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance. When a game ball wins into the first starting winning hole 13 or the second starting winning hole 14 (at the time of starting winning), winning information is generated by the preliminary determination table.

The above winning information is generated in order to pre-determine the result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the winning information includes the type of special symbol display device (the type of starting hole detection switch that detects that the game ball has entered the starting hole), the type of special symbol, the gaming state, the random number value for reach determination, and Generated based on the random value for special symbol variation. Further, a start winning designation command that specifies the generated winning information is generated and transmitted to the production control board 120. By using the start winning designation command indicating the above winning information, the result of preliminary determination (loss, jackpot, small hit), the type of special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern (whether or not a reach occurs) can be determined before the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. The winning information (starting winning designation command) of this embodiment is referred to, for example, when determining a so-called look-ahead effect (pending change effect).

In the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 26, winning information regarding the first special symbol display device 20 includes winning information a (1, 2), winning information b (1 to 4), winning information c (1 to 4), and winning information for the first special symbol display device 20. Winning information including information d1 and winning information e1 is set. Also, as winning information regarding the second special symbol display device 21, winning information a (3, 4), winning information b (5 to 8), winning information c (5 to 8), and winning information d (1, 2). , winning information e(1, 2), winning information f, and winning information g are set.

For example, when winning information a1 or winning information a3 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect for about 40000 ms. In the above performance, a long hit will occur after the normal reach performance is executed.

When winning information b1 or winning information b5 is selected at the time of starting winning, the effect is executed for about 60000 ms by the effect control board 120 in the game started by the starting winning. In the above performance, after the normal reach performance is executed, SP reach 1 is executed, resulting in a long hit.

When the winning information b2 or the winning information b6 is selected at the time of starting winning, the effect is executed for about 60000 ms by the effect control board 120 in the game started by the starting winning. In the above performance, after the normal reach performance is executed, SP reach 2 is executed, resulting in a long hit.

When winning information c1 or winning information c5 is selected at the time of starting winning, the effect is executed for about 70000 ms by the effect control board 120 in the game started by the starting winning. In the above performance, after the normal reach performance is executed, SPSP reach performance 1 is executed via or directly through the SP reach performance, resulting in a long hit.

When the winning information c2 or the winning information c6 is selected at the time of starting winning, the effect is executed for about 70000 ms by the effect control board 120 in the game started by the starting winning. In the above performance, after the normal reach performance is executed, SPSP reach performance 2 is executed via or directly through the SP reach performance to correspond to the long hit performance.

When winning information d1 or winning information d2 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes a small win or short winning effect of about 20000 ms.

Among each winning information, winning information e1, winning information a2, winning information b3, winning information b4, winning information c3, winning information c4, winning information e2, winning information a4, winning information b7, winning information b8, winning information c7, The winning information c8 and the winning information f are determined when the jackpot lottery based on the starting winning that determined the winning information loses.

As shown in FIG. 26, in this embodiment, winning information is not set when a game ball wins in the first starting opening 13 in the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state). Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol (a combination of the random value for special symbol determination and the random value for symbol), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 20 is used. First, winning information is not set when a game ball wins in the first starting port 13. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 13, a starting winning designation command is not generated.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained.
<Main processing of main control board>
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating main processing by the main control board 110. When power is supplied by the power supply board 170, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 111, and the main CPU 111 performs the following main processing.

When starting the main processing, the main CPU 111 executes initialization processing (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 111 executes a startup program and initializes a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 113. For example, in the initialization process, the stack pointer is appropriately set. Note that in the initialization process, each piece of information for displaying the above-mentioned base value (such as the number of normal outs) is not initialized. Further, in the initialization process, the remaining number M of the gaming state (high certainty flag, time saving flag) and time saving gaming state is not initialized. Further, the remaining number of times N until the time-saving gaming state is reached is not initialized in the initialization process.

After executing the initialization process, the main CPU 111 determines whether the clear button 30 is operated (S20). If it is determined that the clear button 30 has not been operated (S20: No), the main CPU 111 advances the process to a game random value update process (S60). On the other hand, if it is determined that the clear button 30 has been operated (S20: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether the setting key device 115 has been rotated to a specific position (S30). That is, the main CPU 111 determines whether the setting change switch 115a is in the ON state. When determining that the setting key device 115 has been rotated (S30: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a setting change process (S40).

In the above configuration, if both the setting key device 115 and the clear button 30 are operated when the power is turned on, the setting change process is executed. That is, the above-mentioned setting change mode is started. In the setting change process, an operation for changing the setting value (operation of the clear button 30) is accepted. Furthermore, when the setting change switch 115a changes to the OFF state, the setting value displayed on the base display 114 is stored in the main RAM 113, and the setting change process ends.

In the setting change process of this embodiment, various types of information in the main RAM 113 are initialized. For example, in the setting change process, the gaming state is initialized to a low probability non-time saving gaming state. Specifically, a high probability flag and a time saving flag are stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 113. The high probability flag is set to the ON state in the high probability gaming state, and is set to the OFF state in the low probability gaming state. Further, the time-saving flag is set to the ON state in the time-saving gaming state, and is set to the OFF state in the non-time-saving gaming state. In the setting change process, the high accuracy flag and time saving flag are initialized to the OFF state.

In addition, in the setting change process, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state is initialized to a numerical value "0", and the remaining number N until the second time-saving gaming state is set to an initial value "800". In the above configuration, it can also be said that the remaining number of games until the second time-saving game state is activated is initialized in the setting change process. After finishing the setting change process, the main CPU 111 advances the process to the game random value update process.

In step S30 described above, if it is determined that the setting key device 115 has not been rotated (S30: No), the main CPU 111 executes a clear operation process. In the clear operation processing, the high accuracy flag and the time saving flag are initialized to the OFF state, similar to the setting change processing described above. Furthermore, in the clear operation process, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state is initialized to a numerical value of "0", and the remaining number of times N is initialized to a numerical value of "800". Note that in the setting change process and the clear operation process, each piece of information for displaying the above-mentioned base value is not initialized. Each piece of information for displaying the base value is not initialized unless an error requiring a cold start (for example, a backup error) occurs.

In the above configuration, the area of the main RAM 113 to be initialized may be the same or different between the setting change process and the clear operation process. Further, a setting confirmation mode may be provided in which the setting value cannot be changed but the current setting value is displayed on the base display 114. For example, if the setting key device 115 is rotated to a specific position after proceeding to step S60, the configuration may be such that the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

When the clear operation process is executed, the main CPU 111 executes a game random value update process (S60). In the above gaming random number updating process, the random number for special symbol variation and the random number for reach determination are updated. The above gaming random number update process is repeatedly executed until a predetermined interruption occurs.

<Timer interrupt processing of main control board>
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing by the main control board 110. The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 110 generates clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 ms), thereby executing the timer interrupt processing described below.

When the above timer interrupt processing is executed, in step S101, the main CPU 111 saves the information stored in the register to the stack area. After executing step S101, the main CPU 111 executes time control processing (S102). In the above time control processing, the main CPU 111 updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of special electric accessories, and updates the normal symbol time counter that defines the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 22. It updates various timer counters, such as updating and updating the normal power open time counter that defines the open time of the second starting port 14. Specifically, the main CPU 111 subtracts 1 from the special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, and normal power open time counter.

After executing the time control process, the main CPU 111 executes a random number update process (S103). In the random number update process, the main CPU 111 updates the random numbers for special symbol determination, jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, and hit determination random number. Specifically, a value "1" is added to each random number counter indicating each random number value.

After executing the random number update process, the main CPU 111 executes an initial random number counter update process (step S104). In this embodiment, when the random number value is added up to the maximum value, the random number value is set to the value of the initial random number counter. In the initial random value counter update process, the main CPU 111 is configured to use an initial random value counter for special symbol determination that indicates the initial random value for special symbol determination, an initial random value counter for the jackpot symbol that indicates the initial random value for the jackpot symbol, and an initial random value counter for the small win symbol. A numerical value "1" is added to each initial random value counter for small winning symbols indicating an initial random value.

After executing the initial random value counter update process, the main CPU 111 executes an input control process (S105). In the input control process, the main CPU 111 controls the first starting opening detection switch 13a, the second starting opening detection switch 14a, the gate detection switch 15a, the big winning opening detection switch (16a, 17a), the general winning opening detection switch 18a, and the out ball. It is determined whether there is an input to each switch of the detection switch 19a.

After executing the input control process, the main CPU 111 executes a special figure special electric control process (S106) for controlling the special symbol display device (20, 21) and the special electric accessory (opening/closing door 16b, movable piece 17b). Execute. Further, after executing the special figure/special electric line control process, the main CPU 111 executes the general figure/general electric line control process (S107). In the ordinary figure general electricity control process, the ordinary symbol display device 22 and the ordinary electric accessory (opening/closing door 14b) are controlled.

After executing the general figure and general electricity control process, the main CPU 111 executes the payout control process (S108). In the payout control process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a game ball has won in the big winning hole 16, the first starting hole 13, the second starting hole 14, or the general winning hole 18. Further, in the payout control process, when it is determined that a game ball has won in the winning hole, the main CPU 111 transmits a payout number designation command corresponding to the winning hole to the payout control board 130.

Specifically, the general winning hole prize ball counter, the big winning hole prize ball counter, and the starting hole prize ball counter are checked, and a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning hole is transmitted to the payout control board 130. Thereafter, predetermined data is subtracted from the prize ball counter corresponding to the transmitted payout number designation command and updated.

After executing the payout control process, the main CPU 111 executes a data creation process (S109). In the data creation process, external information data (information indicating that a jackpot is in progress, etc.) transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1, starting opening/closing solenoid data that defines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 14b (second starting opening 14), opening/closing door opening/closing solenoid data, etc. 16b and the movable piece 17b (big winning hole) opening/closing solenoid data that defines the opening/closing pattern of the special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, special symbol display device data that defines the display pattern of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, Normal symbol display device data that defines the display pattern of the normal symbol display device 22 is created.

After executing the data creation process, the main CPU 111 executes an output control process (S110). In the output control process, the main CPU 111 outputs various data (starting port opening/closing solenoid data, etc.) created in step S109 described above via the port. Further, the main CPU 111 executes a command transmission process to transmit the command set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 113. For example, the above-mentioned starting prize designation command is stored in the above performance transmission data storage area.

After executing the output control process, the main CPU 111 executes a counting process (S111). In the above counting process, the number of prize balls and the number of outs are counted in order to calculate the base value B of the low probability non-time saving gaming state. Specifically, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 18 (when a game ball is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 18a), the main CPU 111 controls the base calculation prize ball counter. The numerical value "10" (the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole 18) is added to (the normal number of prize balls) in the counting process.

Similarly, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 13, the numerical value is "3", and when a game ball wins in the second starting hole 14, the numerical value is "3", and when the game ball wins in the first big winning hole 16, the numerical value is "3". When the game ball wins, the numerical value "15" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation, and when the game ball wins the second big prize opening 17, the numerical value "15" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. On the other hand, the prize ball counter for base calculation is not incremented except in the low probability non-time saving game state.

When a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, the main CPU 111 adds the numerical value "1" to the out counter for base calculation (usually the number of outs) in the counting process in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. On the other hand, the base calculation out counter is not incremented except in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. Further, when a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, the numerical value "1" is added to the total out counter in the counting process regardless of the gaming state.

After executing the counting process, the main CPU 111 executes a base display process (S112). In the base display process, a base value is calculated from the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal outs counted in the above-mentioned counting process, and is displayed on the base display 114. After executing the base display process, the main CPU 111 restores the information saved in step S101 described above to the register of the main CPU 111 (S113).

<Input control processing>
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating the input control process (S105 in FIG. 12 described above) by the main control board 110. When the input control process is started, the main CPU 111 executes the general winning opening detection switch input process (S121). In the general winning opening detection switch input process described above, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 18a. That is, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 18 or not. When the main CPU 111 receives a detection signal from the general winning hole detection switch 18a, it adds predetermined data to the general winning hole prize ball counter and updates it.

After executing the general winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the large winning opening detection switch input process (S122). In the big winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal from the big winning opening detection switch (16a, 17a) is input. That is, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the big winning hole (16, 17). When the main CPU 111 receives a detection signal from the big winning hole detection switch, it adds predetermined data to the big winning hole prize ball counter.

After executing the big winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the first starting opening detection switch input process (S123). In the first starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 13a has been input. That is, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 13 or not. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 13 in the first starting port detection switch input process described above, predetermined data for determining a jackpot is set.

After executing the first starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the second starting port detection switch input process. In the second starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 14a has been input. That is, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 14 or not. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 14 in the second starting port detection switch input process described above, a jackpot determination is made in the same way as when the game ball has entered the first starting port 13. Predetermined data to perform the process is set.

After executing the second starting gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the gate detection switch input process. In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 15a has been input. That is, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 15 or not. When it is determined in the above gate detection switch input process that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 15, predetermined data for performing the normal symbol lottery is set.

<First starting port detection switch input process>
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating the first starting port detection switch input process (S123 in FIG. 29 described above) by the main control board 110. When the first starting port detection switch input process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal is input from the first starting port detection switch 13a (S131). If it is determined that the detection signal is not input from the first starting port detection switch 13a (S131: No), the main CPU 111 ends the first starting port detection switch input process.

If it is determined that the detection signal has been input from the first starting hole detection switch 13a (S131: Yes), the main CPU 111 updates the starting hole prize ball counter (S132). Specifically, the main CPU 111 adds the number of prize balls (for example, a numerical value "3") corresponding to the first starting hole 13 to the starting hole prize ball counter.

After updating the starting hole prize ball counter, the main CPU 111 determines whether the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than four (S133). If the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not less than 4 (S133: No), that is, if the number of reservations is 4 (U1 = 4), the main CPU 111 The mouth detection switch input process ends.

When the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than four (S133: Yes), the main CPU 111 acquires various random numbers. Specifically, the main CPU 111 acquires a random value for special symbol determination (S134), acquires a random value for a jackpot symbol (S135), acquires a random value for a small win symbol (S136), and obtains a random value for a game random symbol. Numerical values (random value for special symbol variation and random value for reach determination) are acquired (S137).

Each random number value obtained in steps S134 to S137 above is stored in the first special symbol storage area (first to fourth storage units). Specifically, the above first special symbol storage area includes a first storage section to a fourth storage section. The main CPU 111 searches for empty storage units in order from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and stores each obtained random number value in the corresponding empty storage unit. Further, after obtaining each random number value, the main CPU 111 adds the number "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area (S138).

After adding the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area, the main CPU 111 executes a preliminary determination process (S139). In the preliminary determination process, the main CPU 111 determines each of the random numbers obtained in steps S134 to S137 based on the preliminary determination table (see FIG. 26 described above) corresponding to the current gaming state.

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 14 in the second starting port detection switch input process described above, the same process as the first starting port detection switch input process is performed. However, in the above-mentioned first starting opening detection switch input process, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is added, whereas in the second starting opening detection switch input processing, the second special symbol retention number (U2) is added. Storage area is added. In addition, in the second starting port detection switch input process, each acquired random number value is stored in the second special symbol storage area. That is, the first starting port detection switch input process and the second starting port detection switch input process differ only in the storage area to be updated (special symbol reservation number storage area, special symbol storage area), and other processing is basically the same. . However, in the first starting opening detection switch input process, the starting winning designation command is not sent in the time-saving gaming state, and in the second starting opening detection switch input processing, the starting winning designation command is sent even in the time-saving gaming state. The two are also different.

<Pre-judgment processing>
FIG. 31 is a flowchart for explaining the preliminary determination process by the main control board 110. The preliminary determination process in FIG. 31 is executed in both the first starting port detection switch input process and the second starting port detection switch input process described above. That is, the above preliminary determination process is executed both when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 and when a game ball enters the second starting port 14.

In the preliminary determination process, the above winning information (see FIG. 26) is generated, and a start winning designation command specifying the winning information can be transmitted to the production control board 120. In response to the start winning designation command, a pre-read performance (for example, a pending change performance) becomes executable on the performance control board 120 side. However, as described above, winning information is not determined when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 in the time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the pre-read performance when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 is substantially prohibited in the time-saving gaming state.

Specifically, when the preliminary determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current preliminary determination process was executed when a game ball entered the first starting port 13. (S151). When determining that the preliminary determination process has been executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 (S151: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (S152 ). If it is determined that the game is in a time-saving gaming state (S152: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the preliminary determination process without generating winning information (by omitting S161, which will be described later). As described above, the prefetch effect is executed based on winning information. Therefore, according to the present embodiment described above, the pre-read performance when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 is substantially prohibited in the time-saving gaming state.

If it is determined that the game is not in a time-saving gaming state (S152: No), the main CPU 111 executes a tentative jackpot determination process (S153). In the tentative jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the random number value for special symbol determination written in the special symbol retention storage area in response to the current starting win to perform the jackpot determination process (described later) of the game started by the current starting win. In S207 of FIG. 33), it is tentatively determined whether the player wins the jackpot, wins the small hit, or loses.

If “No” is determined in the above-mentioned step S151, that is, if the preliminary determination process is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 14, the main CPU 111 skips the above-mentioned step S152. Then, the process after the tentative jackpot determination process (S153) is executed. In the above configuration, when a game ball enters the second starting port 14, winning information is generated regardless of whether it is a time-saving gaming state or a non-time-saving gaming state (S161 described later is executed). . That is, when a game ball enters the second start opening 14, the look-ahead effect can be executed regardless of whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state.

After executing the jackpot provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a jackpot has been provisionally determined in the jackpot provisional determination process (S154). When the main CPU 111 is tentatively determined to be a jackpot (step S154: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a jackpot symbol tentative determination process (S155). In the jackpot pattern provisional determination process, a jackpot pattern (stopped pattern data) to be stopped in the game started by the starting winning is provisionally judged using the random number value for the jackpot pattern acquired according to the starting winning. After executing the jackpot symbol provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 moves to the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process (S158).

On the other hand, if it is not tentatively determined that the player wins the jackpot in the tentative jackpot determination process (step S154: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is tentatively determined that the player wins the small hit (S156). When it is tentatively determined that the small hit is won (S156: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a small hit symbol tentative determination process (S157). In the small winning pattern temporary determination process, the small winning pattern (stopped pattern data) that is stopped in the game started by the starting winning is temporarily determined using the random value for the small winning pattern acquired in response to the current starting winning. It will be judged. After executing the small hit pattern temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 moves to the fluctuation pattern temporary determination process (S159). If it is determined "No" in the above step S156, that is, if it is tentatively determined as a loss in the jackpot provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 executes the fluctuation pattern without executing the symbol provisional determination process (S155, S157 described above). The process moves to provisional determination processing S158.

In the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process (S158), the main CPU 111 determines the game status, the result of the jackpot provisional determination process, the result of the jackpot pattern provisional determination process, the result of the small hit pattern provisional determination process, and the current starting winnings. A special symbol variation pattern is tentatively determined using the random number value for special symbol variation and the random number value for reach determination. Thereafter, the main CPU 111 generates winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern provisionally determined in the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process (S159). Further, a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information is set in the performance transmission data storage area (S160), and the preliminary determination process is ended.

By the above preliminary determination process, winning information can be transmitted to the performance control board 120 as a starting winning designation command when the game ball enters the first starting port 13 or the second starting port 14. Therefore, the sub CPU 121 of the performance control board 120 that has received the starting winning designation command analyzes the starting winning designation command, and pre-determines the predetermined pattern before the change of special symbols triggered by the current starting winning is started. It is possible to perform a performance (pre-reading performance).

However, this preliminary determination process is determined according to the gaming state at the time when the game ball enters each starting port 13, 14. Therefore, if the gaming state changes before processing the first reservation or second reservation reserved due to the ball entry, the result of the jackpot determination process described later and the result of the preliminary determination process may differ. There is.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating the special figure special electric control process (S106 in FIG. 12 described above) by the main control board 110. When the special figure special electric line control process is started, the main CPU 111 loads the current value of the special figure special electric line processing data (0 to 5) (S181), and refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special electric line processing data (S182).

For example, when the special symbol special electric processing data is "0", the main CPU 111 executes a special symbol storage determination process (step S183). As will be described in detail later, in the special symbol memory determination process, the number of reservations (U1, U2) is subtracted, the special symbols to be displayed on the special symbol display device and the variable time of the special symbol display device are set, and the special symbol display device's fluctuation time is set. Fluctuation display starts. When the variable display of the special symbol display device is started, "1" is set in the special symbol special electric processing data.

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "1", the main CPU 111 executes special symbol variation processing (S184). In the special symbol variation process, when the special symbol variation time set in the immediately preceding special symbol memory determination process has elapsed, the special symbol set in the special symbol memory determination process is displayed on the special symbol display device (20, 21). Stop and display. Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "2".

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "2", the main CPU 111 executes the special symbol stop processing (S185). In the special symbol stop process, the main CPU 111 stops and displays the special symbol displayed in the special symbol variation process for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Thereafter, if the stopped and displayed special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 111 sets "3" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and sets an opening command and opening time for the jackpot. Similarly, if the stopped and displayed special symbol is a small winning symbol, the main CPU 111 sets "4" to the special symbol special electric processing data and sets the opening command and opening time for the small winning. Furthermore, if the stopped and displayed special symbol is a losing symbol, the main CPU 111 sets "0" to the special symbol special electric processing data.

When the special figure special electric processing data is "3", that is, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot game processing (step S186). In the jackpot game process, after the opening of the jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "opening period") ends, the jackpot 16 is opened according to the jackpot opening/closing solenoid data (opening pattern of the jackpot 16). That is, the above-mentioned round starts after the opening period. The jackpot opening/closing solenoid data used in the jackpot game is selected according to the jackpot symbol.

After all rounds are completed, ending control (wait control) is executed for a predetermined period of time. Note that in this embodiment, the period during which the ending control is executed may be referred to as an "ending period." Further, the period from the end of the opening period to the start of the ending period may be referred to as a "round period" (a period including a plurality of rounds and intervals). When the ending period ends, "5" is set in the special figure special electric processing data.

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "4", that is, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding special symbol stop processing, the main CPU 111 executes the small winning game processing (step S187). In the small winning game process, small winning opening control is executed, and then the large winning opening 16 is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, "1.8 seconds") according to the small winning opening/closing solenoid data. Thereafter, ending control is executed for a predetermined period of time, and "0" is set in the special figure special electric processing data. After executing the small winning game process, the main CPU 111 advances the process to a transition determination process (S225). In the transition determination process, it is determined whether the start condition of the second time-saving game state is satisfied or not, and whether the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied or not.

When the special figure special electric processing data is "5", the main CPU 111 executes the special game end processing (S188). In the special game end processing, the main CPU 111 changes the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability time saving gaming state or a low probability time saving gaming state (the first 1 time-saving gaming state). Specifically, when transitioning to the first time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot, the first time-saving flag is changed to the ON state. Further, when shifting to the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot, the remaining number M of the first time-saving game state is set to an initial value "100" or "799" depending on the jackpot symbol. After setting the gaming state after the jackpot game, the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0". Furthermore, when the game shifts to a high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state), the high probability flag changes to the ON state.

<Special symbol memory judgment process>
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol storage determination process (S183 in FIG. 32 described above) by the main control board 110. When the special symbol storage determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S201). If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol time counter≠0) (S201: Yes), the special symbol memory determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner (S201: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is 1 or more (S202).

If the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is not 1 or more (S202: No), the main CPU 111 moves the process to step S204, and if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is "1" or more, If there is (S202: Yes), the process moves to step S203. In the above configuration, the second special symbol storage area is processed with priority over the first special symbol storage area. In step S203, the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area.

In step S204, the main CPU 111 determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is "1" or more. If the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not "1" or more (S204: No), the process moves to step S215, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is "1" or more (S204: Yes), the process moves to step S205.

In step S205, the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the value of the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area. After that, in step S206, the main CPU 111 selects the random value (random value for special symbol determination, A combination of random values for jackpot symbols, random values for small win symbols, random values for reach determination, and random values for special symbol variation) and the start winning designation command are shifted. Specifically, the predetermined random value and the start winning designation command stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area are stored in the previous storage unit. shift to.

For example, the random number value and the starting winning designation command stored in the first storage section are shifted to the determination storage area (the 0th storage section). In addition, the predetermined random number value and the start prize designation command stored in the first storage section are written in the judgment storage area (zero storage section), and are also written in the judgment storage area (zero storage section). The data is erased from the special symbol retention storage area. That is, the random number value and start prize designation command used in the previous game are erased. In addition, MODE of the start prize designation command is processed so as to correspond to the storage area after the shift.

After subtracting the number of reservations, the main CPU 111 executes a jackpot determination process (S207). In the jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 executes the data (random value for special symbol determination, random value for jackpot symbol, small hit A jackpot determination process is executed based on the symbol random number value).

When a jackpot is won in the above jackpot determination process, a jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined. Further, if a small hit is won, a special symbol for the small hit is determined, and in the case of a loss, a special symbol for the loss is determined.

After executing the jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process (S208). In the variation pattern determination process, a variation pattern determination table based on the current gaming state is used to determine the variation pattern. Specifically, a variation pattern is determined from a variation pattern determination table according to a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for jackpot symbol, a random number value for reach determination, and a random number value for special symbol variation.

After executing the variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 111 sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area (S209). Further, the main CPU 111 confirms the gaming state at the start of the variation, and sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area (S210).

After setting the gaming state designation command, the main CPU 111 starts variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (S211). Specifically, when the first hold (U1) is subtracted in the current special symbol memory determination process, variable display is started on the first special symbol display device 20, and the second hold is subtracted in the current special symbol memory determination process. When (U2) is subtracted, variable display is started on the second special symbol display device 21. After starting the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device, the main CPU 111 sets a variation time in the special symbol time counter according to the variation pattern determined in step S208 in the special symbol time counter (S212).

After setting the variable time, the main CPU 111 sets the customer waiting determination flag to "00H" (S213). That is, the customer waiting determination flag is cleared. The above customer waiting determination flag becomes "00H" during variable display of special symbols and during special games. On the other hand, in other cases (non-gaming period), the customer waiting determination flag becomes "01H". When the customer waiting determination flag is "01H", the performance control board 120 is notified by the customer waiting command that it is a non-gaming period. After clearing the customer waiting determination flag, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1" (S214), and ends the special symbol memory determination processing.

In step S204 described above, if it is determined that the first hold (U1) is "0", that is, if neither the first hold (U1) nor the second hold (U2) is stored, the main CPU 111 , it is determined whether the customer waiting determination flag is set to "01H" (S215).

When the customer waiting determination flag is set to 01H (S215: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the special symbol storage determination process. On the other hand, if "01H" is not set in the customer waiting determination flag (S215: No), the main CPU 111 moves the process to step S216. In step S216, the main CPU 111 sets the customer waiting determination flag to 01H so that the customer waiting command is not set many times in step S217, which will be described later. In step S217, the main CPU 111 sets a customer waiting command in the presentation transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

<Special symbol memory judgment process>
FIG. 34(a) is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol stop processing (S185 in FIG. 32 described above) by the main control board 110. The above-described special symbol stop processing is executed immediately after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped.

When the special symbol stop processing is started, the main CPU 111 sets a symbol confirmation command in the presentation transmission data storage area (S220). After setting the symbol confirmation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether the confirmation period has elapsed (S221). The above confirmation period is provided to enable the player to recognize that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the current game. The determination period is, for example, approximately 0.5 seconds. The variable display of special symbols in the next game is prohibited until the above confirmation period ends. Specifically, step S221 is repeatedly executed until the fixed period ends (S221: No), and when the fixed period ends (S221: Yes), it becomes possible to proceed to the subsequent step.

When the confirmation period ends, the main CPU 111 sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the performance transmission data storage area (S222). After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether the special symbol that stopped in the current game is a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol (hereinafter may be collectively referred to as a "win symbol"). S223). If the main CPU 111 determines that it is a winning symbol (S223: Yes), it executes a winning preparation process (S224) and ends the special symbol stop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a winning symbol (S223: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a transition determination process (S225) and ends the special symbol stop process.

FIG. 34(b) is a flowchart of the winning preparation process. When the winning preparation process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether the special symbol stopped in the current game is a jackpot symbol (S230). If it is determined that it is a jackpot symbol (S230: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special pattern special electric processing data to "3" (jackpot game processing) (S231). Further, the main CPU 111 executes jackpot initialization processing (S233). On the other hand, in step S230, if it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot (S230: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "4" (small winning game processing) (S232).

In the jackpot initialization process, various information is initialized. For example, in the jackpot initialization process, the high probability flag that is in the ON state in the high probability gaming state is changed to the OFF state, and the state shifts to the low probability gaming state. In addition, the time-saving flag that is ON in the time-saving gaming state is changed to the OFF state, and the remaining number of games M indicating the remaining number of games in the time-saving gaming state is initialized to the numerical value "0", and the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state. do.

In the jackpot initialization process, the remaining number N until the second time-saving gaming state is initialized. In addition, in this embodiment, the remaining number of times N is not initialized in principle except when the above-mentioned clear operation processing by operating the clear button or when a jackpot game is started. For example, when the remaining number of times N reaches the number of operations n (numerical value "0"), the second time-saving game state is entered, but the remaining number of times N is not initialized. In the above configuration, the number of times that the second time-saving game state can be shifted to is one in the period from the current jackpot game to the next jackpot game.

After executing the jackpot initialization process, the main CPU 111 executes a winning start preparation process (S234). In the winning start preparation process, for example, the opening pattern of the jackpot opening (16, 17) in the jackpot game is determined according to the special symbol (type of jackpot). In addition, an opening pattern for the big prize openings (16, 17) in the small winning game is set. After that, the main CPU 111 sends an opening designation command according to the type of win (first probability variable length, first probability variable short, first normal long, second probability variable length, small) to the performance transmission data storage area. (S235), sets an opening time according to the type of win (S236), and ends the win preparation process.

FIG. 35(a) is a flowchart of the migration determination process. When starting the transition determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times N is a numerical value "0" (S240). If it is determined that the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "0" (S240: Yes), that is, if the second time-saving game state is in progress or the activated period is in progress, the main CPU 111 executes the time-saving end determination process (S245). The transition determination process is then terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times N is not the numerical value "0" (S240: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the game is in a low probability gaming state (S241). In addition, in the above-mentioned step S240, in the game of the high probability time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, or the low probability non-time-saving gaming state other than the activated period, it is determined "No" in the above-mentioned step S240.

If it is determined that it is not a low probability gaming state (S241: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0" (S246), and ends the transition determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in a low probability gaming state (S241: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times N (S242). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number N subtracted in step S242 is a numerical value "0" (S243). If the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times N after the subtraction is not the numerical value "0" (S243: No), the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end determination process, sets the special figure special electric line processing data to "0", and performs the transition determination. Finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times N after the subtraction is the numerical value "0" (S243: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the second time saving transition process (S244) and then sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0". ” and ends the migration determination process. In the process at the time of transition to the second time saving game, a numerical value "1000" is set to the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state, the second time saving flag is set to the ON state, and the second time saving game state is started. In the second time saving transition process, a variation pattern determination table T is set according to the type of table scenario Sb that is set. However, during the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is set.

Note that the transition determination process can be changed as appropriate. FIG. 35(c) is a flowchart of the transition determination process in the modified example. In the modified example of FIG. 35(c), when the transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is in the low probability gaming state (S241 described above). When determining that it is not a low probability gaming state (S241: No), the main CPU 111 executes the above-mentioned time saving end determination process (S245) and ends the transition determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a low probability gaming state (S241: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times N (S242 described above), and the remaining number of times N after the subtraction is less than or equal to the numerical value "0". It is determined whether or not (S247). If the remaining number of times N after the subtraction is larger than the numerical value "0" (S247: No), the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end determination process and ends the transition determination process. It should be noted that the game for which "No" is determined in step S247 is assumed to be a game in the first time-saving game state or the low probability non-time-saving game state (however, N≧1 after subtraction). On the other hand, if the remaining number of times N is less than or equal to the numerical value "0" (S247: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the remaining number of times N to the numerical value "0". In addition, the game for which it is determined "Yes" in step S247 is a game in a low probability non-time-saving game state in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" (a game in which the next game will be in the second time-saving game state). , a game in the second time-saving game state, and a game in the activated period are assumed.

After executing step S248, the main CPU 111 determines whether the migrated flag is in the ON state (S249). The transition completed flag is provided to identify whether or not the transition to the second time-saving gaming state has been completed. Specifically, the transition completed flag is changed to the OFF state at the time of winning a jackpot game or performing a clear operation, and is changed to the ON state upon transition to the second time-saving game state. In the above configuration, the transition completed flag is in the OFF state during the period from the end of the jackpot game until the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, and is in the ON state during the second time-saving gaming state and the activated period. When the main CPU 111 determines that the transition completed flag is in the ON state (S249: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end determination process and ends the transition determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 111 determines that the transition completion flag is not in the ON state (S249: No), the main CPU 111 executes the above-described second time-saving transition process (S244) and ends the transition determination process. In addition, according to the above configuration, the game that is determined as "Yes" in step S249 is a game in a low probability non-time-saving game state in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0".

FIG. 35(b) is a flowchart for explaining the time saving end determination process. When the main CPU 111 starts the time-saving end determination process, it determines whether the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state is a numerical value "0" (S250). The remaining number of times M is stored in the main RAM 113 and indicates the remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state. That is, in this embodiment, the remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state and the remaining number of times in the second time-saving gaming state are stored as common data. The above configuration has the advantage that the amount of data is reduced compared to a configuration in which the remaining number of times in each time-saving gaming state is stored as separate data.

If the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M is the numerical value "0" (S250: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M is not the numerical value "0" (S250: No), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times M (S251). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number M after the subtraction is a numerical value "0" (S252). If the remaining number of times M after the subtraction is not the numerical value "0" (S252: No), the main CPU 111 ends the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, if the remaining number of times M after the subtraction is the numerical value "0" (S252: Yes), the main CPU 111 performs the time saving end process (S253)
After carrying out the execution, the time saving end determination process is ended. In the time-saving end processing, for example, the time-saving flag is changed to the OFF state, and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state or second time-saving game state) ends. In the second time saving transition process, a variation pattern determination table T is set according to the type of table scenario Sb that is set. However, during the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set.

FIG. 36(a) is a flowchart of the general electric power control process. When starting the general-purpose electricity control process, the main CPU 111 loads the current value of the general-purpose electricity processing data (0 to 3) (S401), and refers to the branch address from the loaded general-purpose electricity processing data (S401). S402).

For example, when the ordinary symbol general electric processing data is "0", the main CPU 111 executes ordinary symbol memory determination processing (step S403). In the normal symbol storage determination process, a regular symbol lottery (win determination process) is executed with a probability depending on whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state. Further, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the result of the common symbol lottery. Further, depending on the current gaming state (time-saving gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b (second starting port 14) are determined by lottery. When executing the general symbol lottery, the main CPU 111 changes the ordinary symbol general electric processing data to "1" when ending the ordinary symbol memory determination process.

When the ordinary symbol ordinary electric processing data is "1", the main CPU 111 executes ordinary symbol fluctuation processing (S404). In the normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the variation time determined in the normal symbol memory determination process. The main CPU 111 changes the general pattern general electric processing data to "2" when ending the normal symbol variation processing.

When the ordinary symbol general electric processing data is "2", the main CPU 111 executes ordinary symbol stop processing (S405). In the normal symbol stop process, the normal symbols determined in the normal symbol memory determination process are stopped and displayed for at least a predetermined wait period (for example, about 0.5 seconds). The main CPU 111 changes the general pattern general electric processing data to "3" when ending the normal symbol stop processing.

When the general electricity processing data is "3", the main CPU 111 executes the opening/closing control processing (S405). In the opening/closing control process, when the open symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol stop process, the opening/closing door 14b is opened and closed in the operating mode determined in the normal symbol memory determination process. When the main CPU 111 ends the opening/closing control process, the main CPU 111 changes the general figure/general electric processing data to "0".

FIG. 36(b) is a flowchart of normal symbol storage determination processing. The above normal symbol storage determination process is executed in the above-mentioned general pattern and general electricity control process.

When the main CPU 111 starts the normal symbol storage determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols G (the number of reserved common symbol lottery tickets) is greater than or equal to the numerical value "1" (S410). If it is determined that the normal symbol retention number G is not greater than the numerical value "1" (G=0) (S410: No), the main CPU 111 ends the normal symbol storage determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number G of normal symbols reserved is greater than or equal to the numerical value "1" (S410: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the number G of normally reserved symbols (S411), and shifts the storage area. (S412).

Specifically, when a game ball passes through the above-mentioned normal symbol gate 15, a random number value for hit determination is acquired and stored in the normal symbol retention storage area. The normal symbol retention storage area includes storage units from a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit. When the main CPU 111 acquires the random number value for determining a hit, the main CPU 111 stores the random number value for determining a hit in priority order from the first storage section to the fourth storage section among the vacant storage sections. In step S412 described above, the random number value for hit determination stored in the first storage unit is stored (shifted) in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the normal symbol retention storage area. In addition, the random number values for winning determination stored from the second storage section to the fourth storage section are stored from the first storage section to the third storage section.

When the random number value for hit determination is stored in the determination storage area, the main CPU 111 determines the random number value for hit determination according to the gaming state (time-saving gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state) (S413). Specifically, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the numerical value specified in the above-mentioned hit determination table (see FIG. 6(b)) matches the random number value for hit determination. After that, the main CPU 111 determines the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed using the above-mentioned normal symbol determination table (see FIGS. 7(b-1) and 7(b-2)) according to the gaming state (S414). .

Further, the main CPU 111 determines the variable time by lottery according to the gaming state (S415), and determines the operation mode of the opening/closing door 14b by lottery according to the normal symbol and the gaming state determined in step S414 (S416). In the operating state, the opening/closing door 14b operates (opens/closes) in the operating mode determined in S416. After determining the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b, the main CPU 111 changes the ordinary symbol/universal power processing data to "1" (S417), and ends the ordinary symbol memory determination process.

Next, the processing executed by the sub CPU 121 of the production control board 120 will be explained. As described above, upon receiving the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110, the performance control board 120 determines and executes the performance corresponding to the variation pattern designation command by lottery.

<Main processing of production control board>
FIG. 37(a) is a flowchart illustrating main processing by the production control board. In step S510, the sub CPU 121 performs initialization processing. In the initialization process, the sub CPU 121 reads a program for executing the main process from the sub ROM 122 and initializes the sub RAM 123.

After executing the initialization process, the sub CPU 121 executes a recovery notification process (S520). In the restoration time notification process, a process for notifying whether or not the second time-saving gaming state has already been activated is executed. After executing the recovery time notification process, the sub CPU 121 performs a random value update process for effect (S530). In the performance random number update process, the sub CPU 121 updates various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 123. The effect random value update process is repeatedly executed until the interrupt process is executed.

FIG. 37(b) is a flowchart of the restoration notification process. When the recovery time notification process is started, the sub CPU 121 determines whether the gaming state at the end of displaying the power recovery screen is a high probability gaming state or a jackpot game (S521). If it is determined that it is a high probability gaming state or a jackpot game (S521: Yes), the sub CPU 121 decides to control the performance lamp 33 in the normal mode (a mode according to the gaming state) (S524), and upon recovery End the notification process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a high probability game state or a jackpot game (S521: No), the sub CPU 121 determines whether the remaining number of times M at the end of displaying the power recovery screen is a numerical value "0" (S522 ). When determining that the remaining number of times M is not the numerical value "0" (S522: No), the sub CPU 121 decides to control the performance lamp 33 in the normal mode (S525), and ends the recovery time notification process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times M is the numerical value "0" (S522: Yes), the sub CPU 121 determines whether the remaining number of times N at the end of displaying the recovery screen is the numerical value "0" (S523 ).

When determining that the remaining number of games N at the end of displaying the recovery screen is not the number "0" (S523: No), the sub CPU 121 decides to display the number "0" on the number of games image GE (S524), It is decided to control the performance lamp 33 in the normal mode, and the restoration notification process is ended. On the other hand, in step S523 described above, if it is determined that the remaining number N at the end of displaying the recovery screen is the numerical value "0" (S523: Yes), the sub CPU 121 adds the symbol "???" to the number of games image GE. It is determined to display the display (S526), it is determined to control the effect lamp 33 in a warning mode (S527), and the recovery time notification process is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing of production control board>
FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing. The sub CPU 121 executes timer interrupt processing approximately every 2 milliseconds. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the sub CPU 121 saves the information stored in the register to the stack area (S601).

After saving various information to the stack area, the sub CPU 121 updates various timer counters used in the production control board 120 (S602). After updating the timer counter, the sub CPU 121 executes command analysis processing (S603). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 121 analyzes the command in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 123.

After executing the command analysis process, the sub CPU 121 executes the effect input control process (S604). Although described in detail later, in the production input control process, control according to the operation of the production button 8 is executed. After executing the effect input control process, the sub CPU 121 executes a data output process (S605) for transmitting various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123 to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. In step S606, the sub CPU 121 restores the information saved in step S601 to the register of the sub CPU 121.

<Command analysis processing>
39 and 40 are flowcharts illustrating the command analysis process (S603 in FIG. 38). As shown in FIG. 39, when the command analysis process is started, the sub CPU 121 determines whether a command has been received (S611). The sub CPU 121 ends the command analysis process if there is no command in the reception buffer (No in step S611), and moves the process to step S621 if there is a command in the reception buffer (Yes in step S611).

In step S621, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting command (Yes in step S621), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S622, and if it is not a customer waiting command (no in step S621), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S631. move.

In step S622, the sub CPU 121 performs a customer waiting performance pattern determination process to determine a customer waiting performance pattern. Specifically, a customer waiting effect pattern is determined, the determined customer waiting effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and information on the determined customer waiting effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. Therefore, data based on the determined customer waiting presentation pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123.

In step S631, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a start prize winning designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a starting winning designation command (Yes in step S631), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S632, and if it is not a starting winning designation command (No in step S631), it moves to step S641. Processing is transferred to .

In step S632, the sub CPU 121 analyzes the received starting prize designation command and executes a pending storage process corresponding to the starting winning prize designation command. The starting winning designation command is associated with information regarding jackpots, small wins, losses, and fluctuation patterns tentatively determined by the preliminary determination process. In the reservation storage process, information (winning information) regarding the newly reserved first reservation (U1) or second reservation (U2) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 123.

In step S633, the sub CPU 121 executes a pending change effect determination process. In the pending change effect determination process, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not to execute a pending change effect, which will be described later, in accordance with the start winning designation command (winning information). The hold change effect is a so-called look-ahead effect, in which a hold image GB (see FIG. 29(a)), which will be described later, is displayed in one of a plurality of special modes (blue, red, gold, rainbow color). Specifically, in the pending change effect, the mode of the pending image GB may change stepwise to the final special mode (for example, change from blue to red). When the sub CPU 121 decides to execute the pending change effect, it determines in advance the final special mode and the timing (scenario) at which the mode of the pending image GB changes.

In step S641, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern specification command (Yes in step S641), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S642, and if it is not a variation pattern specification command (No in step S641), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S651. Processing is transferred to .

In step S642, the sub CPU 121 performs a variable effect pattern determination process to determine one variable effect pattern from among a plurality of variable effect patterns based on the received variable pattern designation command.

In step S643, the sub CPU 121 shifts the pending display data stored in the first pending storage area and the second pending storage area and the data corresponding to the starting winning designation command, and the information of the pending display data after shifting. A pending display mode update process is performed in which the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 are sent.

In step S651, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect design designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a production design designation command (Yes in step S651), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S652, and if it is not a production design designation command (No in step S651), it moves to step S661. Processing is transferred to .

In step S652, the sub CPU 121 performs a performance symbol determination process to determine the performance symbol GA to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 31 based on the contents of the received performance symbol designation command. Specifically, the performance symbol designation command is analyzed, the performance symbol data that constitutes the combination of performance symbols GA is determined according to the presence or absence of a jackpot, and the type of the jackpot, and a symbol command based on the determined performance symbol data is issued. Set it in the performance symbol storage area.

In step S661, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol confirmation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol confirmation command (Yes in step S661), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S662, and if it is not a symbol confirmation command (No in step S661), the process proceeds to step S671. move. In step S662, the sub CPU 121 performs an effect pattern stop process of setting a pattern stop command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123 for stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped effect pattern GA.

In step S671, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a general figure fluctuation pattern designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command (Yes in step S671), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S672, and if it is not a general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command (No in step S671). ), the process moves to step S681 in FIG. In step S672, the sub CPU 121 performs a regular pattern variation performance pattern determination process to determine one regular pattern variation performance pattern from among a plurality of regular pattern fluctuation performance patterns based on the received regular pattern fluctuation pattern designation command.

As shown in FIG. 40, in step S681, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a long release start command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a long release start command (Yes in step S681), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S682, and if it is not a long release start command (No in step S681), it moves to step S700. Processing is transferred to . In step S682, the sub CPU 121 performs a long open effect process. Here, a notification effect is executed to notify the player that the second starting port 14 will be opened for a long time (4.2 seconds) in the non-time saving game state.

In step S691, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command (Yes in step S691), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S692, and if it is not a normal symbol confirmation command (No in step S691), it moves to step S700. Processing is transferred to . In step S692, the sub CPU 121 stores the production pattern data corresponding to the received normal pattern confirmation command and the pattern stop command for stopping and displaying the normal pattern production pattern in the sub RAM 123 in order to stop and display the normal pattern production pattern. Performs normal symbol fluctuation stop processing that is set in the transmission buffer.

In step S700, the sub CPU 121 determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command (Yes in step S700), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S701, and if it is not a gaming state designation command (No in step S700), step S711 Processing is transferred to .

In step S701, the sub CPU 121 executes a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state based on the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area in the sub RAM 123. In step S711, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening command (Yes in step S711), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S712; if it is not an opening command (No in step S711), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S721. .

In step S712, the sub CPU 121 performs a winning start performance pattern determination process to determine a winning start performance pattern. Specifically, a winning start performance pattern is determined based on the opening command, the determined winning start performance pattern is set in the performance pattern storage area, and information on the determined winning start performance pattern is transmitted to the image control board 150 and lamp control. In order to transmit it to the board 140, data based on the determined winning start performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123.

In step S721, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot opening designation command indicating the start of a jackpot round game. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a big winning opening designation command (Yes in step S721), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S722, and if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a big winning opening opening designation command (No in step S721). ), the process moves to step S731.

In step S722, the sub CPU 121 performs in-round performance pattern determination processing to determine a jackpot performance pattern. Specifically, an in-round performance pattern is determined for each round to start based on a grand prize opening designation command having information about which round game is to start. Then, the determined in-round effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and in order to transmit information on the effect pattern to the image control board 150 and lamp control board 140, corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123. .

In step S731, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a round end designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a round end designation command (Yes in step S731), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S732; if it is not a round end designation command (No in step S731), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S741. Processing is transferred to . In step S732, the sub CPU 121 performs an in-rest performance pattern determination process that determines the performance pattern between each round.

In step S741, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending command (Yes in step S741), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S742; if it is not an ending command (No in step S741), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S751. .

In step S742, the sub CPU 121 performs a winning ending effect pattern determination process for determining a winning ending effect pattern. Specifically, a winning ending effect pattern is determined based on the ending command, the determined winning ending effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and information on the determined winning ending effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 150 and lamp control. In order to transmit it to the board 140, data based on the determined winning effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123.

In step S751, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a big winning opening ball entry command. The above-described grand prize opening ball entry command is transmitted from the main control board 110 when a game ball enters the grand prize opening. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a big winning opening ball entering command (Yes in step S751), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S752, and if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a big winning opening ball entering command (step S751 is No). ), the command analysis process ends. In step S752, the sub CPU 121 executes a big winning opening ball entering command transmission process for transmitting the big winning opening ball entering command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. In the above-described big winning opening ball entering command transmission process, the big winning opening ball entering command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123.

<Production input control processing>
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating the production input control process by the production control board. First, in step S831, the sub CPU 121 determines whether there is a valid effect button detection signal from the effect button detection switch 8a based on the effect button detection command from the lamp control board 140. Here, if the sub CPU 121 determines that there is no production button detection signal (No in step S831), it ends the process, and if it determines that there is a production button detection signal (Yes in step S831), it ends the process in step S832. Move to processing.

In step S832, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the button operation effect execution enable flag=01 is set in the storage area of the sub RAM 123. Here, if the button operation effect executable flag = 01 is not set (No in step S832), the sub CPU 121 ends the process, and if the button operation effect execution enable flag = 01 is set (step S832: (Yes in S832), the process moves to step S833.

Note that the button operation effect executable flag is used to determine whether or not the effect corresponding to the button operation can be executed based on the fact that the button operation has been performed. ”, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the operation in question, and if the flag is “00”, it indicates that it is impossible to execute the effect corresponding to the operation in question, and the operation validity period of the effect button 8 is The flag "01" is set in accordance with the start of the operation, and the flag "00" is set when the effect button 8 is operated or when the effective operation period ends without operating the effect button 8.

In step S833, the sub CPU 121 sets a button operation effect execution command in the transmission buffer. This command is a command for causing the image control board 150 to execute a performance corresponding to the operation of the performance button 8. Here, the sub CPU 121 transmits the command set in the transmission buffer in step S605 (see FIG. 22) after the effect input control process to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. The image control board 150 operates the image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 based on the received command, and the lamp control board 140 operates the effect movable body 32 and the effect lamp 33 based on the received command.

Next, the image control board 150 will be explained. In the image control board 150 , when receiving a production command from the production control board 120 , the host CPU 151 reads the audio output device control program from the host ROM 153 based on the received production command, and outputs the audio output device 34 . At the same time, the host CPU 151 reads out an animation control program from the host ROM 153 and controls image display on the image display device 31 .

Here, the processing executed by the host CPU 151 in the image control board 150 will be described.

<Host CPU main processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating main processing by the image control board. When power is supplied by the power supply board 170, a system reset occurs in the host CPU 151, and the host CPU 151 performs the following main processing. First, in step S901, the host CPU 151 performs initialization processing. In this process, the host CPU 151 reads the main processing program from the host ROM 153 when the power is turned on, and instructs the initial settings of the various modules of the host CPU 151 and the VDP 200.

In step S902, the host CPU 151 performs a performance pattern designation command analysis process that analyzes the performance pattern designation command (command stored in the reception buffer of the host RAM 152) transmitted from the performance control board 120. In addition, when the image control board 150 receives the command transmitted from the production control board 120, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) of the image control board 150 occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer.

The performance pattern designation command analysis process checks whether the performance pattern designation command (+performance control command) is stored in the reception buffer. If the effect pattern designation command is not stored in the reception buffer, the process directly advances to step S903. If a production pattern specification command (+ production control command) is stored in the reception buffer, a new production pattern specification command is read, and one or more animation groups to be executed are determined based on the read production pattern specification command. At the same time, an anime pattern is determined from each anime group. After determining the animation pattern, the read effect pattern designation command is deleted from the transmission buffer.

In step S903, the host CPU 151 performs animation control processing. In this process, the addresses of various anime scenes are updated based on the "scene switching counter", "wait frame", and "frame counter" that are updated in step S921, which will be described later, and the anime pattern determined in step S902 above. do.

In step S904, the host CPU 151 creates a display list based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the anime scene at the updated address, according to the priority order (drawing order) of the anime group to which the anime scene belongs. will be generated. When the generation of the display list is completed, the host CPU 151 outputs the display list to the VDP 200. Note that the display list output here is stored in the display list storage area 156a of the VRAM 156 via the CPU I/F 203 in the VDP 200.

In step S905, the host CPU 151 determines whether the FB switching flag=01. Here, as will be described later in FIG. 43(b), the FB switching flag is set when the previous display list has been drawn in the V blank interrupt every 1/60 seconds (approximately 16.6 ms). The FB switching flag becomes 01. That is, in step S905, it is determined whether the previous drawing has been completed. If the FB switching flag = 01 (Yes in step S905), the host CPU 151 moves the process to step S906, and if the FB switching flag = 00 (No in step S905), it waits until the FB switching flag = 01. do.

In step S906, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag=00 (turns off the FB switching flag), and moves the process to step S906. In step S907, the host CPU 151 performs drawing execution start processing. In this process, drawing execution start data is set in the drawing register in order to instruct the VDP 200 to execute drawing on the display list that has already been output. That is, execution of drawing on the display list output in step S904 is instructed. Thereafter, the processes from step S902 to step S907 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt occurs.

<Image control board interrupt processing>
The interrupt processing of the image control board 150 will be explained using FIG. 43. The interrupt process of the image control board 150 includes at least a drawing end interrupt process performed when a drawing end interrupt signal is input, and a V blank interrupt process performed when a V blank interrupt signal is input. There is.

<Host CPU drawing end interrupt processing>
FIG. 43(a) is a flowchart illustrating drawing end interrupt processing by the image control board. When the VDP 200 finishes drawing a predetermined unit of frames (one frame), the VDP 200 outputs a drawing end interrupt signal to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203. When the host CPU 151 receives a drawing end interrupt signal from the VDP 200, it executes a drawing end interrupt process. In the drawing end interrupt process, in step S911, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag=01 (turns on the drawing end flag) and ends the current drawing end interrupt process. That is, the drawing end flag is turned on every time drawing ends.

<Host CPU V blank interrupt processing>
FIG. 43(b) is a flowchart illustrating V blank interrupt processing by the image control board. The VDP 200 outputs a V blank interrupt signal (vertical synchronization signal) to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203 every 1/60 seconds (approximately 16.6 ms). When the host CPU 151 receives the V blank interrupt signal from the VDP 200, it executes the V blank interrupt process.

In step S921, the host CPU 151 performs processing to update various counters such as a "scene switching counter", "wait frame", and "frame counter". In step S922, the host CPU 151 determines whether the drawing end flag=01. That is, it is determined whether drawing of a predetermined unit of frames has been completed. If the drawing end flag = 01 (Yes in step S922), the host CPU 151 moves the process to step S923, and if the drawing end flag = 01 (No in step S922), ends the current V blank interrupt processing. do. That is, even if the V blank interrupt signal is input, if drawing has not been completed, the processing from step S923 onwards will not be performed.

In step S923, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag=00 (turns off the drawing end flag). In step S924, the host CPU 151 gives an instruction to the memory controller 209 of the VDP 200 to switch between the "display frame buffer" and the "drawing frame buffer". In step S925, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag = 01 (turns on the FB switching flag), cancels the standby state in step S905 (see FIG. 42), and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. do.

Next, the outline of the lamp control board 140 will be briefly explained. When the lamp control board 140 receives the production command from the production control board 120, it reads out the production movable body operation program based on the received production command, controls the production movable body 32, and controls the performance based on the received production command. The lighting device control program for presentation is read based on the command for presentation, and the lamp 33 for presentation and the light guide 60 are controlled. In addition, when the lamp control board 140 receives a command for the production button from the image control board 150 via the production control board 120, it reads out the production button operation program based on the received command for the production button, and then presses the production button. Control 8.

FIG. 44 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variable performance pattern determination table. In the above-described variable effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 412 refers to the variable effect pattern determination table and determines the variable effect pattern.

In this embodiment, a variable performance pattern determination table is provided for each gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state). The specific example of FIG. 44 shows a variable performance pattern determination table that is referred to in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. That is, the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 44 is referred to by the sub CPU 121 when a variation pattern is determined by the main CPU 111 using the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 described above.

Specifically, in the variable effect pattern determination process, a variable effect pattern is determined by lottery according to the variable pattern determined by the main CPU 111 (the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern designation command) and the random value for effect. Ru. The random number value for performance has a random number range of "0 to 99", and is acquired by the sub CPU 121 when the variable performance pattern determination process is started. For example, when the main CPU 111 determines the variable pattern a1x and any of the numerical values "0 to 50" is obtained as the random value for effect, the variable effect pattern 1 is determined.

FIG. 44 shows an overview of the performance configuration of each variable performance pattern. For example, in variable performance pattern 1, when a game is started, a normal performance is executed, and then a normal reach is executed. On the other hand, in the variable performance pattern 2, when the game is started, the normal performance is executed, then the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, and then the normal reach is executed. In the above-described pseudo-continuous performance, the image display device 31 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) the performance symbols GA that have been variably displayed, and then variably displays them again. The above pseudo-continuous performance may be executed multiple times in one game (variation). For example, in variable performance pattern 5, two pseudo-continuous performances are performed, and in variable performance pattern 14, pseudo-continuous performances are performed three times.

<Second embodiment>
Other embodiments of the invention will be described below. In addition, in each embodiment illustrated below, for elements whose actions and functions are equivalent to those of the first embodiment, the reference numerals referred to in the description of the first embodiment are used, and detailed descriptions of each are omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 45(a) and FIG. 45(b) are diagrams for explaining the end effect executed when the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends. In the end performance, it is announced that the time-saving game state ends. Further, the end effect includes a first end effect (see FIG. 45(a)) and a second end effect (see FIG. 45(b)). As will be described in detail later, when the time-saving game state ends, either the first end effect or the second end effect may be executed.

FIG. 45(a) is a mock diagram of a specific example of the screen displayed in the first end effect. As shown in FIG. 45(a), in the first end effect, various images including a small symbol Ga, a right-handed image GS4, a fourth symbol GC, a pending number image GD, and an end image GP1 are displayed. Furthermore, in the first end effect, the effect pattern GA is hidden. The above first ending effect is executed in the last game of the time saving game state. In addition, as mentioned above, in the last game of the first time saving game state (100 times), a judge performance is executed. When a judge performance is executed in the last game of the time-saving game state, a first ending performance is executed after the judge performance is executed.

The ending image GP1 in the second embodiment displays the number of winnings of the jackpot game and the number of game balls acquired during a specific period. For example, after the jackpot game ends, it moves to the first time-saving game state, wins the jackpot game again in the first time-saving game state, and then, after the second jackpot game, 100 games are executed and the first time-saving game state Assume that the process has ended. In the above case, the ending image GP1 shows the number of winnings (2 times) and acquisitions of the jackpot game in the period (specific period) from when the first jackpot is won until the end of the second first time-saving gaming state. Displays the number of game balls played. Further, the end image GP1 displays the name of the time saving mode and a message indicating that the time saving mode is ending.

FIG. 45(b) is a mock diagram of a specific example of the screen displayed in the second end effect. As shown in FIG. 45(b), in the second end effect, various images including a small symbol Ga, a right-handed image GS4, a fourth symbol GC, a reserved number image GD, and an end image GP2 are displayed. Furthermore, in the second end effect, the effect pattern GA is hidden. The above-mentioned second end effect is executed in the last game of the second time-saving game state among the time-saving game states.

The ending image GP2 in the second embodiment displays the name of the time saving mode and a message indicating that the time saving mode is ending. In addition, the above-mentioned end image GP1 displays the number of winnings of the jackpot game and the number of game balls acquired in a specific period, but the end image GP2 does not display the above information. Although described in detail later, the end image GP2 is displayed when the second time-saving game state is started from the normal mode and the second time-saving game state ends without winning the jackpot game.

FIGS. 46(a) to 46(e) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of when the end effect is executed. FIG. 46(a) to FIG. 46(e) show the gaming state and fluctuation pattern determination table T at each point in time, in addition to the timing when the end effect is executed.

FIG. 46(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of when the first end effect is executed among the end effects. In the specific example of FIG. 46(a), it is assumed that the first time-saving game state starts 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, and the first time-saving game state ends. As mentioned above, in the first time-saving game state (100 times), the variable pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to in each early game, the variable pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in each late game, and the variable pattern is determined in the last game. Table Tj1 is referenced. In the second embodiment, in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to, the first ending performance is performed after the judge performance is performed. As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the game after the first time-saving game state ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to.

FIG. 46(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of when the second end effect is executed among the end effects. In the specific example of FIG. 46(b), it is assumed that the first time-saving game state is started 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, after that, the game is executed 700 times, and the second time-saving game state is started. That is, assume that the second time-saving gaming state is started during the scenario setting period. In the above case, in the first game of the second time-saving game state, the variable pattern determination table Ts is referred to, and various performances including the entry performance and the mode selection performance are executed.

In the specific example of FIG. 46(b), it is assumed that the second time saving game state ends without winning the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 46(b), in the final game of the second time-saving game state in the scenario setting period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to. In the game in which the above fluctuation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to, the second ending effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 46(b), in the game after the second time-saving game state in the scenario setting period ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to.

Assume a configuration in which the first end effect is executed when the second time saving game state ends. In the above configuration, it is notified that the number of jackpot games won in the second time saving game state is zero. Further, the base value of the time saving game state is smaller than 1. Therefore, in the first end performance when the second time-saving game state ends, an excessively small number of acquired game balls is notified. Therefore, some players may find the first end effect to be troublesome. In the second end effect of the second embodiment, the number of winnings of the jackpot game and the number of acquired game balls are not reported. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

FIG. 46(c) is a specific example where the end effect is not executed when the time saving game state ends. FIG. 46(c) is a specific example when the second time-saving game state is started during the scenario unset period. In the second embodiment, the end effect is not executed when the second time-saving game state in the scenario-unset period ends. In addition, in the above-mentioned 1st Embodiment, the structure which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the 2nd time-saving game state of a scenario unset period was adopted. In the second embodiment, the variation pattern determination table Tax that is referred to in the second time-saving gaming state in the scenario setting period is also referred to in the second time-saving gaming state in the scenario setting period.

As shown in FIG. 46(c), in the second time saving game state during the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in all games (including the final game). Moreover, a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to ends in a relatively short time. Therefore, in a configuration in which the end performance is executed in the final game of the second time-saving game state in the scenario-unset period, the time of the end performance is too short, and there may be an inconvenience that the content of the end performance is not grasped by the player. According to the configuration of the second embodiment, the above disadvantages can be easily suppressed. As shown in FIG. 46(c), in the game after the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to.

Further, according to the configuration of the second embodiment, during the scenario setting period, the last game in the second time-saving game state refers to the variable pattern determination table Te1, and the next game after this game refers to the variable pattern determination table Tn1. (See FIG. 46(b)). On the other hand, in the scenario non-setting period, the last game in the second time-saving game state refers to the variable pattern determination table Tax, and the next game after this game refers to the variable pattern determination table Tn1 (see FIG. 46(c)). ). That is, the fluctuation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving game state (the last game of the second time-saving game state, the next game of the game) may be different between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. be. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the variation pattern at the end of the second time-saving game state is rich in variety, and the fun of the game is improved.

FIG. 46(d) is a specific example when the second time-saving game state is started in the scenario unset period, similar to FIG. 46(c) described above. However, in the specific example of FIG. 46(c), it is assumed that the jackpot is not won in the second time-saving game state, whereas in the specific example of FIG. 46(d), the case is assumed that the jackpot is not won in the second time-saving gaming state. Assume a case. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 46(d), it is assumed that a jackpot is won in the second time-saving gaming state, the table scenario Sb2 is set, and the transition to the first time-saving gaming state (100) is made. In the above case, the first end effect is executed when the first time saving game state ends.

As understood from the above explanation, in this embodiment, if the jackpot is not won in the second time-saving game state, the first end performance is not executed (see FIG. 46(c)), and in the second time-saving game state, If the jackpot is won, the first end effect is executed (see FIG. 46(d)). According to the above configuration, for example, the interest of the performance is improved compared to a configuration in which the first ending performance is not uniformly executed when the time saving gaming state is transferred to the second time saving gaming state and then the time saving gaming state ends. There are advantages.

FIG. 46(e) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the timing when the end effect is executed. FIG. 46(e) assumes a case where table scenario Sb4 is set. In the above case, the first time-saving game state continues for 799 games, and the second time-saving game state is started via the gap game. Further, a series of periods of the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the second time-saving game state become the time-saving mode B. In addition, in 1st Embodiment, the structure which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the 1st time-saving game state and the 2nd time-saving game state, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game was adopted. In the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is commonly referred to in a series of periods of the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the second time-saving game state. However, also in the gap game of the second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable pattern determination table T different from the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to.

In the specific example of FIG. 46(e), the end effect is not executed at the end of the first time saving game state (799 times). According to the above configuration, the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state are treated as a series of time saving game states, compared to a configuration in which the end effect is executed in the final game or gap game of the first time saving game state, for example. This makes it easier for players to recognize it. However, in the specific example of FIG. 46(e), a configuration may be adopted in which the end effect can be executed in the final game or gap game in the first time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 46(e), in the last game of the second time saving game state, the fluctuation pattern determination table Te2 is referred to and the second end performance is executed. That is, during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the first end effect is not executed when the second time-saving game state ends (the final game of the second time-saving game state or the next game of the game). Further, even during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the second end effect is executed when the second time saving game state ends, and the first end effect is not executed. However, during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 or the table scenario Sb4 is set, the first end performance may be executed when the second time-saving game state ends. Further, in the above period, the end effect (including the second end effect) may not be executed when the second time saving game state ends.

In addition, the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a common variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state (the final game of the second time-saving gaming state or the next game of the game). You can also use it as According to the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table T is different from the configuration in which the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period have no common variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state. This has the advantage that the number of types can be reduced.

FIG. 46(f) is a diagram for explaining a modification that employs a configuration in which the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a common variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state. It is. The specific example in FIG. 46(f) assumes a period in which table scenario Sb2 is set, similar to FIG. 46(b) of the second embodiment. In this modification, the variation pattern determination table that is referenced in the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set is different from the second embodiment, and the variation pattern determination table ( (type, order) are the same as in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 46(f), in this modification, the variation pattern of the final game in the second time-saving gaming state is determined by the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the period in which the scenario is not set (see FIG. 46(c)). The determination table (Tax) is common, and the fluctuation pattern determination table (Tn1) of the next game of the final game in the second time-saving game state is also common. According to the above modification, there is an advantage that the number of types of variation pattern determination tables can be reduced compared to, for example, the second embodiment.

<Third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a plurality of types of time-saving game states are provided. Specifically, the time-saving game state of the third embodiment includes a third time-saving game state in addition to the above-mentioned first time-saving game state and second time-saving game state. The third time-saving game state is transitioned to when a predetermined special symbol (time-saving symbol to be described later) is stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state. In the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is the same in each time-saving game state. However, in each time-saving game state, the opening manner of the second starting port 14 may be different.

In the third embodiment, each time saving game state has a different number of time saving times. Specifically, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is 100 times. Note that, similarly to the first embodiment, the number of times of subsequent time saving in the first time saving game state may be different depending on the special symbol (jackpot symbol) that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot game is started. Further, the number of time saving times in the first time saving game state is not limited to 100 times, but may be 101 times or more or 99 times or less. The number of time saving times in the second time saving game state is 1000 times. Further, the number of time saving times in the third game state is 100 times or 1000 times.

<Jackpot determination table>
FIG. 47(a-1) and FIG. 47(a-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of the jackpot determination table in the third embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 47(a-1) shows whether the stop result of the special symbol fluctuation in the first special symbol display device 20 is a jackpot, a small win, a third time reduction, or a loss (jackpot lottery). This is the jackpot determination table A that is referred to when playing the game. FIG. 47(b-2) is a jackpot determination table B that is referred to when determining the stop result of the special symbol fluctuation in the second special symbol display device 21. Note that the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 have different probabilities of winning a small hit, but have the same probability of winning a jackpot. Moreover, the winning probability of the third time saving is different between the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21. Specifically, the third time reduction is won on the first special symbol display device 20, but the third time reduction is not won on the second special symbol display device 21.

The jackpot determination table in the third embodiment includes a random value for determining a special symbol that is a "big hit," a random value for determining a special symbol that is a "small hit," and a random number for determining a special symbol that is a "third time reduction." A numerical value is specified. In the jackpot lottery, the random number for special symbol determination obtained when a game ball enters the starting hole is compared with the random number for special symbol determination prescribed in the jackpot determination table, and if the two match, the jackpot is won. Win a small hit or the third time reduction. Similar to the first embodiment, the jackpot determination tables (A, B) shown in FIGS. 47(a-1) and 47(a-2) are based on the low probability time random number determination table and the high probability time random number determination table. configured. The main CPU 111 determines one of "big hit", "small hit", "third time saving", and "loss" based on the selected table and the extracted random number value for special symbol determination.

For example, according to the low probability time random number determination table shown in FIG. 47(a-1), two special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be a "jackpot". On the other hand, according to the high probability time random number determination table, 20 special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be a "jackpot". In addition, in the jackpot determination table of FIG. 6(a-1), whether the low probability time random number determination table or the high probability time random number determination table is used, the four special symbol determination random numbers are "small hit". It is determined that one special symbol determination random number value is "3rd time saving". If the random number is not determined to be a "big hit", "small hit", or "third time saving", it will be determined as a "loss".

Jackpot determination table A and jackpot determination table B have different random numbers for special symbol determination that are determined to be the third time saving. Specifically, in jackpot determination table A, one random value for special symbol determination is determined to be the third time shortener, but jackpot determination table B does not include the random value for special symbol determination that is determined to be the third time shortener. . In the above configuration, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 13, the player can win the third time reduction, but when the game ball enters the second starting opening 14, he does not win the third time reduction. However, it may be configured such that when a game ball enters the second starting port 14, the player can win the third time reduction. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the probability of winning the third time saving is lower when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting hole 14 than when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting hole 13.

<Hit judgment table>
FIG. 47(b) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the result of stopping the normal symbol variation is a hit in the regular symbol lottery. The hit determination table shown in FIG. 47(b) is composed of a non-time-saving game state random number determination table and a time-saving game state random number determination table. The above time-saving gaming state time random number determination table is commonly referred to in the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state.

<Design determination table>
FIG. 48(a-1) to FIG. 48(a-4) are conceptual diagrams of a special symbol determination table for determining a special symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each game. The special symbol determination table in the third embodiment includes a time-saving symbol determination table in addition to a jackpot symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, and a loss symbol determination table. The time-saving symbol determination table is referred to when determining the stop symbol (time-saving symbol) when the third time-saving symbol is won in the jackpot lottery. The jackpot symbol determination table, the small win symbol determination table, and the loss symbol determination table are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 48(a-4) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a time-saving symbol determination table. When the main CPU 111 wins the third time saving, the main CPU 111 refers to the random number value for the time saving symbol. The random number range of the random number value for the time-saving symbol is a number “0 to 99”. For example, if you win the third time-saving prize by entering the first starting slot 13, if the acquired random number value for the time-saving symbol is "0" to "70", the main CPU 111 selects "21" as the stop symbol data. ” (special symbol J1) is determined. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 48(a-4), the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. Further, when the stop symbol data "21" is determined, the production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "11H" are generated as shown in FIG. 48 (a-4).

As shown in FIG. 48 (a-4), if the player wins the third time-saving prize by entering the first starting slot 13, and the acquired random number value for the time-saving symbol is between "71" and "99". , "22" (special symbol J2) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. Further, when the stop symbol data "22" is determined, the production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "12H" are generated as shown in FIG. 48 (a-4).

When the special symbol J1 or the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed, the state then shifts to the third time-saving game state. Specifically, when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state for 100 times. Further, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the third time saving game state for 1000 times.

FIG. 48(b-1) and FIG. 48(b-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of the normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is used when determining the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The above normal symbol determination table is commonly used in each game state (non-time saving game state, first time saving game state, second time saving game state, third time saving game state).

<Fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving gaming state>
FIG. 49 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table used in the low probability non-time saving gaming state in the third embodiment. In the above fluctuation pattern determination table, as fluctuation patterns of special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, fluctuation pattern a (1x to 3x), fluctuation pattern b (1x to 6x), fluctuation pattern One of pattern c (1x to 6x), variation pattern dx, variation pattern ex, variation pattern fx, variation pattern g, and variation pattern h (1x, 2x) is determined.

However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach effect is always executed in a variable pattern in which a jackpot symbol, a small win symbol, or a time-saving symbol among the special symbols is stopped and displayed. However, in a variable pattern in which a small winning symbol or a time saving symbol among the special symbols is stopped and displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which the reach effect may not be executed. Therefore, when the special symbol corresponding to the jackpot, small win, or third time reduction is displayed in a stopped state, the random number value for reach determination is not used when determining the fluctuation pattern.

When the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern h1x is determined if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 49". Further, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "50 to 99", the variation pattern h2x is determined.

In the variation pattern h1x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 40000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern h1x, a normal reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a shift to the third time reduction is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern h2x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation for about 60000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern h2x, the normal reach effect and the SP reach 1 are executed on the image display device 31, and the shift to the third time reduction is notified.

When the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the above-mentioned variation pattern h1x is determined if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 49". Further, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "50 to 99", the above-mentioned variation pattern h2x is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined are made common to the special symbol J1 and the special symbol J2, but they may be different. Further, the variation pattern h2x may be more easily determined when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed than when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed.

<Fluctuation pattern determination table for time-saving gaming state>
FIG. 50 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in the low probability time saving gaming state in the third embodiment. The above fluctuation pattern determination table is used in the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 50, in the above fluctuation pattern determination table, fluctuation patterns a (1y to 3y), fluctuation patterns b ( 1y to 6y), variation pattern c (1y to 6y), variation pattern dy, variation pattern ey, variation pattern f (1y, 2y), variation pattern g, and variation pattern h (1y, 2y) are determined. .

By the way, as described above, in the third embodiment, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the state shifts to the third time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state, there is no transition to the third time-saving game state. That is, the time-saving symbols are invalid in game states other than the low probability non-time-saving gaming state.

If an invalid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a longer variation pattern will be more likely to be selected than the normal variation (normal reach, variation in which SP reach 1 is not executed), just as when a valid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Assume the configuration. With the above configuration, some players may find the fluctuation of the special symbols until the invalid time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed to be a nuisance.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the third embodiment adopts a configuration in which the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed. Specifically, as explained in FIG. 8 above, when the time-saving symbols (special symbol J1, special symbol J2) are stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the variable pattern h1x or the variable pattern h2x is determined. Ru. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, in the low probability time saving game state, when the time saving symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable pattern h1y or the variable pattern h2y is determined instead of the variable pattern h1x or the variable pattern h2x.

In the low probability non-time-saving gaming state where time-saving symbols are effective, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern h1x is about 40,000 ms, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern h2x is about 60,000 ms. On the other hand, in the low probability time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbols are invalid, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern h1y is about 2000 ms, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern h2y is about 2000 ms.

In the above configuration, the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device when the invalid time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device when the valid time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed compared to a configuration in which the variable time of the special symbol display device is common regardless of whether the time saving symbol is valid or invalid.

In the third embodiment, in addition to the low-probability time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the high-probability time-saving game state is configured to be shorter than in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Ru. In addition, when an invalid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a longer (or equivalent length) variation pattern may be determined than when a valid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed.

<Pre-determination table for special symbols>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a preliminary determination table for determining in advance the result of the jackpot lottery in the third embodiment. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 13 or the second starting winning hole 14 (at the time of starting winning), winning information is generated by the preliminary determination table (similar to the first embodiment). By using the start winning designation command that shows the above winning information, the preliminary judgment results (loss, jackpot, small hit, 3rd short time), type of special symbol, and fluctuation pattern (whether reach occurs or not) are checked before the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. can be determined. The winning information (start-up winning designation command) of the third embodiment is referred to, for example, when determining a so-called look-ahead effect (a pending change effect to be described later).

In the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 51, winning information regarding the first special symbol display device 20 includes winning information a (1, 2), winning information b (1 to 4), winning information c (1 to 4), and winning information for the first special symbol display device 20. Winning information including information d1 and winning information e1 is set. Also, as winning information regarding the second special symbol display device 21, winning information a (3, 4), winning information b (5 to 8), winning information c (5 to 8), and winning information d (1, 2). , winning information e(1, 2), winning information f, winning information g, and winning information h(1, 2) is set.

When the winning information h1 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the time saving transition effect 1 of about 40000 ms. When the winning information h2 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the time saving transition effect 2 of about 60000 ms. In addition, when winning information h (1, 2) is selected at the time of starting winning, special symbol J (time saving symbol) is determined in the game started by the starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state), the first starting port 13 is Winning information is not set when a game ball wins. Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol (a combination of the random value for special symbol determination and the random value for symbol), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 20 is used. First, winning information is not set when a game ball wins in the first starting port 13. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 13, a starting winning designation command is not generated.

<Pre-judgment processing>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart for explaining preliminary determination processing by the main control board 110 in the third embodiment. The preliminary determination process in FIG. 52 is executed in both the first starting port detection switch input process and the second starting port detection switch input process described above. That is, the above preliminary determination process is executed both when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 and when a game ball enters the second starting port 14.

When the advance determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current advance determination process is executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 (S1151). When determining that the preliminary determination process has been executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 (S1151: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (S1152). ). If it is determined that the game is in a time-saving gaming state (S1152: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the preliminary determination process without generating winning information (omiting S1161, which will be described later).

If it is determined that the game is not in a time-saving gaming state (S1152: No), the main CPU 111 executes a tentative jackpot determination process (S1153). In the tentative jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the random number value for special symbol determination written in the special symbol retention storage area in response to the current starting win, and in the jackpot determination process of the game started by the starting win, It is tentatively determined whether the player wins the jackpot, wins the small win, wins the third time reduction, or loses.

If “No” is determined in the above-mentioned step S1151, that is, if the preliminary determination process is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 14, the main CPU 111 skips the above-mentioned step S1152. Then, the process after the jackpot provisional determination process (S1153) is executed. In the above configuration, when a game ball enters the second starting port 14, winning information is generated regardless of whether it is a time-saving gaming state or a non-time-saving gaming state (S1161 described below is executed). . That is, when a game ball enters the second start opening 14, the look-ahead effect can be executed regardless of whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state.

After executing the jackpot provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a jackpot has been provisionally determined in the jackpot provisional determination process (S1154). If it is provisionally determined to be a jackpot (step S1154: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a tentative jackpot symbol determination process (S1155). In the jackpot pattern provisional determination process, a jackpot pattern (stopped pattern data) to be stopped in the game started by the starting winning is provisionally judged using the random number value for the jackpot pattern acquired according to the starting winning. After executing the jackpot symbol provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 moves to the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process (S1160).

On the other hand, if it is not tentatively determined that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot tentative determination process (step S1154: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it has been tentatively determined that the player has won the third time saving (S1156). When it is tentatively determined that the third time saving is won (S1156: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a time saving symbol provisional determination process (S1157). In the time-saving symbol provisional determination process, the time-saving symbol (stopped symbol data) that is stopped in the game started by the starting prize is provisionally determined using the random number value for the time-saving symbol acquired in response to the current starting prize. . After executing the time saving symbol temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 moves to the fluctuation pattern temporary determination process (S1160).

In the case where it is not provisionally determined that the third time saving is won in the jackpot provisional determination process (step S1156: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is provisionally determined that the small win is won (S1158). When it is tentatively determined that the small winning is won (S1158: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a small winning symbol provisional determining process (S1159). In the small winning pattern temporary determination process, the small winning pattern (stopped pattern data) that is stopped in the game started by the starting winning is temporarily determined using the random value for the small winning pattern acquired in response to the current starting winning. It will be judged. After executing the small hit symbol temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 moves to the fluctuation pattern temporary determination process (S1160). If it is determined “No” in step S1158 described above, that is, if it is tentatively determined as a loss in the jackpot tentative determination process, the main CPU 111 does not execute the symbol tentative determination process (S1155, S1157, and S1159 described above). The process moves to fluctuation pattern provisional determination processing S1160.

In the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process (S1160), the main CPU 111 determines the gaming status, the result of the jackpot provisional determination process, the result of the jackpot pattern provisional determination process, the result of the time-saving pattern provisional determination process, the result of the small hit pattern provisional determination process, and the current A special symbol variation pattern is tentatively determined using the special symbol variation random number value and the reach determination random number value obtained in response to the starting winning. Thereafter, the main CPU 111 generates winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern provisionally determined in the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process (S1161). Further, a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information is set in the performance transmission data storage area (S1162), and the preliminary determination process is ended.

By the above preliminary determination process, winning information can be transmitted to the performance control board 120 as a starting winning designation command when the game ball enters the first starting port 13 or the second starting port 14. Therefore, the sub CPU 121 of the performance control board 120 that has received the starting winning designation command analyzes the starting winning designation command, and pre-determines the predetermined pattern before the change of special symbols triggered by the current starting winning is started. It is possible to perform a performance (pre-reading performance).

<Processing when special special symbol stops>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating special symbol stop processing by the main control board 110 in the third embodiment. When the special symbol stop process is started, the main CPU 111 executes a second time saving transition determination process (S1231). In the second time saving transition determination process, it is determined whether a transition opportunity to the second time saving gaming state has been established. As described above, when the player does not win a jackpot a predetermined number of times in the jackpot lottery in the low probability gaming state, it becomes possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state.

In the third embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the number of times the player has not won a jackpot in the jackpot determination process from the transition to the low-probability gaming state to the present time may be described as the "cumulative number of times m." The cumulative number m is counted by a counter provided in the main RAM 113, for example. When the above cumulative number of times m reaches a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "operation number n"), a transition is made to the second time-saving game state. The number of operations n in the third embodiment is "800 times". Note that the number of operations n can be changed as appropriate.

In the third embodiment, in addition to when a loss is determined in the jackpot determination process, the cumulative number m is added even when a small hit or a third time saving is won. Further, the cumulative number m is added in both the low probability non-time saving gaming state and the low probability time saving gaming state. That is, the cumulative number m is added to all games other than the high probability game state among the games in which the jackpot is not won. In the second time-saving transition determination process, when it is determined that a transition opportunity to the second time-saving gaming state has been established, the main CPU 111 shifts the gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state.

After executing the second time saving transition determination process, the main CPU 111 executes the third time saving transition determination process (S1232). In the third time-saving transition determination process, it is determined whether a transition opportunity to the third time-saving gaming state has been established. As described above, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, it becomes possible to shift to the third time-saving gaming state. In the third time-saving transition determination process, when it is determined that a transition opportunity to the third time-saving gaming state has been established, the main CPU 111 shifts the gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state.

After executing the third time saving transition determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the confirmation period has elapsed (S1233). The above confirmation period is provided to enable the player to recognize that the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the current game. The determination period is, for example, approximately 0.5 seconds. The variable display of special symbols in the next game is prohibited until the above confirmation period ends. Specifically, step S1233 is repeatedly executed until the fixed period ends (S1233: No), and when the fixed period ends (S1233: Yes), it becomes possible to proceed to the subsequent step.

When the fixed period ends, the main CPU 111 executes a time saving end determination process (S1234). In the time-saving end determination process, it is determined whether an opportunity to end the time-saving gaming state has been established. Specifically, in the time-saving end determination process, it is determined whether the number of games in the time-saving game state has reached the number of time-saving games. When it is determined that the number of games in the time saving game state has reached the number of times saving time, the time saving game state ends. Upon completion of the time saving end determination process, the main CPU 111 sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the performance transmission data storage area (S1235).

After setting the gaming state designation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether the special symbol stopped in the current game is a jackpot symbol (S1236). If the main CPU 111 determines that it is a jackpot symbol (S1236: Yes), it sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" (jackpot game processing) (S1237). Further, the main CPU 111 executes jackpot initialization processing (S1238).

In the jackpot initialization process, various information is initialized. For example, in the jackpot initialization process, the high probability flag that is in the ON state in the high probability gaming state is changed to the OFF state, and the state shifts to the low probability gaming state. In addition, the time-saving flag that is ON in the time-saving gaming state is changed to the OFF state, and the remaining number of games M indicating the remaining number of games in the time-saving gaming state is initialized to the numerical value "0", and the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state. do.

Although described in detail later, the time-saving flags include a first time-saving flag that is turned on in the first time-saving game state, a second time-saving flag that is turned on in the second time-saving game state, and a time-saving flag that is turned on in the third time-saving game state. It includes a third time saving flag that becomes the state. In the jackpot initialization process, all time saving flags are changed to the OFF state. Further, the remaining number M of time-saving game states is stored in separate counters for each time-saving game state. Specifically, the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-saving gaming state, and the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving gaming state are stored separately. In the jackpot initialization process, all remaining times M are initialized to the numerical value "0".

In the jackpot initialization process, the above-mentioned cumulative number m (number of hits) is initialized. In addition, in the third embodiment, the cumulative number m is not initialized in principle except at the time of clear operation processing by operating the clear button described above or when a jackpot game is started. For example, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n, a transition is made to the second time-saving game state, but the cumulative number of times m is not initialized. Further, the cumulative number m is not initialized even when winning the third time saving or winning the small hit. Although details will be described later, in the above configuration, the number of times that the second time-saving game state can be shifted to is one in the period from the current jackpot game to the next jackpot game.

After executing the jackpot initialization process, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot start preparation process (S1239). In the jackpot start preparation process, for example, the opening pattern of the jackpot openings (16, 17) in the jackpot game is determined according to the special symbol (type of jackpot). After that, the main CPU 111 sets an opening specification command corresponding to the type of jackpot in the performance transmission data storage area (S1240), sets an opening time according to the type of jackpot (S1241), and performs special symbol stop processing. finish.

In step S1236 described above, if it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped in the current game is not a jackpot symbol (S1236: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol that has stopped is a small prize symbol (S1242). ). When the small hit symbols have stopped (S1242: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special pattern special electric processing data to "4" (S1243), and ends the special symbol stop processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol that stopped in this game is not a small hit symbol (S1242: No), that is, if a losing symbol or a time-saving symbol stops, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "0" ( S1244), the special symbol stop processing ends.

FIG. 54(a) is a flowchart of the second time saving transition determination process (S1231 in FIG. 53 described above). As described above, the second time saving transition determination process is executed when the special symbols stop.

When the second time saving transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a jackpot has been won in the current game (S1261). If it is determined that the jackpot has been won (S1261: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the second time saving transition determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won (a loss, a small hit, or a third time saving win) (S1261: No), the main CPU 111 is in a low probability gaming state (a low probability time saving gaming state or a low probability (S1262). If it is determined that the game state is not a low probability game state (it is a high probability game state) (S1261: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the second time saving transition determination process.

If it is determined that the game is in a low probability gaming state (S1262: Yes), the main CPU 111 adds the numerical value "1" to the cumulative number m (S1263). Specifically, the second time saving transition determination process shown in FIG. performed in both cases. Therefore, in a game where the jackpot is not won and the game is in a low probability game state, the cumulative number m is added regardless of the special symbol display device (20, 21) where the special symbol is stopped.

After adding the cumulative number m, the main CPU 111 determines whether the cumulative number m matches the numerical value "800" (S1264). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of times n (n=800) of activation of the second time-saving game state matches the total number of times m. If it is determined that the cumulative number of times m does not match the number of operations n (S1264: No), the main CPU 111 ends the second time saving transition determination process.

If it is determined that the cumulative number m matches the number of operations n (S1264: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "1000" as the remaining number M2 of the second time-saving game state (S1265). After storing the initial value of the remaining number of times M2, the main CPU 111 updates the second time saving flag to the ON state (S1266), and ends the second time saving transition determination process.

In the third embodiment, in the game after the second time-saving game state is activated, the cumulative number of times m is continuously updated from the number of times of operation n. Specifically, the cumulative number of times m is not initialized in principle except when a clear operation is performed by operating the clear button described above or when a jackpot game is won. In the above configuration, during the period from the end of the current jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, it is determined that the cumulative number of times m matches the number of operations n only once. That is, in the period from the end of the current jackpot game until the start of the next jackpot game, the number of times that the second time-saving game state can be shifted is one.

FIG. 54(b) is a flowchart of the third time saving transition determination process (S1232 in FIG. 53 described above) executed by the main CPU 111. The third time saving transition determination process is executed immediately after the second time saving determination process described above. When the third time-saving transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current game is in a low probability non-time-saving game state (S1281). If it is determined that the state is not a low probability non-time saving gaming state (S1281: No), the main CPU 111 ends the third time saving transition determination process.

If it is determined that it is a low probability non-time saving game state (S1281: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether the special symbol stopped in the current game is the special symbol J1 (time saving symbol) (S1282). . When it is determined that the special symbol J1 has been stopped (S1282: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "100" as the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state (1S283).

When it is determined that the special symbol J1 has not been stopped (S1282: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether the special symbol J2 (another time-saving symbol) has been stopped (S1284). If it is determined that the special symbol J2 has not been stopped (S1284: No), that is, if it has been determined that neither of the time-saving symbols (J1, J2) has been stopped, the main CPU 111 ends the third time-saving transition determination process. .

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol J2 has been stopped (S1284: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "1000" as the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state (S1285). After storing the initial value of the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving game state in step S1283 or step S1285 described above, the main CPU 111 changes the third time-saving flag to the ON state (S1286). After that, the main CPU 111 ends the third time saving transition determination process.

FIG. 54C is a flowchart of the time saving end determination process (S1234 in FIG. 53 described above) executed by the main CPU 111. In the time-saving end determination process, when the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends, the time-saving flag (first time-saving flag) corresponding to the time-saving game state is established. , the second time saving flag, and the third time saving flag) are changed to the OFF state. Note that, as described above, when the jackpot game is started, all the time saving flags are uniformly changed to the OFF state (see S1238 in FIG. 53 described above).

When the time saving end determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether the first time saving flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the first time saving game state is in effect (S1301). If it is determined that the first time saving flag is not in the ON state (S1301: No), the main CPU 111 moves the process to step S1305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first time-saving flag is in the ON state (S1301: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving gaming state (S1302). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times M1 has been subtracted to the numerical value "0" (S1303).

If the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M1 is a numerical value of "0" (S1303: Yes), the main CPU 111 turns off the first time saving flag and advances the process to step S1305 (S1304). That is, the first time saving game state is ended and the process advances to step S1305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times M1 is not the numerical value "0" (S1303: No), the main CPU 111 skips step S1304 and moves the process to step S1305.

In step S305, the main CPU 111 determines whether the second time-saving flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the second time-saving game state is in effect. If it is determined that the second time saving flag is not in the ON state (S1305: No), the main CPU 111 shifts the process to step S309. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second time saving flag is in the ON state (S1305: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times M2 in the second time saving gaming state (S1306). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times M2 has been subtracted to the numerical value "0" (S1307).

If the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M2 is the numerical value "0" (S1307: Yes), the main CPU 111 turns off the second time saving flag (S1308) and advances the process to step S1309. That is, the second time saving game state is ended and the process advances to step S1309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times M2 is not the numerical value "0" (S1307: No), the main CPU 111 skips step S1308 and moves the process to step S1309.

In step S1309, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the third time-saving flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the game is in the third time-saving game state. If it is determined that the third time saving flag is not in the ON state (S1309: No), the main CPU 111 ends the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the third time saving flag is in the ON state (S1309: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times M3 in the third time saving gaming state (S1310). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times M3 has been subtracted to the numerical value "0" (S1311).

If it is determined that the remaining number of times M3 is the numerical value "0" (S1311: Yes), the main CPU 111 turns the third time saving flag into the OFF state (S1312), and ends the time saving end determination process. That is, the third time-saving game state is ended and the time-saving end determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times M3 is not the numerical value "0" (S1311: No), the main CPU 111 skips step S1312 and ends the time saving end determination process.

In addition, the remaining number of times M (1, 2, 3) is subtracted both when the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 stops and when the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 stops. Ru. That is, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is subtracted regardless of the type of special symbol display device that is variably displayed in the current game.

FIGS. 55(a), 55(b), and 55(c) are simulated views of screens displayed on the image display device 31 in each game of the third embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 55(a) is a simulated diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. Further, FIG. 55(b) is a mock diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the low probability time saving game state. FIG. 55(c) is a mock diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the high probability time saving game state. The image display device 31 of the third embodiment displays production symbols GA (1 to 3), pending images GB (1, 2), fourth symbols GC (1, 2), and pending number images GD (1, 2) in each game. 2) and various images including the small pattern Ga are displayed (same as the first embodiment).

The performance pattern GA of the third embodiment includes a performance pattern GA1 (see FIG. 55(a)), a performance pattern GA2 (see FIG. 55(b)), and a performance pattern GAw3 (see FIG. 55(c)). The performance symbol GA1 is displayed in a low probability non-time saving game state. Further, the performance symbol GA2 is displayed in a low probability time saving game state. In this embodiment, a common effect pattern GA2 is displayed in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state. The performance symbol GA3 is displayed in a high probability time saving game state. In addition, in this embodiment, although the performance symbols GA are different between the low probability time saving game state and the high probability time saving game state, the performance symbols GA may be the same in each of the above game states.

In the third embodiment, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. That is, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the first working time saving gaming state, the second working time saving gaming state, the third working time saving gaming state and the high probability working time saving gaming state. Specifically, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a different fourth symbol GC is displayed depending on the gaming state. Further, in the jackpot game, the fourth symbol GC may be displayed.

The reserved number image GD of the third embodiment is common to the low probability non-time saving game state, the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state, similar to the above-mentioned fourth symbol GC. That is, a common pending number image GD is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state, the third time saving game state and the high probability time saving game state. Specifically, a common pending number image GD is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which different pending number images GD are displayed depending on the gaming state. Further, in the jackpot game, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending number image GD is displayed.

When a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops and displays a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot symbol. Further, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning symbol. Similarly, when a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol, and when a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, it is a losing symbol. Stop displaying the symbol combination corresponding to . Furthermore, in principle, when the performance pattern GA is stopped and displayed, the small pattern Ga is stopped and displayed in the same manner as the performance pattern GA. For example, when you win a jackpot and the production symbol GA stops displaying at "7, 7, 7", the small symbol Ga also stops displaying at "7, 7, 7", you win a small hit, and the production symbol GA stops displaying. When the GA stops and displays "7, 5, 7", the small symbol Ga also stops and displays "7, 5, 7", and the third short time is won, and the production symbol GA becomes "7, 9, 7". ” or “7・Time saver (an example of a special symbol described later)・7”, the small symbol Ga is also stopped and displayed at “7・9・7” or “7・Time saver 7”.

In the third embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. That is, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the first working time saving gaming state, the second working time saving gaming state, the third working time saving gaming state and the high probability working time saving gaming state. Specifically, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga may be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, but the first special symbol display Apart from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the device 20, a small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be provided. In that case, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may have a display mode common to the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20, or 1. The display mode may be different from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol display device 20.

As described above, the production symbols GA (1, 2) are different between the low probability non-time saving game state and the low probability time saving gaming state. On the other hand, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state and the low probability time saving gaming state. In the above configuration, when transitioning from a low probability non-time saving gaming state to a low probability time saving gaming state (including the second working time saving gaming state and the third working time saving gaming state), the aspect of the performance symbol GA changes, while the small symbol In other words, the aspect of Ga does not change. Similarly, when transitioning from a low probability time-saving game state to a low probability non-time-saving game state, the mode of the production symbol GA changes, while the mode of the small symbol Ga does not change.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the number of games image GE is displayed as in the first embodiment. The numbers in the game count image GE of the third embodiment are added immediately after the game is started. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the number of the game count image GE is added at the end of the game (substantially at the same time as the cumulative count m is added).

The above game count image GE is displayed after the transition to the low probability non-time-saving gaming state until the end of the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. However, the display of the number of games image GE may be started after the number of games played in the low probability game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 790 times). Moreover, although the number of games image GE of the present embodiment displays the number of games played in the low probability gaming state, it may display the number of games played until the transition to the second time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the displayed number of games is subtracted for each game. Furthermore, the number-of-games image GE may be displayed in a low-probability time-saving gaming state. In addition, although the number of games image GE of this embodiment is in a form that simply shows the number of times, for example, "750 more times until the start of the second time-saving game state", it makes you expect a transition to the second time-saving game state. It may also be configured such that the text is also displayed.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the low probability time saving game state, the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed. The remaining time saving image GJ displays the remaining number of times M in the time saving gaming state. For example, immediately after the first time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "100". Immediately after the second time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "1000". Immediately after the third time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "100" or the number "1000". The number of the remaining time saving image GJ is subtracted by "1" at the start of the game.

Incidentally, gaming machines (so-called "ST machines") in which a high-probability time-saving gaming state ends after a predetermined number of times (for example, "100") have been known. When employing the above ST machine, a configuration may be adopted in which a remaining time saving image GJ displaying the remaining number of high probability time saving game states is displayed. In addition, there is a remaining time saving image GJ (hereinafter referred to as "remaining time saving image GJx") that displays the remaining number of times in the low probability time saving gaming state, and a remaining time saving image GJ (hereinafter referred to as "remaining time saving image GJx") that displays the remaining number of times in the high probability time saving gaming state. In a configuration in which both the remaining time saving image GJx and the remaining time saving image GJy are displayed, the modes of the remaining time saving image GJx and the remaining time saving image GJy may be different. For example, the remaining time saving image GJx displays letters and numbers as shown in FIG. 29(b). Further, similarly to the remaining time saving image GJx, a configuration is assumed in which the remaining time saving image GJy displays characters and numbers. In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the remaining time saving image GJx displays black characters and white numbers, and the remaining time saving image GJy displays white characters and black numbers.

In this embodiment, the background image GHx is displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state (see FIG. 55(a)). Furthermore, the background image GHy is displayed in the low probability time saving game state (see FIG. 55(b)), and the background image GHv is displayed in the high probability time saving gaming state (see FIG. 55(c)). That is, in each of the above game states, the background image GH is different. However, the background image GH may be common to all or some of the above gaming states. For example, the background image GH may be shared between the low probability non-time saving game state and the high probability time saving gaming state.

In the time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game states), when the remaining number of times M becomes less than or equal to a predetermined number of times (for example, five times), the remaining number of times M is highlighted and displayed. For example, it is preferable to have a configuration in which, when the remaining number M is subtracted to 5, a message "5 remaining!" is displayed approximately in the center of the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the low probability time-saving game state, the right-hand hitting image Gsy is displayed. As described above, in the time saving game state (first to third time saving game states), the right hand lamp 28 instructs the player to play right. The right-handed player image Gsy is displayed during the period in which the right-handed player is instructed by the right-handed player lamp 28. Further, the right-handed hitting image Gsy is not displayed during a period when right-handed hitting is not instructed by the right-handed hitting lamp 28.

Specifically, the right-hand hitting image Gsy is continuously displayed from the start of the opening period of the jackpot game to the period after the start of the first time-saving game state. In addition, the right-handed image Gsy starts to be displayed from the time when the cumulative number m reaches the number of operations n (the n-th losing symbol is stopped and displayed) and the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the right-handed image Gsy starts to be displayed from the time when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed and the game shifts to the third time-saving game state. In addition, during the period when right-handed hitting is instructed by the right-handed hitting lamp 28, when a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach) is executed, the right-handed hitting image Gsy may be temporarily hidden. However, during the period in which the right-handed game image Gsy is temporarily hidden, a lamp controlled by the sub CPU 121 or an image different from the right-handed game image Gsy is configured to instruct that the right-handed game should be played. is suitable.

The pending image GB includes a pending image GB1 (see FIG. 55(a)) and a pending image GB2 (see FIG. 55(b) and FIG. 55(c)). The pending image GB1 is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area (from the first storage section to the fourth storage section) or the second special symbol pending storage area (from the first storage section to the fourth storage section) in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. is displayed when the above-mentioned random number value (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "judgment information") is stored. The pending image GB2 is displayed when determination information is stored in the second special symbol pending storage area in the low probability time saving game state and the high probability time saving gaming state.

The pending image GB1 is displayed in areas R11 to R14 and areas R21 to R24 of the image display device 31. For example, when the determination information is stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area (when the first reservation number is added to the numerical value "1"), reservation image GB1 is displayed in area R11. Similarly, when the determination information is stored in the second storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation image GB1 is displayed in the area R12, and when the determination information is stored in the third storage area, the reservation image GB1 is displayed in the area R13. When the pending image GB1 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the fourth storage section, the pending image GB1 is displayed in the area R14. Also, when the determination information is stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation image GB1 is displayed in the area R21, and when the determination information is stored in the second storage section, the reservation image GB1 is displayed in the area R22. When the image GB1 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the third storage section, the pending image GB1 is displayed in the area R23, and when the determination information is stored in the fourth storage section, the pending image GB1 is displayed in the area R24. be done.

In the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the determination information is stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the area R0. Further, when the first special symbol display device 20 starts to fluctuate and the above-described shift process is executed, each pending image GB1 from the area R11 to the area R14 is moved to the adjacent area R on the left and displayed. Similarly, when the second special symbol display device 21 starts to fluctuate and the above-mentioned shift process is executed, the reserved image GB1 from the region R21 to the region R24 is moved to the adjacent region R on the left and displayed.

The pending image GB2 is displayed in areas R11 to R14 of the image display device 31. For example, when determination information is stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, reservation image GB2 is displayed in area R11, and when determination information is stored in the second storage section, reservation image GB2 is displayed in area R12. When the image GB2 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the third storage section, the pending image GB2 is displayed in the area R13, and when the determination information is stored in the fourth storage section, the pending image GB2 is displayed in the area R14. be done.

In the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, when the determination information is stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), the pending image GB2 is displayed in the area R0. Further, when the second special symbol display device 21 starts to fluctuate and the above-described shift process is executed, the reserved image GB2 from the region R11 to the region R14 is moved to the adjacent region R on the left and displayed. In addition, in the low probability time saving game state, when the determination information is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, a configuration may be adopted in which the reservation image is displayed.

In the above configuration, the reserved image GB (1, 2) displayed in the area R moves to the area R on the left of the area R every time a game is executed, and is finally displayed in the area R0. . Furthermore, when the game in which the pending image GB is displayed in the area R0 (the game in which the judgment information acquired at the start of the display of the pending image GB is determined in the jackpot determination process) ends, the pending image GB is hidden. . Note that the timing at which the pending image GB displayed in the area R0 is hidden can be changed as appropriate.

The sub CPU 121 of the third embodiment starts displaying the pending image GB when the start prize designation command is received. Furthermore, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not to execute the pending change effect in the pending image GB by referring to the start winning designation command. Specifically, the special symbol variation pattern includes a variation pattern that executes a pending variation effect. The sub CPU 121 determines to execute the pending variation performance when the variation pattern (winning information) specified from the starting winning designation command is a variation pattern for executing the pending variation performance. If the result of the preliminary determination specified from the starting winning designation command is a jackpot, the pending change effect is more likely to be executed than if the result of the preliminary determination is a loss.

When it is decided to execute the pending change effect, the aspect (for example, color) of the pending image GB changes to a predetermined aspect. For example, FIG. 29(a) described above assumes a specific example in which the reserved image GB in the area R12 is displayed in a special manner, and the reserved image GB in the other area R is displayed in a normal manner.

Specifically, the pending image GB is displayed in a normal mode (for example, white) when the pending change effect is not executed. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the pending change effect, the pending image GB changes to a special mode (for example, blue) at some point in the display period of the pending image GB. The periods at which the held image GB changes to a special mode include the time when the held image GB is moved (shifted) and displayed, during the game before the held image GB moves to area R0, and when the held image GB changes to the special mode. This may occur during the game after moving to area R0.

In the hold change performance, the hold image GB changes to any of a plurality of special modes (in addition to blue, red, gold, and rainbow colors). Further, during the display period of the pending image GB, the mode of the pending image GB may change multiple times (stepwise). For example, when the sub CPU 121 decides to execute the pending change effect, the sub CPU 121 determines in advance the final special mode and the timing (scenario) at which the mode of the pending image GB changes. Specifically, the final special mode and the timing at which the mode of the pending image GB changes is determined according to the result of the preliminary determination and the number of pendings specified from the start winning prize designation command. However, as will be described in detail later, in the third embodiment, a limited period may be provided. During the above restriction period, pending change effects are not determined (restricted).

FIG. 56(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the restriction period. As mentioned above, during the limited period, even if a starting prize is won, the pending change effect is not determined. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" from the start of the game (at the start of special symbol fluctuation) when the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "797". The limit period is until the end of the game (when the special symbol fluctuation stops). That is, the limited period is from the start of the game four times before the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state to the start of the second time-saving game state. As described above, the upper limit of the first reservation number is four. Therefore, the above-mentioned limited period can be said to be a period during which determination information that is held in the first special symbol holding storage area until the second time-saving game state can be obtained among the low-probability non-time-saving game states.

Let us assume a comparison example in which a suspension change performance can be determined when determination information to be reserved in a first special symbol retention storage area until a second time-saving game state is acquired in a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the above comparison example, at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state, the player may be able to grasp that the determination information for determining a jackpot is stored in the first special symbol retention storage area. Therefore, in the comparison example above, by maintaining the second pending number at the numerical value "1" or more in the second time-saving game state, the player can play the jackpot game while knowing that the right to play the jackpot game is retained. You can play the game without causing it to occur intentionally. In the above comparison example, a problem may arise in which the gambling nature of the player is significantly aroused.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is provided in which a pending change effect is not determined during a limited period during which determination information for suspending until the second time-saving gaming state can be acquired among the low probability non-time-saving gaming states. Adopted. In addition, even during the limit period, the main CPU 111 generates a starting prize designation command by the preliminary determination process, and the starting winning prize designating command is received by the sub CPU 121 side. Therefore, the restriction period is a period during which the sub-CPU 121 can determine the pending change performance, but it can also be said to be a period in which the determination of the pending change performance is intentionally restricted. With the above configuration, at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state, the player cannot grasp from the pending image GB that the determination information for determining a jackpot is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area. Therefore, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

FIG. 56(b-1) is a diagram for explaining the probability that a pending change effect is determined. Specifically, FIG. 56 (b-1) shows that when a starting winning is made in a period other than the limited period (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "non-limited period") in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the pending change The probability that the performance will be decided is shown. Further, FIG. 56(b-1) shows the probability that the pending change performance will be executed for each result of the preliminary determination at the time of starting winning.

In the non-restricted period of the third embodiment, the pending change performance is more likely to be determined when the preliminary determination result is the third time reduction compared to when the preliminary determination result is a loss. Specifically, when the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction, the pending change performance is determined with a probability of about 20%. Furthermore, if the preliminary determination result is a loss, the pending change performance will be determined with a probability of approximately 5%. However, if the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction, the pending change effect is definitely determined, and if the result of the preliminary determination is a loss, the pending change effect may not be determined.

In the non-limited period of the third embodiment, the pending change performance is more likely to be determined when the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot compared to the case where the preliminary determination is the third time reduction. Specifically, if the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of approximately 50%. However, if the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot, the pending change effect is definitely determined, and if the result of the preliminary determination is the third time saving, the pending change effect may not be determined. If the preliminary determination result is a small hit, the pending change performance is determined with a probability of about 10%.

By the way, as described above, the main control board 110 transmits a cumulative number command that can specify the cumulative number m to the production control board 120. From the above cumulative number of times command, the sub CPU 121 can specify the number of games until the second time saving gaming state is activated. For example, assume that the number of games until the second time-saving game state is activated is "X times". Further, assume that the number of reservations is X or more. In the above case, the sub CPU 121 can understand that the jackpot will not be won in the X number of games by analyzing the starting winning designation command. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 121 can know in advance that the second time-saving gaming state will be activated in the game after X times from the cumulative number of times command and the starting winning designation command.

Therefore, the pending image GB displayed in the area R0 in the game transitioning to the second time saving game state may be configured to be able to change to a special mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. As the special aspect of the hold image GB, for example, a hold image GB that displays a message such as "Start of second time saving?" can be considered. However, with the above configuration, when the pending change performance is determined to indicate a transition to the second time-saving gaming state, some players may not be able to indicate that the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot. Suggesting this may lead to misunderstandings.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, the hold change performance that notifies the player of transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state is not executed. Specifically, the hold change effect does not include the effect in which the hold image GB changes in the above-mentioned special mode. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the reserved image GB can be changed in a special manner.

FIG. 56(b-2) is a diagram for explaining the probability that a pending change effect is determined during the limited period. As shown in FIG. 56(b-2), during the limited period, the pending change performance is not determined regardless of the result of the preliminary determination. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending change effect can be determined with a lower probability during the restricted period than during the non-restricted period. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending change performance can be determined only when the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot during the limited period. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending change effect can be determined only when the result of the preliminary determination is other than a loss during the limited period.

FIG. 56(c) is a mock diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 during the restriction period. During the limited period, the various images described using FIG. 29(a) above are displayed. Furthermore, during the limited period, the emphasized image GZ is displayed as shown in FIG. 30(c). The emphasis image GZ is an image for emphasizing the remaining number of games until the transition to the second time-saving game state.

The above emphasized image GZ is displayed, for example, near the approximate center of the screen of the image display device 31. Further, the emphasized image GZ is displayed immediately after the game starts, and becomes hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed. Specifically, the display time of the emphasized image GZ is shorter than the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be determined in the limited period. With the above configuration, the inconvenience of the highlighted image GZ displayed in the current game being displayed when the next game starts is suppressed.

Specifically, in the game three times before the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "797"), the emphasized image GZ that displays the message "3 more times" is displayed. Is displayed. Similarly, in the game that is played two times before the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number of times m is added to the numerical value "798"), the emphasized image GZ that displays the message "Two more times" is displayed. , In the game that is one game before the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "799"), an emphasized image GZ that displays the message "One more time" is displayed, and the In a game that shifts to the 2-hour saving game state (a game in which the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800"), an emphasis image GZ displaying a message "LAST" is displayed.

However, the game in which the emphasized image GZ is displayed is not limited to the above example. Specifically, the emphasized image GZ may be displayed from the game before the limited period starts. For example, it may be configured such that the emphasized image GZ is displayed from the game five times before the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state. Alternatively, the emphasized image GZ may be displayed starting from the game after the limited period has started. For example, it may be configured such that the emphasized image GZ is displayed only in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state. In addition, the emphasized image GZ of the third embodiment is configured such that a message that makes the transition to the second time-saving game state is expected is also displayed, such as "3 more times until the start of the second time-saving game state". You can also use it as

According to the above-mentioned emphasized image GZ, there is an advantage that the player can easily understand that the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state. In addition, in a configuration in which the pending change performance is executed during the period in which the emphasized image GZ is displayed, it is assumed that there will be an inconvenience in which the player pays attention to the held change performance and not the emphasized image GZ. In the configuration of the third embodiment, a limited period is provided immediately before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, and the pending change effect is not executed during the period in which the emphasized image GZ is displayed. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed, and the effect that it becomes easier for the player to understand that the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state is particularly remarkable. Furthermore, simply by preventing the pending change effect from being executed during the restriction period, the effect of making it easier for players to understand that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state will be entered can be guaranteed at the minimum, so it is emphasized during the restriction period. The number-of-games image GE that has been displayed since before the limit period may be continuously displayed without displaying the image GZ.

57(a-1) to FIG. 57(a-4) and FIG. 57(b-1) to FIG. 57(b-4) show the period during which the normal symbol display device 22 changes the normal symbol, and It is a figure for explaining the relationship with the period in which the opening/closing door 14b operates (the second starting port 14 is opened). In addition, each of the above figures shows the gaming state at each point in time, in addition to the period in which the normal symbols change and the period in which the opening/closing door 14b operates. Furthermore, each of the above figures shows the number of reservations at each point in time.

As mentioned above, in the non-time saving game state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is about 10 seconds. In addition, in the time saving game state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is about 1 second. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the variation time of the normal symbols in the non-time saving gaming state may be referred to as "variation time Ha". Further, the variation time of the normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state may be described as "variation time Hb". As mentioned above, the fluctuation time Hb of the normal symbols in each time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game state) is common.

In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the total opening time of the opening/closing door 14b when the open symbols (long open symbols, short open symbols) are stopped and displayed is about 4.2 seconds or about 0.2 seconds. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the operating mode (total opening time, number of openings) of the opening/closing door 14b when the opening symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state may be collectively referred to as "operating mode Da." Similarly, in the time saving game state, the total opening time of the opening/closing door 14b when the opening symbols are stopped and displayed is about 5 seconds or about 3 seconds. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the operation mode of the opening/closing door 14b when the open symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state may be collectively referred to as "operation mode Db." As mentioned above, the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b in each time-saving game state is common.

FIG. 57(a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which losing symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-1) assumes a case where the fluctuating display of normal symbols started in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped. In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, FIG. 57(a-1) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops.

In the above specific example of FIG. 57(a-1), the normal symbols are stopped and displayed from the time ta1 when the normal symbols stop until the time ta2 when a wait period (approximately 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Further, the normal symbol storage determination process (see FIG. 36(b)) for starting the next variable display of the normal symbols is executed immediately after time ta2. When the normal symbol storage determination process is executed, the number of reservations is subtracted and a new variable display of the normal symbols is started. In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-1), the gaming state at time ta2 is a low probability non-time saving gaming state. Therefore, the fluctuation time Ha is determined in the normal symbol storage determination process executed immediately after time ta2.

FIG. 57(a-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which losing symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-2) assumes a case where the fluctuating display of normal symbols started in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped, similar to FIG. 57(a-1) above. . In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, the specific example of FIG. 57(a-2) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops. Further, assume that the wait period in which the normal symbols are stopped and displayed ends at time ta2. In the above configuration, the normal symbol storage determination process for starting a new game is executed immediately after time ta2.

The specific example of FIG. 57(a-2) differs from the specific example of FIG. 57(a-1) described above in that the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving gaming state to the low probability time saving gaming state at time tx. Specifically, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n, the state shifts to the second time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, a transition is made to the third time-saving gaming state. The specific example of FIG. 57(a-2) assumes a case where the trigger for transition to the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state is established at time tx.

As shown in FIG. 57(a-2), time tx is before the time (immediately after time ta2) when a new normal symbol storage determination process is executed. Specifically, the time tx is a time point in the middle of the fluctuating display of the normal symbol, which stops at the time ta.

In the third embodiment, even if the transition to the time-saving gaming state is made in the middle of the variable display of normal symbols started in the non-time-saving gaming state, the variable display is continued until the variable time Ha is reached. That is, the variable time Ha determined at the start of the variable display of normal symbols is not changed even if the state shifts to the time-saving gaming state in the middle of the variable display. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 57(a-2), even if the time-saving gaming state is transitioned to during the fluctuating display of normal symbols that stops at time ta1, the fluctuating display continues until the fluctuating time Ha is reached. In the above configuration, since the already determined variation time Ha is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of harming the fairness of the game is suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the normal symbols (long open symbols, short open symbols, lose symbols) determined at the start of the fluctuation are not changed even if the gaming state changes during the fluctuation display. In the above configuration, since the normal symbols that have already been determined are not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of harming the fairness of the game is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-2), in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination obtained in the non-time-saving gaming state is determined. However, the gaming state at time ta2 is a time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the regular symbol lottery (win determination process) is executed with the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the variation time Hb of the time-saving gaming state is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol, and the operating mode Db of the time-saving gaming state is determined as the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b.

FIG. 57(a-3) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which open symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-3) shows a fluctuating display of normal symbols started in a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, similar to FIG. 57(a-1) and FIG. 57(a-2) described above. Assume that the system is stopped. In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, FIG. 57(a-3) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), it is assumed that the opening symbol is stopped and displayed at time ta1, and the opening/closing door 14b changes to the operating state. In addition, in FIG. 57(a-3), the time point ta1 when the opening symbol is stopped and the time point when the opening/closing door 14b enters the operating state are shown to be substantially coincident. However, in reality, after the opening symbol stops and the wait period ends, the opening/closing door 14b becomes activated. That is, the time point when the opening/closing door 14b becomes operational is after the time point ta1. The same applies to FIG. 57(a-4), FIG. 57(b-3), and FIG. 57(b-4), which will be described later. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the time point ta1 at which the opening symbol is stopped and the time point at which the opening/closing door 14b becomes in the operating state substantially coincide with each other.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), the operating mode Da is determined at the start of the normal symbol variation. Further, assume that the operation of the opening/closing door 14b ends at time ta2. In the above case, the normal symbol storage determination process is executed immediately after time ta2, and a new variable display of the normal symbols can be started. In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), the gaming state at time ta2 is a non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the variation time Ha is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol.

FIG. 57(a-4) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which open symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-4) assumes a case where the fluctuating display of normal symbols started in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped, similar to FIG. 57(a-3) described above. In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, FIG. 57(a-4) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops.

However, in the specific example of FIG. 57(a-4), at time tx before the time when the normal symbol storage determination process is newly executed (immediately after time ta2), the low probability non-time saving game state is changed to the low probability time saving game state. This is different from the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3) described above in that the state shifts to the state. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-4) assumes a case where the opening/closing door 14b shifts from the low probability non-time saving gaming state to the low probability time saving gaming state during the period in which the opening/closing door 14b is in the operating state.

In the third embodiment, even if the opening/closing door 14b starts operating in the non-time saving gaming state and shifts to the time saving gaming state, the opening/closing door 14b continues to operate in the already determined operating mode. That is, the operating mode Da of the non-time-saving gaming state determined at the start of the variation of the normal symbols is not changed even if the mode shifts to the time-saving gaming state in the middle of the operation of the opening/closing door 14b. In the above configuration, since the operation mode of the opening/closing door that has already been determined is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of harming the fairness of the game is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 31(a-4), in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination obtained in the non-time-saving gaming state is determined. However, the gaming state at time ta2 is a time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the regular symbol lottery (win determination process) is executed with the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, a variation time Hb is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol, and an operating mode Db is determined as the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b.

FIG. 57(b-1) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which losing symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-1) shows a case where the fluctuating display of normal symbols started in the low probability time saving gaming state (including the second time saving gaming state and the third time saving gaming state) stops at time ta1. Assume that As mentioned above, the normal symbols fluctuate over the fluctuating time Hb in the time saving game state. Furthermore, FIG. 57(b-1) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops.

In the above specific example of FIG. 57(b-1), the normal symbols are stopped and displayed from the time ta1 when the normal symbols stop until the time ta2 when a wait period (about 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-1), the gaming state at time ta2 is a low probability time saving gaming state. Therefore, the fluctuation time Hb is determined in the normal symbol storage determination process executed immediately after time ta2.

FIG. 57(b-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which losing symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57(b-2) assumes a case where the fluctuating display of normal symbols started in the low probability time-saving gaming state stops at time ta1, similar to FIG. 57(b-1) above. do. Furthermore, FIG. 57(b-2) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops.

However, in the specific example of FIG. 57(b-2), at the time tx before the time when the normal symbol memory determination process is newly executed (immediately after the time ta2 when the wait period ends), the low probability time saving game state is This differs from the specific example of FIG. 57(b-1) described above in that it shifts to a low probability non-time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the specific example of FIG. 57(b-2) assumes a case where a transition is made from a low probability time-saving gaming state to a low probability non-time-saving gaming state at time tx during the fluctuating display of normal symbols. In the above case, for example, a case where the remaining number M (2, 3) of the second time saving game state or the third time saving game state is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time tx can be considered.

In the third embodiment, even if the variable display of normal symbols started in the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state in the middle, the variable display is continued until the variable time Hb is reached. That is, the fluctuation time Hb of the time-saving gaming state determined at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols is not changed even if the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state in the middle of the fluctuation display. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 57(b-2), even if the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state during the fluctuating display of normal symbols that stops at time ta1, the fluctuating display continues until the fluctuating time Hb is reached. . In the above configuration, since the variation time of the normal symbols that has already been determined is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-2), in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination acquired in the time-saving gaming state is determined. However, the gaming state at time ta2 is a non-time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the regular symbol lottery is executed with the winning probability in the non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, a variation time Ha is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol, and an operating mode Da is determined as the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b.

FIG. 57(b-3) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which open symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, in FIG. 57(b-3), similar to FIG. 57(b-1) and FIG. 57(b-2) above, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols started in the low probability time saving gaming state is shown. Assume that the process stops at time ta1. Further, FIG. 57(b-3) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), it is assumed that the opening symbol is displayed in a stopped state at time ta1, and the opening/closing door 14b changes to operation. As described above, in the time saving game state, the operating mode Db is determined as the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), it is assumed that the operating state of the opening/closing door 14b ends at time ta2. In the above case, the normal symbol storage determination process for starting a new variable display is executed immediately after time ta2. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), the gaming state at time ta2 is a time saving gaming state. Therefore, the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2 is the fluctuation time Hb.

FIG. 57(b-4) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which open symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. In FIG. 57(b-4), similar to FIG. 57(b-3) above, the number of pending lottery tickets is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops, and the opening/closing door 14b Assume that the operation of TA2 ends at time ta2. However, in the specific example of FIG. 57(b-4), at time tx before the time when the normal symbol memory determination process is executed (immediately after time ta2), the low probability time saving gaming state changes to the low probability non time saving gaming state. This is different from the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3) described above in the point of transition. Specifically, FIG. 57(b-4) assumes a case where the opening/closing door 14b shifts from the low probability time saving gaming state to the low probability non time saving gaming state during the period in which the opening/closing door 14b is in the operating state.

In the third embodiment, even if the opening/closing door 14b starts operating in the time-saving gaming state and shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state, the opening/closing door 14b continues to operate in the already determined operating mode. That is, the operation mode Db of the time-saving gaming state determined at the start of variation of the normal symbols is not changed even if the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state in the middle of the operation of the opening/closing door 14b. In the above configuration, since the operation mode of the opening/closing door that has already been determined is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of harming the fairness of the game is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-4), in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination acquired in the time-saving gaming state is determined. However, the gaming state at time ta2 is a non-time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the regular symbol lottery is executed with the winning probability in the non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, a variation time Ha is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol, and an operating mode Da is determined as the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b.

FIG. 58(a) and FIG. 58(b) are other diagrams for explaining the relationship between the period in which the normal symbol display device 22 changes the normal symbol and the period in which the opening/closing door 14b operates. In addition, each of the above figures shows the gaming state at each point in time, in addition to the period in which the normal symbols change and the period in which the opening/closing door 14b operates (same as in FIG. 31 described above).

FIG. 58(a) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which open symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. In the specific example of FIG. 58(a), it is assumed that a transition is made from a low probability non-time-saving gaming state to a time-saving gaming state at time tx, and then the open symbols are stopped and displayed at time ta. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the operating mode Db immediately after time ta. That is, even if the variable display of the normal symbol display device 22 is started in the non-time-saving gaming state, if the opening symbol has shifted to the time-saving gaming state at the time when it is stopped and displayed, the opening/closing door 14b is controlled by the operating mode Db. Ru.

FIG. 58(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which open symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. In the specific example of FIG. 58(b), it is assumed that the time-saving gaming state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state at time tx, and then the open symbols are stopped and displayed at time ta. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the operating mode Da immediately after time ta. That is, even if the fluctuating display of the normal symbol display device 22 is started in the time-saving gaming state, if the opening symbol has been shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state at the time when it is stopped and displayed, the opening/closing door 14b is controlled by the operating mode Da. Ru.

FIG. 59(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the second time saving game state ends. As described above, the second time-saving game state ends when the 1000 games are played. Further, the second time-saving game state may end before the number of games reaches 1000 if a jackpot game is won. FIG. 59(a) shows a specific example in which the second time-saving game state ends when a jackpot game is won.

FIG. 59(a) shows the period in which the second time-saving game state operates and the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-saving game state at each time point. Further, FIG. 59(a) shows the period in which the first time-saving game state operates and the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving game state. Further, FIG. 59(a) shows the period of the jackpot game (including the opening period and the ending period).

In the specific example of FIG. 59(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game starts at time tb1 in the second time saving game state. Further, the remaining number of times M2 immediately before time tb1 is a numerical value of "800". In the above case, the above-mentioned jackpot initialization process is executed at time tb1. Therefore, the remaining number of times M2 is cleared to the numerical value "0", and the second time-saving game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game ends at time tb2. In the above case, at time tb2, the initial value "100" is set to the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving game state, and the first time-saving game state is started. Further, when the jackpot game ends, the second time saving game state is not restarted.

FIG. 59(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the third time saving game state ends. As mentioned above, the third time-saving game state ends when the game is played 100 times or 1000 times. Further, the third time-saving game state may end upon winning a jackpot game. FIG. 59(b) shows a specific example in which the third time-saving game state ends when the jackpot game is won.

FIG. 59(b) shows the period in which the third time-saving game state operates and the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state at each time point. Further, FIG. 59(b) shows the period during which the first time-saving game state operates and the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving game state. Further, FIG. 59(b) shows the period of the jackpot game (including the opening period and the ending period). .

In the specific example of FIG. 59(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game starts at time tc1 in the third time saving game state. Further, the remaining number of times M3 immediately before time tc1 is a numerical value "10". In the above case, the above-mentioned jackpot initialization process is executed at time tc1. Therefore, the remaining number of times M3 is cleared to the numerical value "0", and the third time-saving game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game ends at time tc2. In the above case, at time tc2, the initial value "100" is set to the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving game state, and the first time-saving game state is started. Further, when the jackpot game ends, the third time saving game state does not restart.

By the way, the first time-saving game state ends after 100 games. Further, when the low probability game state continues for 800 games, a second time saving game state is started. In the above configuration, since the first time-saving game state ends before the second time-saving game state starts, there is no period in which the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state overlap and operate. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a period in which the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state operate overlappingly may occur. For example, a configuration can be considered in which a value greater than "800" can be set as the initial value of the remaining number M1 of the first time-saving game state. In the above configuration, in the low probability game state after the first time-saving game state reaches 800 times, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state operate in duplicate.

In addition, in the time-saving game state including the first time-saving game state, even if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, it does not shift to the third time-saving game state. In the above configuration, there is no period in which the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state operate in duplicate. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a period in which the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state operate overlappingly may occur. For example, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the first time-saving game state, a configuration can be considered in which the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state operate in duplicate in the subsequent period. Although explained in detail below, in the third embodiment, the second time saving game state and the third time saving game state may operate in duplicate.

FIG. 59(c) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state operate in duplicate. FIG. 59(c) shows a period in which the second time-saving game state operates and a period in which the third time-saving game state operates. Further, FIG. 59(c) shows the remaining number M2 of the second time-saving gaming state, the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving gaming state, and the cumulative number m at each time point. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations "800" at time td1 in the third time-saving game state. In the above case, the second time-saving game state operates from time td1. Furthermore, in the specific example of FIG. 59(c), it is assumed that immediately after the second time-saving game state starts, the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state is a numerical value "X" (however, 0<X<1000). do.

As shown in FIG. 59(c), in the period after time td1, both the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state operate. Furthermore, during the period in which both the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state operate, the numerical value "1" is subtracted from each of the remaining number of times M2 and remaining number of times M3 in each game. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to a numerical value "0" at time td2. In the above case, the third time saving game state ends at time td2.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), the remaining number of times M2 (1000-X) at time td2 is equal to or greater than the numerical value "1". In the above specific example, at time td2, the third time-saving game state ends, while the second time-saving game state continues. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), at time td3 after time td2, the remaining number of times M2 is subtracted to the numerical value "0", and the second time-saving game state ends.

In the third embodiment described above, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n, the second time-saving game state is activated even if it is the third time-saving game state. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the second time-saving gaming state does not operate depending on the gaming state in which the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operating times n, the inconvenience that the player is at an excessive disadvantage is suppressed. Further, in the third embodiment, in a period in which two time-saving game states (the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state) operate in duplicate, the remaining number of times in both time-saving game states is subtracted. Therefore, for example, during a period in which two time-saving gaming states operate overlappingly, the subtraction of the remaining number of games in one of the time-saving gaming states stops, and after the other time-saving gaming state ends, the one time-saving gaming state is activated. Compared to the restart configuration, there is an advantage that the inconvenience of the time-saving gaming state being excessively prolonged is suppressed.

In addition, as described above, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the time during which the normal symbol stops and is displayed (wait period time), and the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b when winning in the common symbol lottery are changed. This is common to each time-saving game state. That is, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 14b is common in each time-saving game state.

Assume a comparative example in which the opening mode of the opening/closing door 14b is different in each time-saving game state. In the above comparison example, when the time-saving game states overlap, the problem is which opening mode of the time-saving game state should be prioritized. According to the third embodiment, the above problems are suppressed.

In addition, in the above comparison example, if, after the time-saving game states overlap, one time-saving game state ends and the other time-saving game state continues, a configuration is adopted in which the opening mode of the opening/closing door 14b changes. Assume that For example, in the above comparison example, assume that time-saving game state A (opening mode is opening mode KA) and time-saving gaming state B (opening mode is opening mode KB) overlap. Furthermore, in the above case, during the period in which the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B overlap, the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the opening mode KA of the time-saving game state A. Furthermore, it is assumed that after the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B overlap, the time-saving game state A ends and the time-saving game state B continues. In the above case, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 14b changes from the opening mode KA to the opening mode KB.

In the above comparison example, the opening mode changes even though the time-saving gaming state continues, which may cause some players to feel uncomfortable. According to the third embodiment, the above disadvantages are suppressed. In addition, in the above-mentioned comparison example, after the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B overlap, if the time-saving game state A ends and the time-saving game state B continues, the opening/closing door 14b is closed in the subsequent time-saving game state B. It may also be configured to be controlled in the open mode KA. In the above configuration, since the opening mode does not change when the time-saving game state A ends, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

FIGS. 60(a) to 60(c) are diagrams for explaining the mode (lighting on, turning off) of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state. As described above, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up in the time-saving game state, and turns off when the time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the low probability non-time-saving game state. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 outputs various external information signals to an external device (for example, a hall computer). The above various external information signals include advantageous period signals.

The advantageous period signal changes to the ON state at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the opening period), at the start of the second time-saving game state, and at the start of the third time-saving game state, and then changes to the low probability non-time-saving game state. It is maintained in the ON state until the transition. In other words, the above-mentioned advantageous period signal is turned on in gaming states (jackpot game, low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state) in which it is more advantageous to play with the right hand than with the left hand.

60(a) to 60(c) show the state (ON, OFF) of the advantageous period signal at each point in time. Further, FIGS. 60(a) to 60(c) show the cumulative number of times m at each time point. In addition, when a small winning game is executed in a low probability non-time saving game state, the advantageous period signal may be maintained in an OFF state or may be temporarily turned ON.

FIG. 60(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the mode of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the second time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 60(a), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations "800" at time te1 and the state shifts to the second time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, the advantageous period signal is in the OFF state, and the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off.

In the above specific example of FIG. 60(a), the right-handed lamp 28 starts lighting at time te1. That is, the right-handed lamp 28 starts to light up substantially at the same time as the start of the second time-saving game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, the cumulative number m is determined when the special symbol is stopped (special symbol stop processing), and immediately after that, the second time saving flag is changed to the ON state. The main CPU 111 keeps the right-handed lamp 28 off until the second time-saving flag is turned on (until the special symbol stops), and immediately after turning on the second time-saving flag (almost at the same time), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off. The striking lamp 28 is turned on. Further, the main CPU 111 maintains the advantageous period signal in the OFF state until the second time saving flag is turned on, and changes the advantageous period signal to the ON state immediately after turning on the second time saving flag. The main CPU 111 of the third embodiment turns on the right-handed lamp 28 and turns on the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state. .

In the specific example of FIG. 60(a), it is assumed that 1000 games have been played and the second time-saving game state ends at time te2. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving gaming state is started from time te2. The above time te2 is the time when the special symbols stop in the 1000th game in the second time saving game state. As shown in FIG. 60(a), the right-handed lamp 28 lights up until the special symbol stops in the 1000th game in the second time-saving game state, and then turns off. Further, the advantageous period signal is maintained in the ON state until the special symbol stops in the 1000th game in the second time saving game state, and then changes to the OFF state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the third time saving transition determination process is executed before the time saving end determination process (see FIG. 53 described above). In the above configuration, it is assumed that the time saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state. In the above case, at the time when the third time saving transition determination process is executed, the game is in the second time saving game state (the second time saving flag is in the ON state). In addition, in the third time-saving transition determination process, the game does not transition to the third time-saving game state except in the low probability non-time-saving state. Therefore, even if the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time-saving gaming state, there is no transition to the third time-saving gaming state (the time-saving symbols become invalid).

As can be understood from the above explanation, in the third embodiment, even if the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time-saving game state, the time-saving symbols do not shift to the third time-saving game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), the right-hand hitting lamp 28 goes out, and the advantageous period signal goes into the OFF state. However, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the third time saving transition determination process may be executed after the time saving end determination process. In the above configuration, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time-saving game state, the game then shifts to the third time-saving game state. The main CPU 111 of the third embodiment turns off the right-handed lamp 28 and turns off the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 when the second time-saving game state ends. .

FIG. 60(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the mode of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the third time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that the time-saving symbols stop at time tf1 and transition to the third time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 60(c), in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state before shifting to the third time-saving gaming state, the advantageous period signal is in the OFF state, and the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off.

In the above specific example of FIG. 60(b), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned on at time tf1. That is, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up substantially at the same time as the start of the third time-saving game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, when the special symbol is stopped (special symbol stop processing), it is determined whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped, and immediately after that, the third time saving flag is changed to the ON state. . The main CPU 111 keeps the right-handed lamp 28 off until the third time-saving flag is turned ON (until the special symbol stops), and immediately after turning the third time-saving flag ON (almost at the same time), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off. The striking lamp 28 is turned on. Further, the main CPU 111 maintains the advantageous period signal in the OFF state until the third time saving flag is turned on, and changes the advantageous period signal to the ON state immediately after turning on the third time saving flag. Incidentally, when the main CPU 111 shifts to the third time-saving game state, even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0, the main CPU 111 lights up the right-handed lamp 28 and turns on the advantageous period signal.

In the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that the special symbol J1 among the time-saving symbols is stopped and displayed at time tf1. In the above case, the initial value of the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state is "100 times". Further, in the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that the game has been played 100 times and the third time-saving game state ends at time tf2. Furthermore, in the specific example of FIG. 60(b), at time tf2 when the 100th game in the third time-saving game state ends, if the cumulative number of times m is not the numerical value "1000" (the trigger for shifting to the second time-saving game state is Assuming that the case does not hold true. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving gaming state is started from time tf2. The above time point tf2 is the time point when the special symbols (excluding the jackpot symbols) have stopped in the 100th game in the third time-saving game state.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 60(b) above, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up until the special symbol stops in the 100th game in the third time-saving game state, and then turns off. Further, the advantageous period signal is maintained in the ON state until the special symbol stops in the 100th game of the third time saving game state, and then changes to the OFF state.

In the third embodiment, in the same way as when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time-saving game state, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the last game of the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Without shifting to the gaming state (transferring to the low probability non-time saving gaming state), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off and the advantageous period signal is turned off. In addition, at the time when the third time-saving game state ends, the main CPU 111 turns off the right-handed lamp 28 and turns off the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0.

FIG. 60(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the mode of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the third time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 60(c), similarly to FIG. 60(b) described above, it is assumed that the special symbol J1 (time saving symbol) stops at time tg1 and shifts to the third time saving game state. However, in the specific example of FIG. 60(b) described above, it is assumed that the transition opportunity to the second time-saving gaming state is not established at time tf2 when the third time-saving gaming state ends, but in the example of FIG. 60(c), In a specific example, it is assumed that a transition opportunity to the second time-saving gaming state is established.

Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 60(c), the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "1000" at time tg2, which is the end of the final game in the third time-saving game state. In the above specific example, immediately before the third time saving flag changes to the OFF state in the time saving end determination process, the second time saving flag changes to the ON state in the second time saving transition determination process. Further, in the time saving end determination process immediately after the second time saving transition determination process, the third time saving flag changes to the OFF state. In the above case, there is no period in which both the second time saving flag and the third time saving flag are in the OFF state before and after time tg. Therefore, before and after time tg2, the right-handed lamp 28 is maintained in a lit state, and the external information signal is maintained in an ON state.

Note that the advantageous period signal may be configured to temporarily change to the OFF state immediately after time tg2. With the above configuration, even if the second time-saving game state starts at the end of the third time-saving game state, it can be grasped from the advantageous period signal that the third time-saving game state has ended. Further, it may be configured such that when the third time-saving game state ends and the second time-saving game state starts, a notification to the effect that the right-handed game should be continued may be provided. In the above configuration, it is substantially notified that the third time-saving game state has ended and that the second time-saving game state is starting. Further, when the third time-saving game state ends during the second time-saving game state, it may be configured to notify that the player should continue playing right-handed.

FIGS. 61(a-1) to 61(a-3) are diagrams for explaining each image displayed when the time-saving gaming state is started. 61(a-1) to FIG. 61(a-3) show the effects executed at each point in time, the period during which the effect pattern GA is displayed, and the background image displayed on the image display device 31 at each point in time. GH is shown.

In the third embodiment, when the time-saving game state is started, a rush image GT, a prevention image GQ2, and a warning image GQ2, which will be described later, are displayed. The entry image GT is an image for notifying that the time-saving gaming state is started (see FIG. 61(b-1) to FIG. 61(b-3) described later). The prevention image GQ2 is an image displayed to prevent a player from forgetting to take out a card (membership card, visitor card) inserted into a gaming device (see FIG. 61(b-1) described later). Further, the warning image GQ2 is an image for warning against game dependence (see FIG. 61(b-2) described later). 61(a-1) to FIG. 61(a-3) show periods during which the entry image GT, prevention image GQ2, and warning image GQ2 are displayed.

FIG. 61(a-1) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the first time-saving game state among the time-saving game states is started. In addition to each image displayed after transitioning to the first time-saving game state, FIG. 61(a-1) also shows each image displayed in the jackpot game before transitioning to the first time-saving game state. As described above, the jackpot game includes an "opening period," a "round period," and an "ending period." In the specific example of FIG. 61(a-1), it is assumed that the ending period of the jackpot game starts at time th1 (the round period ends), and the ending period ends at time th2.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), during the round period of the jackpot game, a jackpot performance is executed. In the jackpot performance, for example, a predetermined moving image is displayed. Furthermore, in the jackpot performance, a jackpot background image among the background images GH is displayed. The jackpot background image is, for example, an image corresponding to the above-mentioned moving image.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), the performance symbols GA are not displayed in the jackpot game. Further, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD are not displayed. However, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD may be displayed while the performance symbol GA is hidden. During the round period after the jackpot game, the entry image GT, prevention image GQ2, and warning image GQ2 are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), in the ending period of the jackpot game (period from time th1 to time th2), a time-saving rush effect is executed. In the time-saving entry effect, the entry image GT is displayed to inform that the game will move to the time-saving game state (in the specific example of FIG. 61(a-1), the first time-saving game state). In the above-described time-saving entry effect, the entry background image GHz is displayed among the background images GH.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned prevention image GQ2 and warning image GQ2 are displayed during the period in which the time-saving rush effect is executed. Specifically, the prevention image GQ2 is displayed immediately after the time-saving rush effect is started. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the time-saving rush effect, a warning image GQ2 is displayed in place of the prevention image GQ2. The above warning image GQ2 is hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Note that the period during which the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are displayed is not limited to the above example. For example, the warning image GQ2 may be displayed during (all or part of) the display period of the prevention image GQ2. Moreover, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 may be displayed immediately after the start of the first time-saving game state, or the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 may be displayed immediately before the end of the first time-saving game state.

When the ending period of the jackpot game ends, a first time-saving game state is started and a time-saving performance is executed. As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), when the first time saving game state is started, the effect symbol GA is displayed. Furthermore, when the first time-saving game state is started, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD are displayed, and the time-saving background image GHy is displayed in place of the background image GHz at the time of entry.

FIG. 61(a-2) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the second time saving game state is started. In addition to each image displayed after transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state, FIG. 61(a-2) also shows each image displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state before transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state. shown. In the specific example of FIG. 61(a-2), it is assumed that the state shifts to the second time-saving gaming state at time ti1.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-2), in the low probability non-time saving game state, the normal performance is executed. Specifically, in the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state, a loss variation performance in which losing symbols are stopped and displayed is executed. In addition, in the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state, it may be configured such that a loss variation performance that is different from other low probability non-time-saving game states is executed. In the low probability non-time saving game state, the above-mentioned performance symbol GAx is displayed. Furthermore, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the above-mentioned normal background image GHx is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-2), when the second time-saving game state is started, the above-mentioned time-saving entry effect is executed. When the above-described time-saving entry performance is started, the entry background image GHz is displayed in place of the normal background image GHx, and the entry image GT is displayed. Further, in the above time-saving rush effect, the effect pattern GAy is displayed. Furthermore, in the above-described time-saving rush effect, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the pending number image GD are displayed.

In the third embodiment, the time-saving entry effect is executed regardless of whether or not the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is executed (the presence or absence of the number of reservations at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state). As shown in FIG. 61(a-2), the time-saving effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the time-saving medium effect is executed. The time-saving medium performance is a performance according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, and a time-saving background image GHy is displayed according to the variation mode of the production symbol GA. When the second time-saving game state is activated, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed in the time-saving entry effect and the time-saving medium effect.

In addition, in the third embodiment, in the time-saving entry performance when transitioning to the second time-saving game state, the special symbols may be displayed in a variable manner, and the performance symbols GA may be displayed in a variable manner. In consideration of the above circumstances, a configuration may be adopted in which the time-saving background image GHy of the time-saving medium performance is displayed in the time-saving rush performance. As understood from the above description, the "background image" displayed when transitioning to the "second gaming state" of the present invention is a concept that includes both the entry background image GHz and the time-saving background image GHy.

FIG. 61(a-3) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the third time saving game state is started. In addition to each image displayed after transitioning to the third time-saving game state, FIG. 61 (a-3) also shows each image displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state before transitioning to the third time-saving game state. shown. In the specific example of FIG. 61(a-3), it is assumed that the state shifts to the third time-saving game state at time tj1.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-3), in the low probability non-time saving game state, the normal performance is executed. Specifically, in the game that shifts to the third time-saving game state, a time-saving transition performance in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is executed. As shown in FIG. 61(a-3), when the third time-saving game state is started, the above-mentioned time-saving entry effect is executed. The above-described time-saving rush effect is executed for a predetermined period of time, for example. When the above-described time-saving entry performance is started, the entry background image GHz is displayed in place of the normal background image GHx, and the entry image GT is displayed.

In the time-saving entry performance when the third time-saving game state is started, the performance symbol GAy is displayed. In the above time-saving rush performance, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the pending number image GD are displayed, and the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed. In the third embodiment, the time-saving entry effect is executed regardless of whether or not the first game in the third time-saving gaming state is executed (the presence or absence of a pending number at the time of transition to the third time-saving gaming state).

By the way, the time-saving entry effect when the first time-saving game state is started is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is less necessary to display the production symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD. On the other hand, the period during which the time-saving rush performance is executed when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is started is not the ending period of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is highly necessary to display the production symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD.

Let us assume a configuration in which a prevention image GQ2 is displayed in addition to the above-mentioned images (effect image GA, etc.) in the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is started. With the above configuration, the problem that the number of images displayed on the image display device 31 becomes too large tends to occur. Further, the above-mentioned inconvenience may also occur when a configuration is adopted in which the warning image GQ2 is displayed in the time-saving entry effect when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is started.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, the prevention image GQ2 is used in the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state is started and in the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started. A configuration was adopted in which the is not displayed. Furthermore, a configuration is adopted in which the warning image GQ2 is not displayed in the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state is started and in the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started. According to the above configuration, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

In addition, in the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state is started, or in the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started, the small symbol Ga is displayed, and the display of the performance symbol GA is omitted. A configuration may also be used. According to the above configuration, the effect of suppressing the above-mentioned disadvantages is particularly remarkable.

FIG. 61(b-1) and FIG. 61(b-2) are mock diagrams of the screens displayed in the time-saving entry effect when the first time-saving game state is started. Specifically, FIG. 61(b-1) is a simulated diagram of the screen on which the prevention image GQ2 is displayed. Further, FIG. 61(b-2) is a mock diagram of the screen on which the warning image GQ2 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 61(b-1) and FIG. 61(b-2), the entry image GT is displayed on each of the above screens. Furthermore, the right-handed hitting image Gsy is displayed on each of the above screens. In addition, the right-handed image Gsy is displayed on the image display device 31 in the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first time-saving game state.

FIG. 61(b-3) is a mock diagram of the screen displayed in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state starts. As shown in FIG. 61(b-3), in the time-saving entry performance when the second time-saving game state starts, the entry image GT is displayed. In addition, in the above time-saving rush effect, the right-handed image Gsy, the effect symbol GAy, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD are displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 61(b-3), it is assumed that the number of reservations is 0. If the number of reservations is one or more, the above-mentioned reservation image GB is displayed in the time-saving entry effect when the second time-saving game state is started.

Even in the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started, the rush image GT is displayed similarly to the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state is started. In addition, in the above time-saving entry performance, the right-hitting image Gsy, the performance symbol GAy, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, the pending number image GD, and the pending image GB are displayed.

In the third embodiment, various images are displayed on the image display device 31 in addition to the above-mentioned images (entering image GT, etc.) with the operation of the time-saving game state. Each of the other images displayed on the image display device 31 will be described in detail using FIGS. 62 and 63 below.

FIG. 62(a) is a mock diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 after the second time-saving game state is started. As described above, in the second time-saving game state, various images including the right-handed hitting image Gsy are displayed. Further, when the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed hitting start image GR shown in FIG. 62(a) is displayed. The right-handed hit start image GR is displayed after the above-described entry image GT (see FIG. 61(b-3)) is displayed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which all or part of the display period of the right-handed hitting start image GR and the display period of the entry image GT overlap.

The right-handed game start image GR is an image for informing that the game should be played right-handed, similar to the right-handed game image Gsy. However, the right-handed hitting start image GR is displayed larger than the right-handed hitting image Gsy. Further, the right-handed hitting image Gsy is displayed near the upper right end of the screen, whereas the right-handed hitting starting image GR is displayed at approximately the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the right-handed hit start image GR is displayed with priority over the production symbol GAy (on the near side). According to the above-mentioned right-handed game start image GR, it becomes easy for the player to reliably recognize that he should start playing the right-handed game. Further, the right-handed hitting start image GR is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), and then becomes hidden. Furthermore, a predetermined sound is output along with the display of the right-handed hitting start image GR. For example, a voice saying "hit the right hand" is output.

In the third embodiment, the right-hand hitting start image GR is displayed and the sound "Right-handling" is output, regardless of whether or not the game is started immediately after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. That is, even if the number of pending games is 0 at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state, the right-handed game image GR is displayed and the voice "right-handed game" is output. Moreover, even if the number of reservations is 0 at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state, the time-saving background image GHy of the time-saving game state is displayed.

In the second time saving game state, predetermined BGM is output. The output of the above BGM starts with the start of the second time-saving game state, regardless of whether or not the game starts immediately after shifting to the second time-saving game state. However, when the non-gaming period continues for a predetermined time, the volume of the gaming machine 1 is changed to "0" and the BGM becomes inaudible.

In the specific example of FIG. 62(a), it is assumed that the number of reservations is 0 at the time when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the above case, immediately after the second time saving game state is started, the production symbols GA and the small symbols Ga are stopped and displayed. Note that during the period in which the right-handed hitting start image GR is displayed, the effect pattern GA may be hidden (the small pattern Ga is continuously displayed).

When the third time-saving game state is started, as in the case where the second time-saving game state is started, the right-hand hitting image Gsy is displayed, and the right-hand hitting start image GR is displayed, regardless of the presence or absence of the number of reservations. A sound instructing that the game should be played with the right hand is output, BGM for the third time-saving game state starts to be output, and a time-saving background image GHy is displayed. Furthermore, during the period in which the right-handed game start image GR of the third time-saving game state is displayed, the performance symbols GA and the small symbols Ga are displayed. However, immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state, the performance symbol GA and small symbol Ga corresponding to the losing symbol are displayed, whereas immediately after the start of the third time-saving game state, the performance symbol GA corresponding to the time-saving symbol is displayed. and a small pattern Ga are displayed.

FIG. 62(b) is a mock diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 immediately after the second time-saving game state ends and the transition to the low probability non-time-saving game state is made. As shown in FIG. 62(b), immediately after the second time-saving game state ends, the left-handed game image Gsx is displayed. The above-mentioned left-handed game image Gsx is an image that instructs that the game should be played with left-handed game, and is displayed in place of the above-mentioned right-handed game image Gsy. Further, the left-handed game image Gsx is displayed at the same position as the right-handed game image Gsy.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), immediately after the second time-saving game state ends, the left-handed hitting start image GL is displayed. The left-handed game start image GL, like the left-handed game image Gsx, is an image for informing that the game should be played with the left-handed game. However, the left-handed hitting start image GL is displayed larger than the left-handed hitting image Gsx. Further, the left-handed hitting image Gsx is displayed near the upper right end of the screen, whereas the left-handed hitting starting image GL is displayed at approximately the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), the left-handed hit start image GL is displayed with priority over the production symbol GAy (on the near side). According to the left-handed game start image GL described above, it becomes easier for the player to reliably recognize that the game should be started using left-handed games. Further, the left-handed hitting start image GL is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the second time-saving game state ends, and is then hidden. Furthermore, a predetermined sound is output in conjunction with the display of the left-handed batting start image GL. For example, a voice saying "Please return to left-handed batting" is output.

In the third embodiment, regardless of whether the game starts immediately after the second time-saving game state ends, the left-handed hitting start image GL is displayed, and the voice saying "Please return to left-handed hitting" is displayed. Output. That is, even if the number of pending games is 0 at the end of the second time-saving game state, the left-handed game image GL is displayed and the voice "Please return to left-handed game" is output. Furthermore, even if the number of pending games is 0 when the second time-saving game state ends, the normal background image GHx of the non-time-saving game state is displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 62(a), it is assumed that the number of reservations is 0 at the time when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the above case, immediately after the second time saving game state is started, the performance symbols GA and the small symbols Ga are stopped and displayed.

At the end of the third time-saving game state, as well as at the end of the second time-saving game state, the left-handed game start image GL is displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the number of reservations, indicating that the game should be played left-handed. Sound is output and the normal background image GHx is displayed.

FIG. 63(a) is a diagram for explaining the result image GP. The above result image GP is an image that, when a period advantageous to the player ends, displays information regarding profits earned during the period. For example, the number of jackpot games and the total number of prize balls paid out during the period from the first winning jackpot game to the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (the above-mentioned advantageous period) are Displayed on the result image GP.

In the specific example of FIG. 63(a), it is assumed that the player wins the jackpot game three times during the advantageous period and 4515 prize balls are paid out. Note that the number of prize balls displayed by the result image GP of the third embodiment does not include the prize balls that are paid out by winning the game balls in the starting hole (13, 14) and the general winning hole 18. However, the prize balls that are paid out after the game balls enter the general winning hole 18 may be included in the number of prize balls displayed on the result image GP.

FIG. 63(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period during which the result image GP is displayed. In the third embodiment, the result image GP is displayed when the first time saving game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 63(b), it is assumed that the final game in the first time-saving game state starts at time tk1 and ends at time tk3. In the above case, the first time-saving gaming state ends at time tk3, and the state shifts to a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 63(b), it is assumed that the jackpot lottery of the final game in the first time-saving game state is a loss. FIG. 63(b) shows a time tk2 at which the production symbol GAy corresponding to the losing symbol is temporarily stopped in the final game of the first time-saving gaming state.

In the above specific example of FIG. 63(b), the result image GP is displayed immediately after the above-mentioned time tk2. As understood from the above-mentioned FIG. 63(a), during the period in which the result image GP is displayed, the small symbols Ga are displayed and the production symbols GA are hidden. Further, the above result image GP is displayed until the final game in the first time saving game state is completed.

Assume a comparison example in which the result image GP is displayed when the second time-saving game state ends. As described above, the second time-saving game state operates without involving the jackpot game. In addition, in the time-saving game state, game balls do not win in principle in winning holes (first big winning hole 16, second big winning hole 17) other than the starting hole (13, 14) and the general winning hole 18. Therefore, in the comparison example described above, if the jackpot game is not won in the second time-saving game state, the number of jackpot games displayed on the result image GP is "0", and the number of paid out prize balls is "0". ”. When the above result image GP is displayed, some players may experience a problem in which their desire to play the game decreases.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the result image GP is not displayed when the second time-saving game state ends. FIG. 63(c) is a diagram for explaining images displayed before and after the second time-saving game state ends. In FIG. 63(c), it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state ends at time tl and the state shifts to a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 63(c), the above-mentioned result image GP is not displayed before and after the second time-saving game state ends.

Further, the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs also in the comparative example in which the result image GP is displayed when the third time-saving game state ends. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the result image GP is not displayed when the third time-saving game state ends. FIG. 63(d) is a diagram for explaining images displayed before and after the third time-saving game state ends. In FIG. 63(c), it is assumed that the third time-saving gaming state ends at time tm and the state shifts to a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 63(d), the above-mentioned result image GP is not displayed before and after the third time-saving game state ends. In addition, when the second time saving game state and the third time saving game state end, for example, an image displaying a message "Time saving ends" may be displayed.

FIGS. 64(a) to 64(c) are diagrams for explaining the base value counting period in the third embodiment. As described above, in the counting period, the out counter for base value calculation and the prize ball counter for base calculation are added. That is, the base value is updated during the counting period.

FIG. 64(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after the second time-saving game state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the 800th game (variable display of special symbols) in the low probability non-time saving game state is started at time tn1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the 800th game in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. Specifically, it is assumed that the losing symbol is stopped and displayed at time tn2, and the cumulative number of times m reaches the numerical value "800". In the above case, the low probability non-time saving gaming state before time tn2 becomes the counting period. Further, the second time saving game state after time tn2 becomes a non-counting period.

In the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the second time saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the final game in the second time-saving game state is started at time tn3, and losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that at time tn4, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times M2 is subtracted to the numerical value "0". In the above case, after time tn4, the game becomes a low probability non-time saving game state. Furthermore, the counting period is restarted from time tn4.

FIG. 64(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after the third time-saving game state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that a game in which time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in a low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time to1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed at time to2. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving gaming state before the time point to2 becomes the counting period. Further, the third time saving game state after the time point to2 becomes a non-counting period.

In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the third time saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the final game of the third time-saving game state is started at time to3, and the losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that at time to4, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the numerical value "0".

In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m is not the numerical value "800" in the final game of the third time-saving game state. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving game state starts from time to4. Furthermore, the counting period is restarted from time point to4. In the third embodiment, if the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the final game of the third time-saving game state, the measurement period is restarted in the same way as when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the final game of the third time saving game state, the measurement period is restarted after the small winning game ends.

FIG. 64(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the counting period before and after the third time-saving game state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that a game in which time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in a low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time tp1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed at time tp2. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving gaming state before time tp2 becomes the counting period. Further, the third time-saving game state after time tp2 becomes a non-counting period (similar to the above-mentioned FIG. 64(b)).

In the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the third time-saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the final game of the third time-saving game state is started at time tp3, and losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that at time tp4, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the numerical value "0". Furthermore, in the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m in the final game of the third time-saving game state is a numerical value "800". In the above case, the second time saving game state starts from time tp4. That is, the non-counting period continues even after time tp4. In addition, when the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game of the third time-saving game state, the non-counting period continues even if the time-saving symbols or small winning symbols are stopped and displayed in the game. Further, as described above, the first time saving game state is a non-counting period. Similarly to the case where the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game of the third time-saving game state, if the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game of the first time-saving game state, then , the non-counting period continues.

The configurations of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above can also be appropriately adopted in the third embodiment. For example, the timing for updating the number of games image GE in the third embodiment (at the start of the game) may be at the end of the game, as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, the remaining number of games image GN may be displayed together with the number of games image GE.

In the third embodiment, the timing for displaying the remaining number of times image GN can be set as appropriate. For example, a configuration may be considered in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed at the same timing as in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 15(a) to 15(d)). In addition, in the third embodiment, there is a possibility of transitioning to the third time-saving game state before the second time-saving game state is started. In the third time saving game state, the remaining number of times image GN may be displayed or may not be displayed.

In the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which it is suggested that the remaining number of times N is left unchanged. Specifically, the remaining number of times image GN and the stationary notification image GI may be displayed in the third embodiment under the same conditions as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, the table scenario S may be set as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, a normal mode and a last minute mode may be provided. In the third embodiment, when the second time-saving gaming state is started, each screen (M1 to M7) may be displayed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T of the game in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. Further, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the first game in the second time-saving gaming state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table T of the first game in the second time-saving game state is different between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period, each image displayed in the game (such as the shielding image GF) is different from the scenario setting period. The configuration may be different depending on the scenario-unset period. Similarly, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the last game in the second time-saving gaming state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table T of the last game in the second time-saving gaming state is different between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period, each image displayed in the game is different between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. A different configuration may be used. In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the first game after the second time-saving gaming state ends may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T may be different or common between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. In addition, in a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is different between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, it is preferable that the average fluctuation time of the special symbols is shorter in the second time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state. be. Further, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the instant winning effect is more easily executed in the second time saving game state than in the first time saving game state.

In the third embodiment, the area in which the remaining number of times M is displayed may be different or common between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. Further, when the power is turned off/on during the activated period of the third embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which, similarly to the first embodiment, a notification that it is the activated period is provided. Further, in the third embodiment, a second time-saving game state is installed with the same configuration as the first embodiment, the modification shown in FIG. 25(b-1), and the modification shown in FIG. 25(b-2). The configuration may be such that a message indicating that the user is present is displayed.

<Fourth embodiment>
FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b) are diagrams for explaining the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, instead of the above-mentioned starting winning designation command, first information J1 related to the execution of the jackpot game specified by the preliminary determination of the determination information, and a second game state specified by the preliminary determination of the determination information. An information command indicating the second information J2 related to the transition is transmitted from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) to the production control board 120 (sub CPU 121). The above information commands are generated and transmitted by the main CPU 111 when a starting prize is won during a period in which the number of reservations is less than the upper limit value.

FIG. 65(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the first information J1 and the second information J2. For example, when a special symbol determination random number value that is determined to be a "jackpot" is acquired at the time of starting winning, an information command indicating the first information J1 is transmitted to the sub CPU 121. When the sub CPU 121 receives the above first information J1, it can grasp that a jackpot game will be executed thereafter.

Further, when the random number value for special symbol determination that is determined to be a "lose" is acquired at the time of starting winning, an information command indicating the second information J2 is transmitted to the sub CPU 121. The above second information J2 indicates the cumulative number of times m in the game executed by the start winning. When the sub CPU 121 receives the above second information J2, the sub CPU 121 informs that the result of the game executed due to the starting winning that triggered the generation of the second information J2 is a "loss", and that the result of the game in the game is a "loss". The cumulative number m can be grasped. The sub CPU 121 of the second embodiment determines a prefetch effect according to the information (first information J1, second information J2) indicated by the information command. The above-mentioned prefetch effects include specific effects X1 and specific effects X2, which will be described later.

FIG. 65(b) is a diagram for explaining specific effects X1 and specific effects X2. The specific effect X1 is determined by lottery when the sub CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the first information J1. When the specific effect X1 is determined, the aspect (color) of the pending image GB corresponding to the game executed by the starting winning (game winning the jackpot) that is the trigger for generating the information command indicating the first information J1 is changed to the corresponding one. Changes before the start of the game (same as the above-mentioned pending change effect). According to the above configuration, before the game in which the player wins the jackpot, the fact that the player will win the jackpot is notified in advance by the specific performance X1.

The specific effect X2 is determined by lottery when the sub CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the second information J2. Specifically, upon receiving the information command indicating the second information J2, the sub CPU 121 determines that the cumulative number m specified from the second information J2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (for example, a numerical value of "790"). Determine whether or not. If the cumulative number m specified from the second information J2 is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the sub CPU 121 determines the specific performance X2 by lottery. On the other hand, when the cumulative number m specified from the second information J2 is less than the threshold, the sub CPU 121 does not determine the specific effect X2.

When the specific effect X2 is determined, the aspect of the pending image GB corresponding to the game executed by the starting winning, which is the generation trigger of the information command indicating the second information J2, changes before the start of the game (as described above). (Same as pending change performance). According to the above specific performance X2, the player is informed that the number of games until the second time-saving game state is relatively small. Note that the mode of the pending image GB in which the specific effect X1 is executed and the mode of the pending image GB in which the specific effect X2 is executed may be different or may be the same.

In the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when transitioning to the second time-saving game state, a time-saving entry effect is executed to notify that fact. In the time-saving rush effect of the second embodiment, images common to each image displayed in the time-saving rush effect of the first embodiment are displayed. Specifically, in the time-saving entry performance, in addition to the entry image GT, a performance symbol GA, a small symbol Ga, and a fourth symbol GC are displayed. In addition, in the time-saving rush performance in the second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of the performance symbols GA, small symbols Ga, and fourth symbols GC are displayed. The second embodiment described above also provides the same effects as the first embodiment.

<Modified example>
Each of the above forms can be modified in various ways. Specific modes of modification are illustrated below. Two or more aspects arbitrarily selected from the examples below may be combined as appropriate.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the update timing of the numbers in the number of games image GE and remaining number of games image GN can be changed as appropriate. For example, the numbers in the game count image GE and the remaining count image GN may be updated at the start of the game. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the numbers in the game count image GE are updated at the start of the game, and the numbers in the remaining count image GN are updated at the end of the game. Similarly, a configuration may be adopted in which the numbers in the game count image GE are updated at the end of the game, and the numbers in the remaining count image GN are updated at the start of the game.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, in the customer waiting state (see FIG. 19(a)) before the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state, the right It is also possible to have a configuration in which hitting is instructed. For example, the right-handed game image GS1 may be displayed on condition that the touch sensor 11a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11. Alternatively, the right-handed game image GS1 may be displayed on the condition that the touch sensor 11a does not detect that the player has touched the operating handle 11.

(3) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the configuration for notifying that the second time-saving gaming state has been activated can be changed as appropriate. For example, instead of displaying the number of games image GE shown in FIG. 23(c) in the activated period, the actual number of games from the jackpot game may be displayed in the activated period. That is, in the activated period, the number of the number of games image GE may be added and displayed from "1800". In the above configuration, when the number of the number of games image GE is "1800" or more, it is substantially notified that the activation period is over. Note that even when the above configuration is adopted, a configuration in which the number of games image GE is hidden in the second time-saving game state is preferable.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the time to display the stationary notification image GI is not limited to the beginning of the game. Specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the middle of the game or in the final stage of the game. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed when the reach effect is started, or a configuration in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed during the fixed period. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery determines at what point in the game the stationary notification image GI is to be displayed. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the stationary notification image GI is continuously displayed over a plurality of games (for example, 10 times).

(5) In each of the above embodiments, in games where the stationary notification image GI can be displayed (the 51st and 101st games), the stationary notification is always displayed if the predetermined display condition (N≦200) is satisfied. Image GI was displayed. In the above configuration, in a game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed, the stationary notification image GI is displayed on the condition that a predetermined display condition is satisfied and a winner is won in a predetermined lottery. You can also use it as

Further, during a period in which the remaining number of times N is left unchanged, the fixed notification image GI may be displayed regardless of the current value of the remaining number of times N, provided that the lottery has been won. In the above configuration, when the deferral notification image GI is displayed (when deferral is announced), the remaining number of times N may be displayed to directly notify the number of games up to the second time-saving gaming state, or the remaining It may be configured such that the number of games played up to the second time-saving game state is suggested without directly displaying the number of times N. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which it is suggested whether or not the remaining number of times N will be left unchanged.

For example, assume a configuration including a predetermined lamp (hereinafter referred to as a "specific lamp"). The above-mentioned specific lamps are usually lit in a manner according to the current performance. On the other hand, in a predetermined game (for example, the first game after the power is turned on), the first special mode is determined depending on whether the remaining number of times N is left unchanged and the current value of the remaining number of times N. Alternatively, the light may be lit in a second special mode. Specifically, the specific lamp is more likely to be lit in the first special mode or the second special mode when the remaining number of times N is left unchanged compared to when the remaining number of times N is not set. Also, if the remaining number of times N is left unchanged and is less than a predetermined value (for example, the number "200"), the remaining number of times N is left unchanged and is greater than the predetermined value. 2. A specific lamp is likely to light up in a special mode. According to the above configuration, the interestingness of notification as to whether or not the remaining number of times N has been left unchanged is improved.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of types (for example, six types) of setting values with different ball output rates may be provided. Specifically, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can change the setting values of the gaming machine 1 by performing a predetermined setting changing operation. A jackpot determination table is provided for each set value, and when the set value is changed, the probability of winning the jackpot changes.

In the above modification, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect that suggests a setting value (hereinafter referred to as a "suggestive effect") can be executed. However, in a configuration in which it is possible to execute a performance in which one type of setting value is specified, there is a possibility that the gambling spirit of the player will be significantly stimulated. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the suggestion effect, it is reported that there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of a plurality of types of setting values among all the setting values.

For example, assume a configuration in which six types of setting values from setting value "1" to setting value "6" are provided. In the above configuration, there is a suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is more likely to be an odd number (1, 3, 5) than an even number (2, 4, 6), and an even number is more likely to be set than an odd number (2, 4, 6). A possible configuration is to provide a suggestion effect that suggests that the set value is likely to be the same. Further, a suggestion effect may be provided that suggests that the setting value "4-6" (high setting) is more likely than the setting value "1-3" (low setting). Further, a suggestion effect may be provided in which the set value "6" is strongly (but not definitely) determined. When the above modification is adopted, the number of games up to the second time-saving game state is definitely notified by the remaining number of times image GN, whereas the set value is not definitely notified by the suggestion effect. However, in the modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which a suggestion effect in which one set value is determined is executed.

(7) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the time-saving game state to which the game enters after the jackpot game may be changed in accordance with the jackpot symbol as well as the game state in which the jackpot is won. For example, assume a configuration in which a time-saving game state A and a time-saving game state B, which is more advantageous than the time-saving game state A (the number of games played is larger), are provided. In addition, in the above configuration, when winning a jackpot game in a non-time-saving gaming state, the probability is about 99% to shift to the time-saving gaming state A, and the probability is about 1% to shift to the time-saving gaming state B. Furthermore, when winning a jackpot game in the time-saving game state A, the probability is about 50% to shift to the time-saving game state B, and the probability is about 50% to shift to the time-saving game state B. Further, if a jackpot game is won in the time-saving game state B, the game shifts to the time-saving game state B with a probability of about 100%.

Moreover, in the above modification, the most advantageous time-saving game state may be adopted as the second time-saving game state. For example, in the above-mentioned specific example, a configuration may be considered in which the time-saving game state B is adopted as the second time-saving game state. However, with the above configuration, if a jackpot is won just before the start of the second time-saving gaming state, some players may feel dissatisfied. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the above disadvantages are suppressed. A specific example of this configuration will be described below.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a normal mode and a last-minute mode are provided as presentation modes for the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In the last-minute mode of the modified example, a performance that congratulates the winning of the jackpot game that shifts to time-saving gaming state B is executed, while a performance that congratulates that the jackpot game that shifts to time-saving gaming state A wins is not performed. . Furthermore, in the modified example, the effect pattern GA is different between the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode, and the background image GH is also different.

For example, in the normal mode, the remaining number of times image GN is displayed, and in the immediately preceding mode, a special remaining number of times image GNx is displayed in place of the remaining number of times image GN. The special remaining number of times image GNx displays, for example, a message such as "If you endure the remaining time X, you will enter time saving B!" (X indicates the number of games until the second time saving game state). Furthermore, in the immediate mode, an image of a friendly character and an enemy character facing each other is displayed, and in each game, an effect in which each character fights is executed. In the immediately preceding mode of the modification, in a game in which a jackpot is won that moves to the time-saving game state B, an effect in which the ally character wins is executed, and a message saying "Congratulations!" is displayed. On the other hand, in a game in which a jackpot is won that shifts to the time-saving game state A, an effect in which the ally character loses is executed, and a message "Unfortunate" is displayed.

The above-described modifications also provide the same effects as the above-described embodiments. However, in this modification as well, similarly to the above-mentioned embodiments, the variation pattern determination table is not switched in accordance with the number of games played during the scenario unset period. If the above-mentioned effects in the previous mode (effects in which characters fight, etc.) are executed without switching the variation pattern determination table from the normal mode, an inconvenience may arise in that an appropriate time for executing the effects cannot be secured. Therefore, also in the modified example, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the last-minute mode is not provided during the scenario-unset period.

(8) In the first embodiment described above, the fluctuation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the game in the non-time saving game state that transitions to the second time saving game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "transition game") is set during the scenario setting period (Tn2 or Tnc) and the scenario unset period (Tn1). In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state is made different between the scenario setting period (Ts or Tax) and the scenario non-setting period (Tbx). That is, in the first embodiment, at the start of the second time-saving gaming state (including the transition game and the first game of the second time-saving gaming state), the fluctuation pattern determination table that can be referred to is based on the scenario setting period and the scenario not set. We adopted different structures depending on the period.

However, at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, a common variation pattern determination table may be referred to in the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. For example, in a configuration in which the variable pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in a transition game in a scenario-unset period, the variable pattern determination table Tn1 may also be referred to in a transition game in a scenario-set period. In addition, in the above structure, it is sufficient that the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is included in the variation pattern determination table T that can be referred to in the transition game of the scenario setting period, and a configuration may be adopted in which a variable pattern determination table other than the variation pattern determination table Tn1 can be referred to. According to the above configuration, at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, the number of variable pattern determination tables that can be referred to is different between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. It has the advantage of being easy to reduce.

It should be noted that the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a completely common variation pattern determination table that can be referred to at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. According to the above configuration, the effect of reducing the number of variation pattern determination tables is particularly remarkable.

(9) In the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the predetermined number of games in the second time-saving game state is configured to be variable between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. For example, between the scenario setting period (Ts, Tax) and the scenario non-setting period (Tbx), the fluctuation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state is variable.

However, the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a common configuration of a variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the predetermined number of games in the second time-saving gaming state. For example, the variation pattern determination table Tbx that can be referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state may have a common configuration in the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In addition, the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a common variation pattern determination table that can be referenced in the 900th (remaining 100) game of the second time-saving game state, or the last of the second time-saving game state. The variation pattern determination table that can be referenced in the games may be common.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state may be emphasized. For example, in a game where the remaining number of times M is the numerical value "5" or more, the number of the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in white, and in a game where the remaining number of times M is smaller than the numerical value "5", the number of the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in red. is possible. Further, the remaining number of times M at which the emphasis of the remaining number of times M is started may be the same or different between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. For example, in the first time-saving game state (100 games), the number of the remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed in white for games where the remaining number of times M is greater than or equal to the numerical value "5", and the number of the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in white for games where the remaining number of times M is smaller than the numerical value "5". The numbers in the time saving image GJ are displayed in red. On the other hand, in the second time-saving game state (1000 games), the number of the remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed in white for games where the remaining number of times M is the numerical value "10" or more, and the number of the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in white in the game where the remaining number of times M is smaller than the numerical value "10". It is good also as a structure which displays the number of time saving image GJ in red.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, in addition to the opportunity of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot game may be executed when a game ball passes through a specific area. Further, in the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball can win a prize in a specific area in a small winning game (a so-called 1 type 2 type gaming machine may be used). That is, the configuration may be such that when a small hit is won and the game ball lands in a specific area in the small win game, the jackpot game is executed. In the above modification, the remaining number of times N is not initialized when a small hit is won, but the remaining number of times N is initialized when a game ball enters a specific area.

In addition, in this modified example, a high probability game state is not provided, and the probability of winning the jackpot differs between when the game ball wins in the first starting port 13 and when the game ball wins in the second starting port 14. are common. Further, the probability of winning a small hit when a game ball enters the second starting opening 14 is higher than the probability of winning a jackpot, and the winning probability of a small winning when a game ball enters the first starting opening 13 does not result in winning a small winning. Furthermore, in the time-saving gaming state, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 14. With the above configuration, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state.

In the gaming machine of this modification, if the number of reserved second special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "remaining reservation") is one or more at the time the time-saving gaming state ends, in the game after the time-saving gaming state ends. There is also a high probability that you will win a small prize. Specifically, in the non-time-saving gaming state immediately after the time-saving gaming state ends, a jackpot game can be executed with high probability over a maximum of four games.

In the above configuration, the above-mentioned first end effect (see FIG. 45(a)) may be executed during the period in which the game is executed with the remainder pending. In addition, the first end effect is executed during the period in which the game is executed with the remaining time pending immediately after the first time-saving gaming state ends, and in the period in which the game is executed with the remaining time pending immediately after the second time-saving gaming state ends. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the end effect is not executed. That is, "at the end of the second gaming state (at the time of ending)" of the present invention includes a period during which the game is executed with the remaining game on hold. Note that depending on the number of games played in the second time-saving game state, the probability of not winning the jackpot game in the second time-saving game state may be about 0% (the probability of winning is about 100%). In the above case, even if the design is such that the end effect is not executed in the second time-saving game state, it is rare that the final game in the second time-saving game state is executed. Therefore, it is difficult to cause a problem in which the player feels dissatisfied because the end effect is not executed in the final game of the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in the 1st and 2nd type gaming machines, the transition determination process for updating the remaining number of times N (S224 in FIG. 32, S242 in FIG. 35(a)) is the small winning game process, as in the first embodiment described above. A configuration executed after (S187 in FIG. 32) is preferable. According to the above configuration, if the game ball does not enter the specific area in the small hit game process, the remaining number of times N is updated in the transition determination process, while if the game ball enters the specific area, the jackpot game is executed, the transition determination process can be omitted. Further, in the gaming machines of one type and two types, a configuration may be adopted in which the first time-saving game state is transferred to the second time-saving game state via a gap game. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the number of times the gap game is played is four times. Further, in the above-described gap game, it is preferable to have a configuration in which a performance different from the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode is executed.

(12) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when transitioning from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state via the gap game, the above-mentioned left-handed hitting image GL may not be displayed. Specifically, when the game is played according to the normal procedure, the performance mode when moving from the first time saving game state to the second time saving game state via the gap game is the time saving mode B. In the above case, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the left-handed game image GL is not displayed when transitioning to the gap game (non-time-saving game state).

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off in the gap game. Therefore, even if the production mode before and after the gap game does not change in the time saving mode B, it is preferable that the right-handed image GS is hidden in the gap game.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, a process for determining whether or not the start condition for the second time-saving gaming state is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as the "first determination process") and other conditions for the transition of the gaming state (for example, a high The process (hereinafter referred to as "second determination process") for determining whether or not the (starting condition for the probability gaming state) is satisfied may be included in a common module or may be included in separate modules.

By the way, conventionally, in a jackpot game, on the condition that the game ball passes through a specific area in the jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "V winning"), after the jackpot game, a predetermined number of times (for example, A gaming machine (so-called "V-ST machine") that can shift to a high-probability (time-saving) gaming state ("120 times") is known. The present invention may be adopted in the above gaming machines. In the above gaming machine, in each game, a process of updating the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state, a process of determining the remaining number of times N after the update (hereinafter referred to as "first determination process"), and a high probability game state are performed. A process of updating the remaining number of times until the end and a process of determining the remaining number of times after the update (hereinafter referred to as "second determination process") are executed. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the second determination process is executed after the first determination process. Assume a configuration in which the first determination process is executed after the second determination process. In the above configuration, in the high probability gaming state, there is a problem that the remaining number of times N until the second time saving gaming state is updated.

(15) When the present invention is adopted in the above-mentioned V-ST machine, even if the V-win, which is the condition for transitioning to the high-probability gaming state, is not achieved in a jackpot game, the V-win will be made afterwards. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the game mode shifts to a time-saving game state with the same number of games as in the case. For example, in a configuration in which when you win V in a jackpot game, you move to a 120-time high-probability time-saving game state, you can also consider a configuration in which you move to a 120-time low-probability time-saving game state even if you do not win V in the jackpot game. .

In addition, in this modification, it is preferable that the performance mode after the jackpot game is the same regardless of whether or not there is a V prize in the jackpot game. In the above configuration, the performance mode after the jackpot game is the same in the case of transitioning to the high probability time saving gaming state and the case of transitioning to the low probability time saving gaming state. In addition, in the above modified example, each screen that is displayed is the same in the case where the power is cut off and restored in the high probability time saving gaming state and when the power is cut off and restored in the low probability time saving gaming state. , it is preferable to have a configuration in which the production mode after return is common. That is, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the presence or absence of a V win in the immediately preceding jackpot game cannot be detected from the screen before and after the power is turned off. In addition, also in this modification, the player may be able to select the production mode in the time-saving gaming state, similarly to the first embodiment. Furthermore, when a power outage occurs during a jackpot game, or when a power outage occurs during a time-saving game state, the time-saving game state may be controlled to a common performance mode after recovery.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time, the demo screen is displayed. However, when the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed, it is preferable that the demo screen is not displayed.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, at the start of the second time-saving game state, the shielding image GF, the entering image GT, and the right-hand hitting image GS3 (starting image) are displayed. The timing at which the above-mentioned starting image is displayed may be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 66(a) is a diagram for explaining the display timing of the start image in the modified example. FIG. 66(a) shows the period during which each start image is displayed. In addition, FIG. 66(a) shows a transition game that transitions to the second time-saving game state, a fixed period in the transition game, and a period during which the start image is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. It will be done. In FIG. 66(a), the start time tx of the second time saving game state is shown. In the modified example, as in the first embodiment described above, the second time-saving game state is started when the transition game confirmation period ends.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), immediately after the transition game is started, the display of the shielding image GF is started. Moreover, the shielding image GF is continuously displayed until the fixed period starts, and becomes hidden at the start of the fixed period. As shown in FIG. 66(a), the entry image GT is displayed during the transition game confirmation period. Thereafter, when the confirmation period ends and the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the rush image GT is hidden and the right-handed game image GS3 (large right-handed game image GS) is displayed. The above right-handed image GS3 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then becomes hidden.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, the fixed period in each game is approximately 0.5 seconds. If the fixed period of the transition game in this modification is configured to be about 0.5 seconds, there is a problem that the time for displaying the entry image GT is too short. In consideration of the above circumstances, this modification adopts a configuration in which the fixed period is extended in the transition game from the game immediately before the transition game. Specifically, the confirmation period of the transition game is extended to about 5 seconds. According to the above configuration, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

However, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, in order to suppress the inconvenience that harms the fairness of the game, the time for one game (variable period + fixed period) does not change depending on the number of games during the scenario unset period. It was adopted. In consideration of the above circumstances, also in this modification, it is preferable that the fixed period is extended in the transition game in the scenario setting period, while the fixed period does not change in the transition game in the scenario unset period.

FIG. 66(b-1) and FIG. 66(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the display period of the start image in another modification. In the specific example of FIG. 66(b-1) and FIG. 66(b-2), it is assumed that the transition game ends at time tx and the transition to the second time-saving game state occurs. Specifically, FIG. 66(b-1) assumes a case where the number of pending items is one or more at time tx. On the other hand, FIG. 66(b-2) assumes that the number of reservations is 0 at time tx. Although explained in detail below, in this modification, the period during which the start image is displayed changes depending on the presence or absence of the number of reservations at the start time tx of the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 66(b-1), if the number of reservations is one or more at time tx, the first game in the second time-saving game state is started immediately after time tx. In the above case, the right-handed game image GS3 is displayed for a predetermined period of time immediately after the second time-saving game state is started. Thereafter, the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the entry image GT is displayed. The above entry image GT is displayed for a predetermined period of time.

As shown in FIG. 66(b-2), if the number of reservations is 0 at time tx, the customer waiting state is started immediately after the second time-saving game state is started. In the above case, when the customer waiting state starts, the right hit image GS3 is displayed. In this modification, the right-handed game image GS3 is displayed until the customer waiting state ends, and when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed game image GS3 is hidden. Thereafter, the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the entry image GT is displayed. The entry image GT is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As understood from the above description, in the modified example, the timing at which the right-handed image GS3 is displayed changes depending on whether there is a pending number at time tx.

In addition, in the above modification, the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed from the start of the customer waiting state until the second special symbol changes. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of the right-handed hit image GS3 is continued when the first special symbol changes.

FIG. 66(c) is a diagram for explaining the display period of the start image in another modification. In the specific example of FIG. 66(c), it is assumed that the transition game ends at time tx and transitions to the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the above specific example, it is assumed that the number of reservations at time tx is 0. As shown in FIG. 66(c), in the modification, the shielding image GF is displayed in the transition game, and then the entry image GT is displayed. Further, when the transition game ends and the customer waiting state starts, the right-handed game image GS3 is displayed.

In addition, at the start time tx of the second time-saving game state, if the number of pending games is one or more, a customer waiting state is established from the end of the transition game until the start of the first game of the second time-saving game state. do not have. In the above case, there is a problem that the right-handed image GS3 cannot be displayed. Considering the above circumstances, in this modified example, if the number of pending items is 1 or more at the start time tx of the second time-saving gaming state, the configuration is designed to invalidate the pending item (set the number of pending items to 0). May be adopted. In the above configuration, the customer waiting state is always started at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed. Note that the configuration in which the number of reservations is set to 0 at the start of the second time-saving gaming state is not limited to this modification, but may be adopted in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and other modifications.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed game image GS3 is hidden. In addition, in the above modification, the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed from the start of the customer waiting state until the second special symbol changes. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of the right-handed hit image GS3 is continued when the first special symbol changes.

Furthermore, the timing at which the start image is displayed is not limited to the above modification. For example, it may be configured such that the shielding image GF and the entry image GT are displayed in the transition game, and the right-handed image GS3 is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. Similarly, the shielding image GF is displayed in the transition game, then the right-handed image GS3 is displayed during the confirmation period of the game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. It may also be a configuration. It may be configured such that the entry image GT is displayed in the transition game, and then the shielding image GF and the right-handed image GS3 are displayed during the confirmation period of the game or in the customer waiting state. The entry image GT may be displayed in the transition game, then the shielding image GF may be displayed during the confirmation period of the game or in the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. good.

The shielding image GF, the entering image GT, and the right-hand hitting image GS3 may be displayed during the transition game confirmation period or customer waiting state. It may be configured such that the shielding image GF and the right-handed image GS3 are displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT is displayed during the first game of the second time-saving game state. It may be configured such that the shielding image GF and the entry image GT are displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. It may also be configured such that the shielding image GF is displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT and the right-handed image GS3 are displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. It may be configured such that the rush image GT and the right-handed image GS3 are displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the shielding image GF is displayed during the first game of the second time-saving game state.

It may be configured such that the right-handed image GS3 is displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the rush image GT and the shielding image GF are displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. It may be configured such that the entry image GT is displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 and the shielding image GF are displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, in each of the above modified examples, the display order of the start images displayed in the transition game, the display order of the start images displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the display order of the start images displayed in the second time-saving game state, The display order of the start images to be displayed may be changed as appropriate.

In the above modification, two or more starting images may be displayed in parallel. In addition, in a configuration in which the shielding image GF is displayed while waiting for a customer, a configuration is preferable in which the shielding image GF is displayed throughout the customer waiting state, and the shielding image GF is hidden when the second special symbol starts changing. be.

(18) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the display of all the start images (GF, GT, GS3) is completed by the time the first game in the second time-saving game state ends. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the start image can be displayed until the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a time period for displaying the start image is predetermined, and a plurality of games can be executed until the time period elapses.

(19) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in the game at the start of the second time-saving game state (transition game, first game of the second time-saving game state), the start image (the shielding image GF, the entering image GT, and the right-handed image Part or all of GS3) was displayed, and then the production pattern GA was stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the game at the start of the second time-saving game state (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "starting game"), if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the loss is displayed after the start image is displayed. The production pattern GA corresponding to is stopped and displayed.

If a jackpot game is won in the starting game, a configuration is assumed in which the starting image (part or all) that is originally displayed in the starting game is not displayed. With the above configuration, there may be an inconvenience that the success or failure of the jackpot lottery in the start game is detected by the presence or absence of the display of the start image. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this modification, a configuration is adopted in which the starting image can be displayed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the starting game.

For example, assume that the modification is adopted in the first embodiment described above. In the first embodiment, in the start game (the first game in the second time-saving game state), the screen M1 is displayed, then the shielding image GF is displayed, and the rush effect is executed (the rush image GT is displayed). , the mode selection effect is executed, and the right-handed hit image GS3 is displayed (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)). Further, after the right-handed game image GS3 is displayed, the screen is switched to the time-saving medium screen M7 (see FIG. 17(a)) in the second time-saving game state, and the effect image GA is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed.

In this modification, in the first embodiment described above, the screen M1 is displayed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the game at the start, and then the shielding image GF is displayed, the rush effect is executed, and the mode selection effect is performed. This is executed, and the right-hand hitting image GS3 is displayed. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, then the effect pattern GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed (same as the first embodiment). In addition, in this modification, when a jackpot game is won in the starting game, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed after the right hit image GS3 is displayed. For example, when switching to the time saving medium screen M7 after the right-hand hitting image GS3 is displayed, the effect movable body 32 moves to the appearance position. Thereafter, when the effect movable body 32 moves to the retreat position, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed. That is, when a jackpot is won in the starting game, the performance symbols GA corresponding to the jackpot are stopped and displayed at once without intervening the ready-to-win performance. However, in the starting game, after a series of starting images are displayed and after performing a production (reach production, etc.) that can be executed in other time-saving mode B games, the same as in other time-saving mode B games. , a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is announced.

In the above modification, since a predetermined starting image is displayed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery, it is difficult to detect the result of the jackpot lottery depending on whether or not the starting image is displayed. In addition, in the starting game, it is preferable that the ready-to-win effect is not executed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery. If the ready-to-win performance is executed in the game at the start, the ready-to-win performance is started after the above-mentioned entry performance and mode selection performance. Therefore, the inconvenience that the game at the beginning becomes excessively long is assumed. The configuration in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed in the game at the start has the advantage that the above-mentioned inconveniences are suppressed. Alternatively, in the start game, the reach effect may be executed with a lower probability than other games in the time saving mode B, regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery. However, in this modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the starting image is not displayed in the starting game where the player wins in the jackpot lottery (for example, when winning the premium performance).

Further, in a starting game in which a jackpot is won, a part of the starting image that is displayed in a losing starting game may be displayed, and the other part may not be displayed. For example, assume a configuration in which a shielding image GF, a rush image GT, and a right-handed image GS3 are displayed in this order in a game at the start of a loss. In the above configuration, in the starting game in which a jackpot is won, the shielding image GF is displayed in the same way as in the losing starting game, and the entering image GT and the right-hand hit image GS3 are not displayed.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in subtraction in each game. In the above configuration, in a game in which a jackpot is won, the remaining number of times N is not subtracted, so that the subtraction display of the number in the remaining number of times image GN may be omitted. Similarly, in a game in which a jackpot is won, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is not subtracted, so that the subtraction display of the numbers in the time-saving remaining image GJ may be omitted.

However, if the above configuration is adopted, and the number in the remaining number of times image GN is displayed as a subtraction immediately after the game starts, the result of the jackpot lottery can be detected by the presence or absence of the subtraction display immediately after the game starts. This may cause inconvenience. Specifically, in a configuration in which the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN are subtracted and displayed in a game where the jackpot is won immediately after the game is started, and the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN are not displayed in a subtracted manner in a losing game, the subtraction is not displayed. At that point, it becomes clear that you have won the jackpot. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in a subtracted manner, regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery (regardless of whether the remaining number of times N is subtracted or not). Similarly, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the numbers in the time-saving remaining image GJ are displayed in a subtracted manner, regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery (regardless of whether the remaining number of times M is subtracted or not).

(21) In each of the above embodiments, there may be one type of music corresponding to the time-saving mode A, or a plurality of types may be provided. Moreover, the number of music pieces corresponding to the time saving mode B may be one type, or a plurality of types may be provided. For example, in the first embodiment, a common song may be played in time saving mode B in the first time saving game state and time saving mode B in the second time saving game state, or different songs may be played. It's okay. Further, the time saving mode A in the first time saving game state and the time saving mode B in the second time saving game state may have a configuration in which the songs are common or different.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, in the time saving mode A of the first time saving game state, the variable pattern determination table Ta1 was referred to in the early game, and the variable pattern determination table Ta2 was referred to in the late game. In the above configuration, when the power is cut off in time saving mode A, it is preferable that the image that can be displayed at the time of recovery is the same regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table (Ta1, Ta2). In addition, even if a configuration is adopted in which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is switched between the beginning and the end of the second time-saving game state, if the power is cut off at the beginning of the second time-saving game state, and when the power is cut off at the end of the second time-saving game state, It is preferable to have a configuration in which the images that can be displayed at the time of restoration are common in both cases.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the table scenario S may be changed when a small win is won.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can check the remaining number N until the second time-saving gaming state at any time. For example, in the first embodiment described above, the remaining number N is kept secret during the period in which the gaming machine 1 can execute the game immediately after the power is turned on. In the above configuration, information for specifying the current value of the remaining number of times N (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times information") is displayed by operating the operation unit provided in a position where the player cannot operate. May be adopted. A possible location for providing the above-mentioned operation section is, for example, on the main control board 110. In the above configuration, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the remaining number of times information is displayed on the base display 114 or (and) the image display device 21. Moreover, as a position to provide the operation section, for example, on the production control board 120 can be considered. In the above configuration, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the remaining number of times information is displayed on the image display device 21.

Further, as the above-mentioned operation section, a new dedicated operation section may be adopted, or an existing operation section may be adopted. For example, the clear button 30 may be employed as the operation section. In the above configuration, when the clear button 30 is operated outside the period when clear operations can be accepted, the remaining number of times information is displayed. Further, the remaining number of times information may be displayed in accordance with the operation of the cross key 40 and the effect button 8. In the above configuration, if the cross key 40 or the effect button 8 is operated in a predetermined manner during a period when the player's operation of the cross key 40 and the effect button 8 is invalid (for example, a period immediately after the power is turned on), the remaining A configuration in which the number of times information is displayed is conceivable. Note that, similarly to the remaining number of times information, the administrator of the gaming machine may be configured to be able to check at any time whether or not the activation period has expired. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the administrator of the gaming machine can check both the remaining number of times information and whether or not the activated period has expired at any time.

(25) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the opening manner of the second starting port 14 in each time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving game state may be made more disadvantageous than the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving gaming state is more advantageous than the non-time-saving gaming state, while the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving gaming state is more advantageous than the non-time-saving gaming state. It is also possible to have a configuration that is substantially the same (slightly advantageous) as the state.

As a specific example of the above modification, for example, a jackpot symbol A and a jackpot symbol B are provided, and after the end of the jackpot game that started with the jackpot symbol A stopped and displayed, it is a low probability game state, and the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed. After the jackpot that started with this, the game shifts to a high probability game state for 30 times (so-called "ST machine"). The probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/300 in a low probability game state and about 1/100 in a high probability game state.

Further, when the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state or second time-saving game state), the game shifts to the time-saving game state 30 times after the jackpot game ends. The above 30 time-saving game states are low probability game states. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state, the game shifts to the 60-time time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the above 60 time-saving game states, the first 30 times are high probability game states, and the latter 30 times are low probability game states. That is, when a jackpot is won in the time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends after the low probability non-time-saving game state is executed 30 times at maximum, regardless of the type of jackpot symbol.

However, when the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving game state, the game shifts to the time-saving game state for 1000 times after the jackpot ends. Further, even when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed in a non-time-saving game state, the game shifts to the time-saving game state 1000 times after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the 1000-time time-saving game state, the game shifts to the 1000-time time-saving game state again after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the type of the jackpot symbol. The opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving game state is more advantageous than in the non-time-saving game state.

In addition, the initial value of the remaining number of times N in the second time-saving game state is the numerical value "30", and if 30 games (losses) are executed in the low-probability game state, then the transition to the second time-saving game state is made. . The opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving game state is substantially the same as the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the non-time-saving gaming state. Further, the second time-saving gaming state continues until a maximum of 500 games are played, and then shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state.

In the above modification, immediately after the above-mentioned 30 low probability non-time saving gaming states (first time saving gaming states) end, 500 second time saving gaming states are started. However, if the player wins a jackpot in the above time-saving game state, he cannot move to the 1000-time time-saving game state. Therefore, the player will not win the jackpot until the second time-saving gaming state ends and the player transitions to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (until 530 games are completed after transitioning to the low-probability gaming state). Play a game for a certain purpose.

However, in this modified example, in the jackpot lottery in the non-time saving game state, there is a case where the "third time saving" is won. The probability of winning the third time saving is, for example, approximately 1/300. When winning the third time saving game, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol and the game shifts to the third time saving game state. However, if the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving game state, the third time saving is not started. Like the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state continues for a maximum of 500 games, and the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is substantially the same as the non-time-saving game state. Furthermore, when winning a jackpot in the third time-saving game state, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state of 30 or 60 times, similarly to when winning a jackpot in other time-saving game states. In the above configuration, in the non-time saving game state, the player plays the game with the aim of winning the jackpot before the third time saving.

According to the above modification, it becomes possible to provide players with new gameplay features. It should be noted that a plurality of types of time-saving symbols may be provided, and the number of games in the third time-saving game state may be changed depending on the type of time-saving symbols.

(26) In each of the above embodiments, immediately after displaying the recovery screen upon power restoration, a screen that can be displayed during the gaming period (for example, the screen shown in FIG. 23(b)) is displayed. However, in the case of a customer waiting state immediately after the recovery screen is displayed, a screen (such as a demo screen) that is displayed only in the customer waiting state may be displayed.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the customer waiting screen can be displayed even in the time-saving gaming state. However, it is preferable that the above-mentioned installation notification image GK is not displayed on the customer waiting screen in the time-saving gaming state.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the average fluctuation time of the special figure is shorter in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode. Specifically, in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery, the average time of the fluctuation pattern of the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 (immediately preceding mode) is referred to is shorter than that in the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 (normal mode) is referred to. The configuration is suitable. In the above configuration, when the normal mode is shifted to the immediately preceding mode, the average time of each game is shortened. That is, in the period immediately before the start of the second time-saving game state, the average time of each game is shortened.

For example, assume a comparison example in which the average fluctuation time of a special figure does not change between the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. In the comparison example above, depending on the determined fluctuation pattern, the last mode may be prolonged. In the above case, the player who wants to start the second time-saving game state early may experience stress and inconvenience. In the above-mentioned modified example, since the average variation time of the special figure in the immediately preceding mode is shorter than that in the normal mode, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed compared to, for example, the comparative example.

(29) In each of the above embodiments, the execution frequency of each effect in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode can be changed as appropriate. By the way, some players may wish to move to the second time-saving gaming state rather than winning the jackpot in the last-minute mode. The above-mentioned players may find it troublesome to perform a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a "high expectation performance") in the last-minute mode. That is, there arises an inconvenience in that the highly anticipated performance, which is originally long-awaited by the player, is felt to be a nuisance.

In consideration of the above circumstances, a configuration may be adopted in which, in a game in which a jackpot lottery results in a loss, a high expectation performance is more difficult to perform in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode. For example, assume a configuration in which a mini-game performance in which an instruction is given to operate the performance button 8 in a predetermined manner is provided as a highly anticipated performance. In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which, in a game in which a jackpot lottery results in a loss, the mini game performance is less likely to be selected in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode. According to the modification, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which highly anticipated performances other than mini-game performances are less likely to be selected in the immediately preceding mode.

(30) In each of the above embodiments, a first jackpot game with a first number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) and a second jackpot game with a second number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds) smaller than the first number of rounds. It is also possible to provide a structure in which the degree of expectation of winning the first jackpot game is suggested by the fluctuation pattern. For example, in the second time-saving game state, a configuration may be considered in which the immediate winning effect is more difficult to be executed in a game in which the first jackpot game is won than in a game in which the second jackpot game is won.

(31) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the type of time-saving gaming state is appropriately notified. For example, the background image GH may be different in each time saving game state. Further, in each time-saving game state, the BGM may be different, and the performance symbols GA may be different. The timing at which the type of time-saving gaming state is notified can be set as appropriate. For example, a configuration may be considered in which the type of time-saving game state is notified when each time-saving game state is started.

As a specific example of the modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the small symbol Ga is displayed in the time-saving entry performance regardless of which time-saving game state is started. In the above configuration, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the jackpot symbol is displayed in the time-saving rush performance when the first time-saving game state is started. In addition, in the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state is started, a small symbol Ga corresponding to the losing symbol is displayed, and in the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started, it corresponds to the time-saving symbol. A small pattern Ga is displayed. Therefore, the player has the advantage of being able to grasp the type of time-saving game state to be started from the small symbol Ga displayed in the time-saving entry effect.

(32) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in the time-saving entry performance in the second time-saving game state, the performance symbol GA is hidden, the small symbol Ga, the pending image GB, and the fourth symbol GC are displayed, and then the entry image GT is displayed. May be displayed. The above configuration has the advantage that the visibility of the entry image GT is improved, and the time-saving entry performance in the first time-saving game state and the time-saving entry performance in the second time-saving game state are easily distinguished. It is sufficient if the time-saving effect in the first time-saving game state and the time-saving effect in the second time-saving game state can be distinguished, and the image displayed in the time-saving effect in the second time-saving game state is the effect image GA, small Any of the symbols Ga, the reserved image GB, and the fourth symbol GC may be used, and it is sufficient that at least one of the symbols is displayed. Similarly, in the time-saving entry performance in the third time-saving game state, the performance symbol GA may be hidden, the small symbol Ga, the pending image GB, and the fourth symbol GC may be displayed, and then the entry image GT may be displayed.

(33) In each of the above embodiments, the result image GP may be displayed when the second time saving game state ends. The above configuration has the advantage that it is easier for the player to recognize that the second time-saving game state has ended, compared to a configuration in which the result image GP is not displayed when the second time-saving game state ends. Similarly, the result image GP may be displayed when the third time saving game state ends. The above configuration has the advantage that it is easier for the player to recognize that the third time-saving game state has ended, compared to a configuration in which the result image GP is not displayed when the third time-saving game state ends.

(34) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in a gaming state where the time-saving symbol is valid (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), when the time-saving symbol stops, a special effect symbol GA (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving effect symbol") is stopped and displayed. It is preferable to use the following configuration. On the other hand, in a gaming state where the time-saving symbols are invalid, it is preferable that the performance symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed when the time-saving symbol is stopped.

However, in a game state in which the time-saving symbols are invalid, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, the time-saving effect symbols may be stopped and displayed. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the time-saving effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the game state where the time-saving symbols are invalid are different from the time-saving effects symbols that are stopped and displayed in the game state where the time-saving symbols are valid.

(35) The symbol combinations corresponding to the time-saving symbols are not limited to the examples of each form described above. For example, assume a configuration in which the production pattern GA includes a "special symbol" different from the numbers "1 to 9". In the above configuration, for example, "7, special symbol, 7" may be adopted as the symbol combination corresponding to the time saving symbol.

In the above modification, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the special symbol among the three symbols is stopped and displayed last. Further, as the special symbol, a symbol displaying characters indicating a transition to a time-saving game state (for example, a character string "time-saving") is preferably adopted. Furthermore, it is preferable that the special symbols are not included in symbol combinations other than those corresponding to the time-saving symbols.

In the above modification, the special symbol may not be included in the dynamically displayed performance symbols GA during the period when the ready-to-win performance is not executed, and the special symbol may be displayed in the period after the ready-to-win performance is executed. In the above configuration, in a game where the time-saving symbols are not displayed in a stopped state, the special symbols may be displayed in a variable manner. With the above configuration, even in a game where the time-saving symbols are not displayed in a stopped state, it is possible to improve the expectation level that the time-saving symbols will be displayed in a stopped state. All or some of the above configurations may be adopted.

(36) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (the final game of the low probability non-time-saving game state), the normal effect pattern GA corresponding to a loss was displayed. Instead of the above configuration, a special effect pattern GA may be displayed in the game that shifts to the second time saving game state. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the performance symbol GA displaying the words "Time-saving game start!" is stopped and displayed in a game that transitions to the second time-saving game state. However, the special performance symbols GA displayed in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state are the performance symbols GA corresponding to the time-saving symbols, the performance symbols GA corresponding to the jackpot symbols, and the performance symbols GA corresponding to the small winning symbols. Distinct (different) configurations are preferred.

(37) In each of the above embodiments, the period during which the result image GP is displayed can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the final game in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends, the result image GP starts to be displayed, and then the second pending number becomes 0. The result image GP may be configured to be hidden after being subtracted and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped. That is, in the low probability non-time saving game state, the result image GP may continue to be displayed until the first variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 can be started.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which no limit period is provided before transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the determination information (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first determination information") acquired when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 is held in the second time-saving gaming state (first determination information). 2) Even if it is determined that the game is in the time-saving gaming state, the pending change effect based on the first determination information is executed in the non-time-saving gaming state.

However, in a configuration in which the player is continuously notified that he/she holds the right to win the jackpot in the second time-saving gaming state, there may be an inconvenience that the player's gambling spirit is excessively stimulated. Therefore, in a configuration in which no limit period is provided before transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the pending change performance in the pending image GB is canceled when transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the pending image GB displayed in a special manner in the non-time saving game state is displayed in a normal manner in the second time saving game state. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending image GB, which was displayed in a special mode immediately before shifting to the third time-saving game state, is displayed in a normal mode in the third time-saving game state.

(39) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which a limit period is provided before transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state. Specifically, a configuration may be considered in which the limited period is from when it is determined in advance that the third time saving game will be won until the time when the game moves to the third time saving gaming state.

(40) In the above-mentioned embodiment, when transitioning to the second time-saving game state, the right-handed game is executed regardless of whether the first game of the second time-saving game state is executed (regardless of the presence or absence of the number of reservations). The start image GR was displayed. In addition, regardless of whether or not the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed, a voice instructing to start the right-handed game is output, and BGM in the second time-saving game state is output.

Instead of the above configuration, on the condition that the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed, the right-handed game start image GR is displayed, and a sound instructing that the right-handed game should be started is output, A configuration may be adopted in which the BGM of the second time-saving game state is output. In addition, on the condition that the first game in the third time-saving game state is executed, the right-handed game start image GR is displayed, a sound instructing that the right-handed game should be started is output, and the third time-saving game state is The configuration may be such that the BGM of the following is output.

(41) In the above-described embodiment, when the second time-saving gaming state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, regardless of whether or not the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed (the number of pending The left-handed batting start image GL was displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the left-handed batting. Furthermore, regardless of whether or not the first game in the low probability non-time-saving game state is executed, a voice instructing that the left-handed game should be started was output.

Instead of the above configuration, on the condition that the first game in the low probability non-time-saving game state is executed, the left-handed game start image GL is displayed, and a voice instructing that the left-handed game should be started is output. A configuration may also be used. Furthermore, when transitioning from the third time-saving gaming state to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, on the condition that the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed, the left-handed game start image GL is displayed, and the left-handed game is started. A configuration may also be adopted in which a voice instructing the user to start the process is output.

(42) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in addition to the opportunity of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot game may be executed when the game ball passes through a specific area (so-called 1 type 2 type game). (Can also be used as a machine) In the above specific areas, game balls can be won in small winning games. That is, when a small hit is won and the game ball lands in a specific area in the small winning game, the jackpot game is executed. In the above modification, the cumulative number m is not initialized when a small hit is won, but the cumulative number m is initialized when a game ball enters a specific area.

In the above modification, a high probability gaming state is not provided, and the probability of winning the jackpot is Common. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 14, the probability of winning a small hit is higher than the probability of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, in the time-saving gaming state, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 14. With the above configuration, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state.

In this modification, a second time-saving game state may be provided. In the above configuration, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n, the game substantially shifts to a high probability state of a jackpot game. Further, in the modified example, a third time-saving game state may be provided. In the above configuration, when the time-saving symbols stop, the game essentially shifts to a high probability state of a jackpot game.

(43) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the number of time-savings N3 in the third time-saving game state may be changed depending on the game state in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. For example, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings N3 may be longer than when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings N3 may be shorter than when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state.

(44) In each of the above embodiments, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the fluctuation patterns of the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state may be different. Moreover, the fluctuation patterns of the first time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state may be different, and the fluctuation patterns of the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state may be different.

(45) In each of the above embodiments, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n in the third time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is activated, it may be configured to notify that fact. If the opening mode of the second starting port 14 does not change when the second time-saving game state is activated in the third time-saving game state, there is an inconvenience that the player will not be able to grasp that the second time-saving game state has been activated. is assumed. According to the modification, the above-mentioned inconveniences are suppressed. For example, in the third time-saving game state, by displaying the cumulative number of times m, the presence or absence of transition to the second time-saving game state is substantially notified. It should be noted that the fact that the second time-saving gaming state has been activated is notified at an appropriate timing. For example, when the third time-saving game state ends, it may be configured to notify that the second time-saving game state has been activated.

(46) In each of the above embodiments, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the third time-saving game state may be different for each time-saving symbol. With the above configuration, the fun of the game is improved compared to a configuration in which the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the third time-saving game state does not change depending on the time-saving symbol.

(47) In each of the above-described embodiments, a pending change performance is shown as an example of a specific performance, but the specific performance is not limited to a pending change performance. For example, a specific effect may be adopted in which a predetermined lamp in the gaming machine 1 emits light in a specific manner. Further, a specific effect in which a special image is displayed on the image display device 31 may be adopted. For example, as a specific effect, an effect that displays a text image that says "extremely hot zone" can be considered. In the above configuration, when a jackpot is pre-determined, the character image "Intense Heat Zone" is more likely to be displayed than when a loss is pre-determined.

(48) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the pending change performance (specific performance) that can be determined may be different depending on whether the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot or the result of the preliminary determination is a third time reduction. For example, the final special aspect of the pending image GB that can be determined may be different depending on whether the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot or the result of the preliminary determination is a third time saving. In the above configuration, if the preliminary determination result is a jackpot, the pending image GB may change to a rainbow color, but if the preliminary determination result is a third time shortening, the pending image GB does not change to a rainbow color. Conceivable.

(49) In each of the above embodiments, the time during which the right-handed hitting start image GR is displayed can be changed as appropriate. Further, the time during which the right-handed game start image GR is displayed may be changed for each time-saving game state. For example, in the first embodiment described above, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the right-handed hitting start image GR is displayed for a longer period of time in the second time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state. Further, it is preferable that the right-handed hitting start image GR is displayed for a longer period of time in the third time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state. In the above configuration, the right-handed hitting start image GR may be different between the first time-saving game state and the other time-saving game states. Note that when the first time-saving game state starts, the right-handed hitting start image GR may not be displayed.

(50) The time-saving gaming state of each form described above ends when the total number of times that the first special symbol display device 20 fluctuates and displays and the second special symbol display device 21 fluctuates and displays reaches the time-saving number N. . However, the trigger for ending the time-saving gaming state is not limited to the example of the first embodiment. For example, when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 has fluctuatedly displayed and the number of times the second special symbol display device 21 has fluctuatedly displayed has reached 50, the number of times the second special symbol display device 21 has fluctuatedly displayed The time-saving gaming state may be configured to end at the first opportunity that is established out of the opportunity that reaches five times and the opportunity that one small win is won.

Furthermore, the termination trigger may be different for each time-saving game state. For example, the first time-saving game state is triggered when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 fluctuates and the second special symbol display device 21 fluctuates and displays reaches 50, and the second special symbol is displayed. The process ends at the first opportunity that occurs when the number of times the device 21 performs variable display reaches five times and when one small win is won. In addition, the second time-saving game state is activated when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 fluctuates and the second special symbol display device 21 fluctuates and displays reaches 500, and the second special symbol is displayed. The process ends when the first of the triggers when the number of variable displays by the device 21 reaches 20 and the triggers when the small win is won four times is realized. Furthermore, the third time-saving game state is activated when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 fluctuates and the number of times the second special symbol display device 21 fluctuates reaches 30, and the second special symbol is displayed. A configuration is conceivable in which the process ends when the first of the triggers when the number of times the device 21 performs variable display reaches six times and the triggers when the small win is won three times is realized.

(51) In each of the above embodiments, the effect mode (background image GH, BGM, effects that can be determined) in each time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the performance mode of the third time saving game state may be made different depending on the number of time saving times N3 (100 times, 1000 times). In addition, in the third time-saving game state where the number of time-savings N3 is 1000 times, the production mode for the first 100 times is the same as the performance mode of the third time-saving game state where the number of time-savings N3 is 100 times, and in the 101st and subsequent games. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the production mode changes. Furthermore, in the above configuration, it is preferable that the performance mode of the first time-saving game state and the performance mode of the third time-saving game state (the performance modes before and after the change) are different.

(52) In each of the above embodiments, the remaining number of times image GF that displays the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state may be omitted. In addition, the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in some time-saving gaming states (for example, the first time-saving gaming state), and the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed in some other time-saving gaming states (for example, the second time-saving gaming state). You can also use it as Furthermore, the remaining number of times image GF may be hidden in the early stage of the time-saving gaming state, and the remaining number of times image GF may be displayed in the latter half of the time-saving gaming state.

As a specific example of the above modification, the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in the first time saving game state and the third time saving game state, the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed at the beginning of the second time saving game state, and the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in the second time saving game state. A configuration may be considered in which the remaining number of times image GF is started to be displayed after the remaining number of times M2 in the gaming state is subtracted to a predetermined value (for example, 100). In the above configuration, the remaining number of times image GF may not be displayed even after the beginning of the second time saving game state.

(53) In each of the above embodiments, the type of time-saving symbols can be changed as appropriate. For example, a configuration may be provided in which a plurality of types of one or both of the time-saving symbols that transition to the third time-saving game state 1000 times and the time-saving symbols that transition to the third time-saving gaming state 100 times are provided. For example, a configuration may be considered in which the first time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, and the state shifts to the third time-saving game state 100 times.

(54) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the production pattern GA corresponding to the time-saving pattern may be different depending on the time-saving pattern, or may be the same for the time-saving pattern. For example, when a time-saving symbol that moves to the third time-saving game state 1000 times is displayed in a stopped state, and when a time-saving symbol that moves to the third time-saving game state 100 times is stopped and displayed, an effect that is stopped and displayed. The symbols GA may be common or different.

(55) In each of the above embodiments, the period during which the time-saving rush effect is executed is changed as appropriate. For example, the confirmation period when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is extended from the normal confirmation period. Specifically, the time of the confirmation period when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is extended to the same extent as the ending period of the jackpot game.

In the above configuration, the time-saving entry effect may be executed when transitioning to the third time-saving game state in the fixed period when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, it may be configured to shift to the third time-saving gaming state after the fixed period ends. Furthermore, in a configuration that executes a time-saving entry performance in a confirmed period, when adopting a configuration that shifts to a third time-saving gaming state after the confirmed period ends, the performance symbols GA and small symbols Ga are displayed during the confirmed period. may or may not be displayed.

(56) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the player can arbitrarily change (customize) the execution frequency of the specific performance. However, no matter which execution frequency is changed, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the specific effect is executed less frequently during the above-mentioned limited period than during periods other than the limited period.

(57) In each of the above embodiments, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 may have a configuration in which the special symbols can be displayed simultaneously (in parallel) in a variable manner. In the above configuration, the first reserved number is used up regardless of whether the second special symbol display device 21 displays a variable display, and the second reserved number is used up regardless of whether or not the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variable display. Ru.

In the above configuration, a configuration is assumed in which the cumulative number m is added when the special symbol stops, similar to the first embodiment described above. Furthermore, assume that the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variable display in the n-th game, and the second special symbol display device 21 displays a variable display in the n+1-th game. Furthermore, it is assumed that the n+1-th game ends before the n-th game (the variable display on the second special symbol display device 21 stops before the variable display on the first special symbol display device 20). In the above case, the cumulative number m is updated to the numerical value "n" at the end of the (n+1)th game. Therefore, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the state shifts to the second time-saving gaming state at the end of the n+1-th game.

A configuration is assumed in which the cumulative number m is added at the start of the variable display of special symbols. Furthermore, assume that the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variable display in the n-th game, and the second special symbol display device 21 displays a variable display in the n+1-th game. Furthermore, it is assumed that the n+1-th game ends before the n-th game (the variable display on the second special symbol display device 21 stops before the variable display on the first special symbol display device 20). In the above case, the cumulative number m is updated to the numerical value "n" at the start of the n-th game. Therefore, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the game shifts to the second time-saving game state at the start of the n-th game.

(58) In each of the above embodiments, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol in the n-th game may be different from the variation pattern in other games. For example, when the variation pattern of the special symbols in the n-th game is determined, it is preferable that the image display device 31 notifies you of the transition to the second time-saving game state. Further, the period for determining the special symbol may be extended in a game with the nth activation from a game before the nth activation. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the time-saving entry performance in the case of transitioning to the second time-saving game state is executed in the fixed period in the n-th game. Furthermore, it may be configured to shift to the second time-saving gaming state after the extended fixed period ends.

However, when the cumulative number m is initialized at the start of a jackpot game, and then the n-th game is executed, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols in the game will be changed, and the trigger other than the start of the jackpot game ( For example, when the cumulative number m is initialized by the operation of the clear button 30, and then the nth game is executed, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern in the game is not changed (it does not change from the previous game). It is. In addition, the cumulative number m is initialized at the start of a jackpot game, and if the n-th game is subsequently executed, the confirmation period for that game is extended, and the trigger other than the start of the jackpot game (for example, clear If the cumulative number m is initialized by the operation of the button 30, and then the n-th game is executed, it is preferable that the fixed period for the game is not extended. In the above configuration, since the administrator of the gaming machine cannot arbitrarily change the variation time and fixed period of the special symbols, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game is suppressed.

(59) In each of the above embodiments, as a specific example of ending the time saving gaming state when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a configuration has been described in which the time saving gaming state ends before the fixed period ends. However, in a configuration in which the time-saving gaming state ends when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving gaming state may end before the fixed period ends.

For example, in the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing (FIG. 18), the time-saving end determination processing (S234 in the same figure) may be provided before step S233 for providing a definite period. Specifically, a time saving end determination process may be provided between step S233 and the third time saving transition determination process (S232). Further, a time saving end determination process may be provided between the third time saving transition determination process and the second time saving transition determination process (S231), or a time saving end determination process may be provided immediately before the second time saving transition determination process. good.

In addition, in the modified example, the fixed period of the game in which the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends is the longest period during which the opening/closing door 14b is controlled to the operating mode Db. A configuration in which the time is longer than 1 is preferable. In the above configuration, there is no case where the opening/closing door 14b is in the operating state Db at the time when the non-time saving gaming state is started after the time saving gaming state ends. Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, a situation in which a game ball enters the second starting port 14 is suppressed.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, the timing at which the cumulative number of times command is transmitted may be at the start of the game or at the end of the game. Further, the cumulative number command may be transmitted in all games, or the cumulative number command may be transmitted in some games (for example, every 100 games).

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, instead of the cumulative number command indicating the cumulative number m, a command indicating the remaining number of operations "nm" up to the number of operations n may be transmitted to the production control board 120. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which neither the command indicating the remaining number of operations up to the number of operations n nor the cumulative number of times command is transmitted to the production control board 120. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 121 calculates the current value of the cumulative number m by counting the number of times a command (for example, a symbol confirmation command) that is transmitted when the special symbol is stopped (when adding the cumulative number m) is received. Alternatively, it is possible to notify the remaining number of operations up to n.

(61) In the above-mentioned form, it may be configured such that it is possible to shift to a dedicated performance mode (a mode in which a dedicated performance can be executed) immediately after the second time-saving game state ends. Further, in the above-described dedicated performance mode, a configuration in which dedicated BGM is output is preferable. Similarly, immediately after the third time-saving game state ends, it may be configured to be able to shift to a dedicated performance mode (a mode in which a dedicated performance can be executed). Further, in the above-described dedicated performance mode, a configuration in which dedicated BGM is output is preferable. In addition, after each time-saving game state ends, it may be configured to shift to a common special performance mode.

(62) In each of the above embodiments, when the second time-saving gaming state ends and transitions to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, even if the number of games in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state reaches the number of operations n, the second time-saving gaming state ends. Does not shift to time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, it is preferable that in the low probability non-time saving gaming state after the second time saving gaming state ends, it is notified that the second time saving gaming state has already ended. Specifically, a configuration can be considered in which the cumulative number m is displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state after the second time saving gaming state ends. If the displayed cumulative number of times m is greater than the numerical value "800", it is understood that the second time-saving game state has already ended.

(63) In each of the above embodiments, a specific performance (such as a pending change performance) that notifies (suggests) in advance that the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state is not executed in accordance with the result of the preliminary determination. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a specific performance that notifies (suggests) in advance that the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state is executed.

(64) In each of the above embodiments, the time saving symbols may be effective in the time saving game state. For example, assume that the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the second time-saving game state. In the above case, a configuration may be adopted in which both the second time saving game state and the third time saving game state operate in parallel. However, in the time-saving game state after the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the second time-saving game state, it is preferable that the open mode of the opening/closing door 14b in the second time-saving game state is maintained.

(65) In each of the above-mentioned forms, during the period after the number of times it is determined that the jackpot lottery has not been won in the jackpot lottery in the low probability gaming state reaches the number of activations n, at the time when the special symbol stops, the second time shortening Moved to gaming state. However, if it is a period after the number of times it is determined that a jackpot lottery has not been won in the low probability game state reaches the number of operations n, the timing of shifting to the second time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate.

For example, the number of times it is determined that the player has not won the jackpot (the cumulative number of times m) may be updated (added, subtracted) immediately after the jackpot lottery (immediately after the start of the game). With the above configuration, it is possible to shift to the second time saving game state immediately after the start of the game. When adopting a configuration in which the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state immediately after the start of the game, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the right-handed lamp 28 lights up immediately after the start of the game and the above-mentioned advantageous period signal (external information signal) is in the ON state. It is. In the above configuration, the above-mentioned non-counting period is started when the game shifts to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game.

In the above modification, it is preferable that the above-mentioned time-saving entry performance is executed when the game transitions to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game. In addition, when the game shifts to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game, an image notifying that the game should be played with the right hand (for example, the above-mentioned right-hand game Gsy) starts to be displayed, and the background image of the time-saving game state A configuration that switches to GH is preferable. In addition, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state was made before the end of the special symbol confirmation period, but it may be configured to transition to the second time-saving gaming state after the confirmation period ends.

(66) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state is subtracted at the end of the game, but a configuration may also be adopted in which the remaining number of times M is subtracted at the start of the game. In the above configuration, the time saving game state ends at the start of the game. For example, the second time-saving game state ends immediately after the 1000th game is started. In the above case, in the second time saving game state, when the 1000th game is started, the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off and the above-mentioned counting period is started.

(67) In each of the above embodiments, a high probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state (high probability non time saving gaming state) may be provided. However, in the high probability non-time saving game state, the time saving symbols are invalid. That is, the time-saving symbols are effective only in a low probability game state. Furthermore, in the high probability non-time saving gaming state, the cumulative number m is not added (maintained at the initial value "0").

(68) In each of the above embodiments, multiple types of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) are provided, and the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in a jackpot lottery (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability gaming state) is set to the setting value. A configuration that changes depending on the situation may be adopted. However, the probability of winning the third time reduction is the same for each set value. Furthermore, the probability of winning a small win is the same for each set value. The above setting values are changed by a setting change process executed in response to a setting change operation by the administrator of the gaming machine 1.

In the above modification, the number of times n of activation of the second time-saving game state is the same for each set value. Specifically, if the probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability gaming state is "ML" (0<M<1), the number of operations n for all setting values is in the range "2.5/ML≦n≦ 3.0/ML" is suitable.

In the above modification, it is preferable that the number of games in the time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as the number of time-savings N) be the same for all setting values. Specifically, the number of time savings N1 in the first time saving game state is common to all setting values, the number of time saving times N2 in the second time saving game state is common to all setting values, and the time saving number N1 in the third time saving game state is common to all setting values. It is preferable that the number of times N3 is the same for all set values. Furthermore, if the minimum jackpot probability among the jackpot probabilities "ML" in the low probability gaming state for each set value is "MLmim" (jackpot probability for the set value "1"), the time saving number N2 is the numerical value "3. 8/MLmim" or less, and the time saving number N3 is preferably configured to have a numerical value of "3.8/MLmim" or less.

(69) In each of the above embodiments, the cumulative number m is not initialized in the setting value change process by changing the setting value and the clear operation process by operating the clear button 30, and a dedicated operation section (hereinafter referred to as "cumulative clear The cumulative number of times m may be initialized when the button ") is operated.

(70) In each of the above embodiments, the cumulative number m may not be initialized in the clear operation processing, but may be initialized in the setting value change processing described above. Alternatively, the cumulative number m may not be initialized when the clear button 30 is operated in a normal mode, but the cumulative number m may be initialized when the clear button 30 is operated in a special mode. For example, when the clear button 30 is operated once, predetermined information is initialized, but the cumulative number m is not initialized, and when the clear button 30 is operated twice consecutively, the predetermined information and the cumulative number m are initialized. A configuration in which both are initialized is conceivable.

(71) In each of the above embodiments, an effect that suggests a setting value may be performed. For example, a configuration may be considered in which, when the time-saving game state ends, a performance that suggests a set value is executed. However, if the player moves to the second time-saving game state among the time-saving game states and does not win the jackpot in the second time-saving game state, the probability of winning the jackpot is likely to be a low set value. Therefore, when the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, a performance that suggests the set value is executed, and when the second time-saving game state ends, the performance that suggests the set value is not performed. is suitable.

(72) In each of the above-described low probability non-time saving game states, a plurality of types of performance symbols GAx may be displayed in accordance with the performance mode in which the game is progressed and the background image GH. Similarly, in the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, a plurality of types of performance symbols GAy may be displayed in accordance with the performance mode in which the game is progressed and the background image GH.

Further, different performance symbols GAy may be displayed in each of the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state, and the third time saving game state. Specifically, a performance pattern GAy that is common in the first time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state is displayed, and a performance pattern GAy that is different from the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is displayed in the third time-saving game state. may also be displayed. In addition, a performance pattern GAy that is common in the second time-saving game state and a third time-saving game state is displayed, and a performance pattern GAy that is different from the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is displayed in the first time-saving game state. It may also be a thing. Furthermore, a performance pattern GAy that is common in the first time-saving game state and a third time-saving game state is displayed, and a performance pattern GAy that is different from the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is displayed in the second time-saving game state. It may also be a thing.

(73) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration when transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is assumed that the number of reservations at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state is a numerical value of "0". That is, assume a case where the player shifts to the customer waiting state (non-gaming state) immediately after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. In this modification, in the above customer waiting state, the right-handed player lamp 28 is lit and the right-handed player image Gsy is displayed. Furthermore, in the modified example, in the above customer waiting state, an emphasized image GZ indicating the character string "0 more times" is displayed.

In this modified example, when a winning is started in the above-mentioned customer waiting state and the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed lamp 28 continues to light up in the game as well, and the right-handed game image Gsy is displayed. Continuously displayed. However, in the modified example, the emphasized image GZ is hidden in the first game of the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, in this modified example, the time-saving entry performance is not executed in the customer waiting state immediately after shifting to the second time-saving game state, and thereafter, the time-saving entry performance is performed in the first game of the second time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the number of reservations is greater than or equal to the numerical value "1" at the time of transitioning to the second time-saving game state, in this modification, immediately after transitioning to the second time-saving game state (in the first game of the second time-saving game state) ), the right-hand hitting lamp 28 is lit, the right-hand hitting image Gsy is displayed, the emphasized image GZ is hidden, and the time-saving entry effect is executed. In addition, in the above modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the time-saving rush effect is executed in the customer waiting state. Alternatively, the number-of-games image GE may be displayed throughout the above-mentioned customer waiting state, and the number-of-games image GE may be hidden during the first game in the second time-saving gaming state.

(74) In each of the above embodiments, the magnitude relationship of the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-saving gaming state, and the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving gaming state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the remaining number M1 may be longer than the remaining number M2, or the remaining number M1 and the remaining number M2 may be equal. Further, the remaining number of times M3 may be longer than the remaining number of times M2, or the remaining number of times M3 and the remaining number of times M2 may be equal. Similarly, the remaining number of times M1 may be longer than the remaining number of times M3, the remaining number of times M1 and the remaining number of times M3 may be equal, or the remaining number of times M3 may be longer than the remaining number of times M1.

(75) In the second embodiment described above, the "first information J1" was exemplified as the "first information related to the execution of the special game specified by advance determination" of the present invention. However, the "first information" of the present invention is not limited to the above example. For example, in the first embodiment, "winning information (starting winning designation command) generated when a random number value for determining a special symbol for a jackpot is obtained" is included in the "first information" of the present invention. Further, in the second embodiment described above, the "second information J2" is exemplified as the "second information related to transition to the second gaming state specified by advance determination" of the present invention. However, the "second information" of the present invention is not limited to the above example. For example, when the random number value for determining a special symbol of loss is acquired the cumulative number of times m, it becomes possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state (second gaming state). Therefore, "winning information (starting winning designation command) generated when the random number value for determining a special symbol of loss is acquired" is included in the "second information" of the present invention.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, specific examples have been shown in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine, but the present invention may also be applied to a pachi-slot machine.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, for example, the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes an acquisition unit (S139 in FIG. 30) that acquires determination information when an acquisition condition is met, and a determination unit (S139 in FIG. 30) that determines whether a special game is appropriate based on the determination information when the determination condition is met. S207 in FIG. 33), a symbol display means (special symbol, image display device 31) that displays a variable display according to the establishment of a judgment condition and stops displaying a symbol according to the result of the judgment, a determining means (S208 in FIG. 33) that determines the fluctuation pattern of When the number of determinations made reaches a predetermined specific number of times, a starting means (S244 in FIG. 35) that can start a second gaming state in which it is easier to satisfy the acquisition condition than the first gaming state, and a winning to the special game A first initializing means (S233 in FIG. 34) that initializes the information in response to the initialization, and a receiving means (S20 in FIG. 27) that accepts a predetermined initialization operation. a second initialization means for initializing the game; and displaying a screen consisting of various images including a game number image whose display content is updated in each game and which can suggest the current value of the number of judgments specified from the information. screen display means, and the determination means is configured to determine whether the information is initialized by the second initialization means, and thereafter the number of determinations reaches a specific number of times and the second gaming state is started , and the first initialization means The information is initialized, and then, when the number of determinations reaches a specific number and the second gaming state is started , a common fluctuation pattern is determined in the fluctuation display after the start of the second gaming state , and the screen is displayed. When the power is turned on, the means displays the game count image with predetermined initial display content regardless of the current value of the determination count specified from the information , and displays the number represented by the game count image for each game. Only 1 can be added and displayed .

According to the above configuration, the second game state can be started after the number of times of determination, which is the number of times it has been determined that the special game has not been won, reaches a predetermined specific number of times. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the second gaming state is not started at this opportunity, the interest of the opportunity for starting the second gaming state is improved. Further, according to the present invention, in the variable display related to the start of the second gaming state, the information is initialized by the second initializing means and then the second gaming state is started, and the first initializing means A common variation pattern is determined for the case where the information is initialized and the second gaming state is started thereafter. Therefore, there is an advantage that the number of types of variation patterns can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the variation patterns for starting the second gaming state are different in each case.

1... Game machine, 10... Game board, 13... First starting port, 14... Second starting port, 31... Image display device, 110... Main control board, 111... Main CPU, 112... Main ROM, 113... Main RAM , 120... Production control board, 121... Sub CPU, 122... Sub ROM, 123... Sub RAM, 140... Lamp control board, 150... Image control board, 151... Host CPU, 152... Host RAM, 152... Host ROM.

Claims (1)

an acquisition means for acquiring determination information when an acquisition condition is met;
a determining means that determines whether or not the special game is appropriate based on the determination information when a determination condition is met;
a symbol display means that displays a symbol in a variable manner depending on the satisfaction of the determination condition and stops displaying a symbol according to the result of the determination;
determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display at the start of the fluctuation display;
Storage means for storing information specifying the number of times it was determined that the special game was not won;
When the number of determinations specified from the information reaches a predetermined specific number, a starting means is capable of starting a second gaming state in which it is easier to satisfy the acquisition condition than the first gaming state;
first initializing means for initializing the information in response to winning the special game;
a reception means for accepting a predetermined initialization operation;
second initialization means for initializing the information when the initialization operation is accepted;
Screen display means for displaying a screen composed of various images including a game count image that can suggest the current value of the judgment count specified from the information and whose display content is updated in each game. The said determining means is
The information is initialized by the second initializing means, and then the second gaming state is started when the number of times of determination reaches the specific number of times , and the information is initialized by the first initializing means. and then determining a common variation pattern in the variation display after the start of the second gaming state in the case where the number of determinations reaches the specific number of times and the second gaming state is started;
The screen display means is
When the power is turned on, displaying the game count image with predetermined initial display content regardless of the current value of the determination count specified from the information ;
The number represented by the number of games image can be added and displayed by only 1 for each game.
Game machine.

Images